JP2020185490A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 1 includes start pockets 2001 capable of receiving a game ball shot into a game area 5a. When a game ball enters the start pockets 2001, determination processing for winning/losing of a jackpot is performed. When a predetermined result is obtained by the determination processing, a game advantageous to a player is performed. In satisfaction of a predetermined performance condition, control is performed to change a mode of a display part itself in a sub-projector display device 6201 in which a display performance is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 47

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine").

Conventionally, as seen in Patent Document 1, for example, there is known a gaming machine in which a special game in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out when a big hit is won is performed.

That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won a prize at the starting port. Then, when a game ball is won at the starting port, a lottery process is performed in which a big hit or the like is drawn. At this time, the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined fluctuating time on a predetermined display. Then, when the predetermined fluctuation time elapses, after the above-mentioned special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won, a special game is performed in which a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player.

Further, in the game machine described in Patent Document 1, a display effect that requires a relatively long time not only in the case of a big hit but also in the case of a loss is performed on the liquid crystal display unit, so that the effect until the special game is performed is performed. I am trying to improve my sexuality.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-187791

By the way, in the liquid crystal display unit, the situation of the game or the production is often shown by changing the type of the background image, the drawing method of the specific character, etc., but such a monotonous display production is tired. It's getting better.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in the interest in gaming.

Means 1: A lottery means for drawing a lot based on the fact that a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and
A privilege granting means capable of executing control to grant a privilege to a player based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a specific result.
An effect image output control means that controls the display output of the effect image according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
An effect additional display body provided so as to be able to add a specific effect element to the effect image displayed and output by the effect image output control means is provided.
When the specific effect element is added by the effect addition display body, the specific movable body that can be visually recognized by the player is positioned in the display area where the effect image is displayed and output. A game machine to be.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest in gaming.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as seen from the front. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the production operation unit of a dish unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is a perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for each main member and looked at from the top. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from below. It is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from above. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the mounting base unit and looked at from the bottom. It is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from above. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the touch unit and looked at from the bottom. It is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from above. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the button unit and looked at from the bottom. It is a top view of the dish unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the part of the effect operation unit enlarged in the cross section AA in FIG. 31. FIG. 3 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the effect operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. 31. (A) is a front view of the lower right effect unit of the door of the plate unit, and (b) is a right side view of the lower right effect unit of the door. It is a perspective view of the lower right door production unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the lower right door production unit as seen from behind. FIG. 34 (b) is a sectional view taken along line CC of the lower right door effect unit of FIG. 34 (b). It is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door production unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door production unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit of the lower right door production unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit disassembled and seen from the back. (A) is a front view of the lower right door rotating body of the door lower right effect unit facing forward, and (b) is a front view of the lower right door rotating body facing backward. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front with the upper plate ball removing unit of the plate unit attached to the plate unit base, and (b) is a perspective view from the back with the upper plate ball removing unit attached to the plate unit base. It is a seen perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the upper plate ball pulling unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the upper plate ball removal unit and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the lower plate ball removing unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower plate ball removing unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of a game board. It is a perspective view which looked down on the game board from the front. It is a perspective view which looked down on the game board from the rear. It is the front view of the game board which omitted the illustration of the front side of a game ball taxiway unit. FIG. 51 (a) is an enlarged view of the game ball taxiway unit, and FIG. 51 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game ball taxiway unit in the longitudinal direction. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the sub projector display device from the front. It is a front view (a) and a side view (b) which show operation at the time of production using a sub-projector display device. It is a front view (a) and a side view (b) which show operation at the time of production using a sub-projector display device. It is a front view (a) and a side view (b) which show operation at the time of production using a sub-projector display device. It is a front view (a) and a side view (b) which show operation at the time of production using a sub-projector display device. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on the form in which a movable accessory is operating. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on other forms in which a movable accessory is operating. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on still another form in which a movable accessory is operating. FIG. 60A is a perspective view of the falling movable accessory viewed from the front, and FIG. 60B is a perspective view of the falling accessory viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the falling accessory from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the falling accessory from the back. It is a front view which shows the 1st operation of a falling accessory. It is a front view which shows the 2nd operation of a falling movable accessory. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on other forms in which a movable accessory is operating. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 66. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to the game ball rental device connection terminal board which relays the electrical connection between a payout control board which constitutes a main board, a CR unit and a frequency display board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 66. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the peripheral control MPU. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 72 to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows an example of various commands from a payout control board received by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power failure occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special control process. It is a flowchart which shows the start opening winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot game start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit game start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number storage means for a special symbol. It is a table which shows each characteristic for each type of jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern table which can be usually selected in the external unfavorable game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16ms steady-state processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the decorative symbol variation start processing (step S1210). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop symbol determination process (step S1225a) in the 1st effect mode. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop symbol determination process (step S1225b) in the 2nd effect mode. (A) is a diagram for explaining an extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit, (b) is a diagram for explaining an extension effect pattern at the time of a small hit, and (c) is a diagram for explaining a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating, and (d) is a figure for demonstrating the challenge bonus production pattern at the time of a small hit. It is a time chart which shows an example of the display effect which appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any one of the effect commands "01H" to "04H" is received from the main control MPU 4100a side. It is a time chart which shows an example of the display effect which appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any one of the effect commands "09H" to "11H" is received from the main control MPU 4100a side. (A) is a table showing the jackpot expectation when in the first production mode, etc. for each production content series, and (b) is the challenge bonus rush expectation when in the second production mode. It is a table which shows each production content series separately. It is a time chart which shows another example about the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "01H" in the 1st effect mode. It is a time chart which shows another example about the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "02H" in the 1st effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect using a liquid crystal display device and a sub-projector display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect using a liquid crystal display device and a sub-projector display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect using a liquid crystal display device and a sub-projector display device.

The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be seen from the player side through the door frame 3 It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which connect both ends of the 20 and extend vertically, are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in the front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a square outer shape in front view and having a through hole 111 penetrating the front and rear, and a game attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 400, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and the game ball attached to the lower right part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201. A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the door into the game area of the game board 5, and a plate unit 200 that receives a game ball that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and fails to hit into the game area. A foul cover unit 520 that discharges to the lower plate 202, a ball feed unit 540 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and for sending the game ball of the upper plate 201 to the ball launcher 680, and a door frame base unit 100. It includes a glass unit 560 that is attached to the rear surface and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 560.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4 attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base when viewed from the front. , And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse L that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. A character-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 600. It is provided with a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from island equipment that is not shown in a box shape, and a game ball that is attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802 and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and are guided by the ball guide unit 820 are paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 and the game ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game ball is usually moved according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200. The upper full tank path unit 850 that discharges from either the discharge port or the full tank discharge port, and the game ball that is attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 and is discharged from the normal discharge port of the upper full tank path unit 850 are forward. To guide the game ball released from the normal taxiway and the full tank discharge port to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 from the front end to the front end to the full tank ball receiving port 530 of the door frame 3 It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank taxiway to guide.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and has a bass speaker inside. The speaker unit 920, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and containing the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 to control the interface inside. A payout control board box that is mounted across the interface control board box 940 that houses the board, the power supply board box 930, and the interface control board box 940, and contains a payout control board that controls the payout of game balls. It is equipped with 950.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is hit, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having a guide rail 1001 to guide the player, a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a rear side of the game panel 1100. A box-shaped board holder 1200 that is attached to the bottom and is open upward, and a main control that is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 and houses a main control board for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. A board box 1300, a table unit (not shown) having a plurality of winning openings mounted in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving a game ball driven into the game area 5a, and a board. A back unit (not shown) having a liquid crystal display device attached to the upper side of the box 1200 and rearward to the game panel 1100 and visible from the player side through the game panel 1100 is provided.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 with the game balls stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. The ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning openings. .. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has a quadrangular outer shape and a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 350, the left side unit 400 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and the front right lower part of the door frame base unit 100. It includes a handle unit 500 that can be attached through the plate unit 200.

Further, the door frame 3 is attached to the foul cover unit 520 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the ball feed unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that closes the through-hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a vertically long rectangular outer shape and having through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear. A tubular handle mounting member 120 mounted on the front right corner of the door frame base 110 in the lower right corner of the front view for mounting the handle unit 500, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. And, the door frame side which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the reinforcement unit 130 on the left end side of the front view and protrudes forward and is rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. It includes an upper hinge member 140, a door frame side lower hinge member 150, and a glass unit mounting member 160 that is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 and for detachably mounting the glass unit 560. There is.

The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202, which are arranged vertically and bulge forward to store the game balls, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. The plate-shaped plate unit base 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 attached to the plate unit base 210 on the front side of the upper plate 201 and capable of displaying an image. , The effect operation unit 220 having the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 that can be operated by the player, the plate unit cover 260 that covers the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 from the front side, and the right side of the front view upper plate 201. The lower right door effect unit 270, which is arranged in the lower right of the door and has the lower right rotating body 270A of the door that rotates according to the game state, the transparent effect unit cover 300 that covers the lower right effect unit 270 of the door from the front side, and the upper An upper plate ball removing unit 310 for pulling out the game ball stored in the plate 201 to the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball removing unit 320 for pulling out the game ball stored in the lower plate 202 downward, and a game. A ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the hall, and mounted on the upper part of the plate unit base 210. It mainly includes an upper plate top decorative member 340 that can be luminescent and decorated.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 and a unit base, which are partially translucent and are attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side. A top decorative member 370 that is mounted in the center of the left and right on the front of the 360 and has translucency that bulges forward, and a top speaker that is mounted inside the top decorative member 370 and outputs high-pitched sound ( (Not shown), and a decorative substrate 380 on the door frame, which is attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and has a plurality of LEDs attached to the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat plate-shaped unit base 410 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the left outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 and a unit. A translucent left side decorative member 420 that is attached to the front surface of the base 410 and whose upper end extends to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decorative member 420. The left speaker unit 430, which is mounted at the upper left corner of 3 and has a left speaker (not shown), and the door frame, which is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 410 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. It includes a left decorative substrate 440 and.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat plate-shaped unit base 460 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the right outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 and a unit. A translucent right side decorative member 470 that is attached to the front side of the base 460 and whose upper end extends to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame in front of the right side decorative member 470. A right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown) mounted at a position in the upper right corner of 3 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface between the unit base 460 and the right side decorative member 470. It is equipped with a door frame right decorative board (not shown) to which the speaker is attached.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the handle body 502 attached to the handle attachment member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 and the handle body 502. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by the player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and rotatably supports the handle lever 504 in cooperation with the handle body 502. And have. Although not shown, the handle unit 500 is mounted inside the handle body 502 to detect the rotation angle of the handle lever 504, and is mounted on the handle body 502 so that the player can operate the handle unit 500. It includes a stop button and a contact detection sensor that is mounted inside the handle body 502 and detects contact between the player and the handle lever 504.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is a shallow box-shaped unit main body 522 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and the front side is open, and the unit main body 522. It mainly includes a flat plate-shaped lid member 524 attached to the front surface. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and a penetrating ball passage that communicates the normal guide path of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. 526 and the full tank receiving port 528 which is open to the rear on the right side of the front view of the penetrating ball passage 526 and can communicate with the full tank guide path of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4, and the full tank. A foul that receives a game ball (foul ball) that opens upward on the right side of the front view of the ball receiving port 528 and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4. The ball receiving port 530 and the lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit 200 while discharging the game balls received in the full tank receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530, which are opened forward in the lower right corner of the front view. It is provided with a ball discharge port 532 that communicates with the 210c.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to a box-shaped unit main body 542 that extends to the left and right and has an open rear side, and a rear side of the unit main body 542. A box-shaped unit cover 544 with an open front side that can be detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the foul cover unit 520, and an upper plate of the plate unit 200 that opens toward the front. A ball advance entrance 546 in which the game ball stored in 201 enters, a ball release port 548 in which the game ball that has entered the ball advance entrance 546 can be released and is open rearward, and a ball advance entrance. It is capable of discharging the game ball that has entered the 546, and is provided with a ball discharge port 550 that opens forward at the lower side of the ball advance entrance 546. Although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 includes a ball feed solenoid for discharging game balls entering from the ball advance entrance 546 one by one from the ball discharge port 548, and a game ball entering from the ball advance entrance 546. Is provided with a switching mechanism for switching between the ball discharge port 548 side and the ball discharge port 550 side.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to a frame-shaped unit frame 562 larger than the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and on both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562. It includes a pair of glass plates 564 that close the inside of the cage unit frame 562.

The dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 17 to 33. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the back. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from above, and FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit disassembled and viewed from below.

Further, FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit disassembled and viewed from below. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit disassembled and viewed from below. FIG. 31 is a plan view of the dish unit, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the effect operation unit in the AA cross section in FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 is an effect operation in the BB section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which shows the part of a unit enlarged.

Further, FIG. 34A is a front view of the lower right door effect unit of the plate unit, FIG. 34B is a right side view of the lower right door effect unit, and FIG. 35 is a front view of the lower right door effect unit. FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the lower right door effect unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of the lower right door effect unit of FIG. 34 (b). FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit of the lower right door effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 42A is a front view of the lower right door rotating body of the door lower right effect unit facing forward, and FIG. 42B is a front view of the lower right door rotating body facing backward.

Further, FIG. 43A is a perspective view seen from the front with the upper plate ball removing unit of the plate unit attached to the plate unit base, and FIG. 43B is a perspective view in which the upper plate ball removing unit is attached to the plate unit base. It is a perspective view seen from the back in the state. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the upper plate ball removing unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the upper plate ball removing unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 46A is a perspective view of the lower plate ball removing unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 46B is an exploded perspective view of the lower plate ball removing unit as viewed from the front.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 that stores a game ball that is discharged from the payout device 830 and is to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game that is arranged below the upper plate 201 and is supplied from the upper plate 201. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls. Further, the plate unit 200 is attached to the flat plate-shaped plate unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 210, and the left side from the center of the left and right bulges forward greatly. The upper plate main body 212 forming the lower plate 202, and the lower plate main body 214 which is attached to the center of the left and right at the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and bulges forward greatly to form the lower plate 202. ..

Further, the plate unit 200 covers the effect operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper plate body 212 and the front surface of the plate unit base 210, the upper plate body 212, the lower plate body 214, and the front side and the lower side of the effect operation unit. The plate unit cover 260 attached to the front of the plate unit base 210, the lower right door effect unit 270 located on the right side of the effect operation unit 220 and attached to the right front side of the plate unit base 210, and the lower right effect unit of the door. A game ball that covers the front side of the 270 and is attached to the front of the plate unit base 210 and is attached so as to sandwich the plate unit base 210 from the front and back and is stored in the upper plate 201 of the upper plate main body 212. Upper plate ball removing unit 310 for removing the ball to the lower plate 202, and a lower plate ball removing unit for discharging the game ball, which is attached to the lower side of the lower plate main body 214 and is stored in the lower plate 202, downward. It is equipped with 320.

Further, the plate unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit 220, and is a ball rental operation unit 330 for operating a ball rental machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, and a plate. The upper plate top decorative member 340, which is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210 and can be decorated by light emission, and the upper plate top decorative member 340, which is attached to the front left side of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the plate unit cover 260, can irradiate light forward. The dish unit left decorative board 345 equipped with a plurality of LEDs and the rear side of the effect unit cover 300 and the lower right side of the door are attached to the front right side of the plate unit base 210 toward the front. The dish unit right decorative board 346 equipped with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light, and the upper dish front decorative board 233, the upper dish rear decorative board 235, and the upper dish which are attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 and will be described later. Liquid crystal board 241, vibration device 242, touch panel 246, effect button decorative board 251, effect button pressing sensor 258, lower right relay board 281 of the door, dish unit left decorative board 345, and dish unit right decorative board 346 and game board 5. A dish unit relay board 347 that relays a connection with a peripheral control board (not shown) is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the plate unit base 210 of the plate unit 200 extends long to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100. The plate unit base 210 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth under the upper plate ball supply port 210a and the upper plate ball supply port 210a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker slit 210b consisting of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and vertically, a lower plate ball supply port 210c penetrating the front and rear at the lower center of the left and right in the front view and extending in a tubular shape to the rear, and a lower plate The ball supply port 210c is provided with an upper plate ball feed port 210d that penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the front view and extends vertically and is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the plate unit base 210 has a through hole 210e having a square inner circumference penetrating back and forth on the left side of the upper plate ball feeding port 210d in the front view, and a receiver protruding forward from the lower side of the through hole 210e in a plate shape. The piece 210f, the escape port 210g penetrating back and forth on the upper right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 210d, and the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 penetrating front and back at the lower right corner of the front view are inserted. The handle insertion port 210h, the cylinder insertion port 210i that penetrates back and forth near the right corner of the front view and the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and the right side of the front view of the tubular lower plate ball supply port 210c. A notch 210j, which is notched from the rear end to the front on the side surface of the above, is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the upper plate body 212 of the plate unit 200 is formed in a container shape that bulges forward on the left side of the center on the left and right sides of the front view, and is open upward and rearward. ing. The upper plate main body 212 is provided with a guide passage portion 212a that is open only to the left and rearward on the right end side of the front view and through which game balls can circulate. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so as to lower the right end as a whole. More specifically, with the upper plate main body 212 attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is a game ball from the lower position of the upper plate ball supply port 210a to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. It is inclined so that it becomes slightly lower than the outer diameter of. As a result, the game ball discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate main body 212, and the received game ball can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feeding port 210d.

Further, the upper plate main body 212 includes a metal ground fitting 212b extending from the center of the left and right to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the ground fitting 212b is electrically grounded, and the static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed by contact with the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the lower plate main body 214 of the plate unit 200 has a plan view trapezoidal shape in which the rear end side is longer than the front end side, and is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 214 is provided with a ball extraction hole 214a that penetrates vertically through the bottom surface and can be closed by the lower plate ball extraction unit 320, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the ball extraction hole 214a. doing. The lower plate main body 214 can receive and store the game balls discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit base 210, and the game balls are moved downward from the plate unit 200 from the ball extraction hole 214a. Can be discharged.

As shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the effect operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the mounting base unit 220A attached to the plate unit base 210 and the upper plate main body 212 at the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and the mounting base unit 220A. The touch unit 220B, the button unit 220C attached to the mounting base unit 220A on the left side of the front view of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the mounting base unit 220A. A unit cover 224 attached to the mounting base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end of the mounting base unit 220A in the front view are provided.

The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed in the center of the outer peripheral surface in the axial direction over the entire circumference. The damper 222 in this embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can alleviate the impact when the touch unit 220B is struck and reduce the load (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It is possible to reduce the vibration transmitted by the vibrating device 242 to the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210 side.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, the mounting base unit 220A of the effect operation unit 220 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and has a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 whose upper side is open, and above the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 whose rear end is attached to the front end of the upper plate main body 212 and whose upper end is open so that the touch unit 220B can be accommodated from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231. The front lens member 232, the upper plate front decorative substrate 233 arranged between the upper plate front lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and having a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and the unit cover covering the front side of the upper plate front lens member 232. It is provided with a translucent upper plate front decorative member 234 attached to the 224.

Further, the mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231 and is provided with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward, and the upper side of the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235 and the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235. From the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235, which is sandwiched between the upper plate rear decorative member 236 having a translucency and attached to the unit cover 224, and the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper plate rear decorative member 236. A linear light emitting lens member 237 that can guide the light of the above plate and emit light linearly at the upper end, a tubular button mounting member 238 that is attached to the unit cover 224 on the right side of the front view of the upper plate rear decorative member 236, and a button mounting member. It is equipped with an upper plate ball removal button 239 that is slidably attached up and down by 238.

The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that is inclined from the substantially center of the front and rear to the front side so as to be lowered toward the front, and the mounting side receiving portion 230a that penetrates the mounting side receiving portion 230a and is separated to the left and right. It includes one through-hole 230b and a tubular tubular receiving portion 230c extending downward from the peripheral edge of the through-hole 230b. The inner circumference of the through port 230b is formed in a quadrangular shape. The tubular receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal tubular shape so as to narrow toward the downward direction (see FIG. 33). More specifically, in the tubular receiving portion 230c, the inner peripheral wall on the front side extends substantially perpendicular to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a, and the inner peripheral wall on the rear side is downward with respect to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a. It slopes and extends forward as it goes toward. Further, the tubular receiving portion 230c extends with the inner peripheral walls on both the left and right sides inclined so that the lower ends (tips) of the tubular receiving portion 230c are slightly closer to each other with respect to the vertical surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a.

The unit case 231 is open upward and is separated from each other in the front-rear direction from the front left and right ends of the accommodating recess 231a capable of accommodating the touch unit 220B and the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a. Horizontal support pins 231b, a pair of front support pins 231c that are separated from each other to the left and right from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a and project upward in a columnar shape, and the accommodation recess 231a from the left and right centers on the front and rear ends of the bottom surface. It is provided with a central support protrusion 231d projecting upward and two receiving portions 231e projecting in a pyramidal shape so as to narrow from the lower side of the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a downward to the left and right. ..

Further, the unit case 231 is arranged around the insertion hole 231f, which is circularly penetrated vertically on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a on the left side in front view and the lower part of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C and a linear light emitting portion 237b of a linear light emitting lens member 237 extending left and right on the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the accommodating recess 231a and recessed downward from the upper end are arranged. It is provided with a notch portion 231h.

The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 is formed in a plan view shape in which a quadrangle extending to the left and right and a trapezoid protruding outward from both the left and right sides of the quadrangle are combined. Further, in the accommodating recess 231a, the bottom surface of the quadrangular portion is formed lower than the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion on both the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a is formed to be slightly lower than the height (length in the axial direction) of the damper 222.

The four lateral support pins 231b project upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the accommodating recess 231a and are formed so as to be insertable into the tubular damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped tapered portion 231i whose diameter decreases toward the upper end side on the upper end side (see FIG. 32). The distance from the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a to the middle of the tapered portion 231i of the lateral support pin 231b is the same as the length of the damper 222, and the entire lateral support pin 231b is formed longer than the damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231c can be inserted into the tubular damper 222, and are formed to be slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion in the accommodation recess 231a. The impact portion 231e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a quadrangular outer circumference. The two receiving portions 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. The outer peripheral wall on the front side of the abutting portion 231e extends substantially perpendicular to the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a, and the outer peripheral wall on the rear side is inclined forward as it goes downward with respect to the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a. And extend. Further, the abutment portion 231e extends with the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides inclined so that the lower ends (tips) slightly approach each other with respect to the vertical surface of the accommodating recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the impact receiving portion 231e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230. The lower end of the abutment portion 231e is inserted into the through port 230a of the mounting base 231 in the assembled state, and a slight gap is formed between the abutment portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c.

The front surface of the upper plate front decorative member 234 is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper plate rear decorative substrate 235 includes a plurality of decorative LEDs 235a for luminescent decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, and a plurality of peripheral LED 235b for luminescent decoration of the linear light emitting lens member 237. ..

The linear light emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right sides than the upper plate rear decorative member 236, and has a light receiving portion 237a and a light receiving portion 237a arranged above a plurality of peripheral edge LEDs 235b of the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped linear light emitting portion 237b which is continuously fitted into the notch portion 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light emitting lens member 237, the linear light emitting portion 237b is fitted into the notch portion 231h of the unit case 231 so that the front surface of the linear light emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the accommodating recess 231a. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in a state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving unit 237a, and guides the light received by the light receiving unit 237a to the linear light emitting unit 237b to guide the light received by the linear light emitting unit 237b. The entire upper end can be made to emit light (linearly).

The upper plate ball removing button 239 is slidably attached up and down by the button attachment member 238, and includes an extension piece 239a extending downward from the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper plate ball removal button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge (pull out) the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202. )be able to.

The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. Further, an outer peripheral surface of two abutment portions 231e projecting downward from the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached, and a mounting base 230 into which the lower end of the abutment portion 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the tubular receiving portion and the inner peripheral surface. As a result, when a force (impact) that causes the unit case 231 to move downward from the touch unit 220B side is applied, the force is not immediately transmitted to the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the recess 231a bends downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving portion 231e abuts on the inner peripheral surface of the tubular receiving portion 230c, so that the force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends, so that the force can be attenuated to some extent by the bending and transmitted to the mounting base 230.

Further, the abutment portion 231e of the unit case 231 and the tubular receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner circumference inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (a surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the impact receiving portion 231e to the tubular receiving portion 230c acts in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a provided with the tubular receiving portion 230c. To do. As a result, the force from the impact portion 231e (unit case 231) side is dispersed, and it is possible to prevent a large force from acting on the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is less likely to be damaged. ..

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 having an open upper portion, an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 mounted in the lower case 240 from above, and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241. A pair of vibrating devices 242 arranged on the left and right outer sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240, a pair of vibrating devices 242, and an upper side of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are covered and attached to the lower case 240. A shallow box-shaped base member 243 with an open surface, an upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 inserted into the base member 243 from above and controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 to display an image, and an upper plate side liquid crystal display device. A frame-shaped ground fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate that covers the outer periphery of the 244, a transparent touch panel 246 that covers the upper surface of the ground fitting 245 and the liquid crystal display device 244 on the upper plate side, and a base member 243 that covers the outer circumference of the touch panel 246 from above. It is provided with a frame-shaped upper cover 247 that is attached to the lower case 240 through the liquid crystal display.

Further, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 on its rear end surface in a state where the lower case 240, the base member 243 and the upper cover 247 are assembled, and also lower. It is provided with a waterproof sheet-like waterproof seal 248 that extends over substantially the entire length of the rear end surface of the case 240 or the like and is attached to the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247. ing.

The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the accommodating recess 213a of the unit case 231, and the lower case 240 is formed so as to be accommodating in the accommodating recess 213a. The lower case 240 has a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending to the left and right, a flat plate-shaped protruding portion 240b protruding from both the left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a in a trapezoidal shape, and each protruding portion 240b having an outer diameter of a damper 222. A pair of damper mounting recesses 240c, which have the same inner shape as the above and are partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are formed apart from each other in the front-rear direction, and project from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d and the vibration device mounting portion 240e arranged near the board mounting portion 240a between the pair of damper mounting recesses 240c in the protruding portion 240b and to which the vibration device 242 is mounted are provided.

The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in a plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided at substantially the center of the upper and lower sides of the damper mounting recess 240c over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a with the center of gravity eccentric. The vibration device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibration drive motor 242a.

The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a in which the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from above and formed in a shallow box shape, and an extending portion 243b extending outward from both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a. , A screw hole 243c that penetrates vertically at the tip of the extension portion 243b at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 and has a large diameter counterbore on the upper side, and is formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c. It is provided with a C-chamfered tapered portion 243d (see FIG. 32) whose diameter increases toward the lower end.

The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 can be passed through the tip side of the lateral support pin 231b of the unit case 231 than the tapered portion 231i, and the base end side (lower side) of the tapered portion 231i. It is formed to a size that cannot be passed through.

The touch panel 246 includes a tempered glass that is strong against impact and is not easily broken, a transparent capacitance type sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the tempered glass and the outer periphery of the sensor sheet. ing.

The touch unit 220B can mount the damper 222 by inserting the damper 222 from the open side of the C-shape into the damper mounting recesses 240c provided on the left and right sides of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c is inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222. As a result, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. When the damper 222 is mounted in the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 abuts on the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Protrude.

Further, in the touch unit 220B, the vibration drive motor 242a of the pair of vibration devices 242 is sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibrating devices 242 can generate vibrations independently of each other.

Further, the touch unit 220B can visually recognize the image displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from above. Then, by displaying an image such as a button on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and touching the touch panel 246 as if the player operates the button of the image, the button of the image can be operated.

Further, since the touch unit 220B has a preventive water seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when a liquid such as a drink is spilled on the dish unit 200, the liquid does not enter the touch unit 220B. It can be prevented and the touch unit 220B can be prevented from being damaged by the infiltration of liquid.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the button unit 220C of the effect operation unit 220 is a cylindrical unit body 250 mounted on the button unit mounting portion 231g of the unit case 231 in the mounting base unit 220A, and a bottom of the unit body 250. It includes an effect button decorative board 251 arranged on the side and provided with an LED on the upper surface, and a board cover 252 that covers the lower side of the effect button decorative board 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250.

Further, the button unit 220C is arranged between the tubular button base 253, which is slidably inserted into the unit body 250 from above and up and down, and the button base 253 and the unit body 250, and the button base 253 is attached upward. A spring member 254 that urges, a light guide member 255 that is inserted into the button base 253 and can guide the light from the LED of the effect button decorative substrate 251 upward, and a plurality of minute particles arranged above the light guide member 255. A sheet-shaped diffuser lens member 256 provided with various prisms, a translucent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffuser lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and an effect button decorative substrate 251 attached to the upper surface. It is provided with an effect button pressing sensor 258 that detects the movement of the button base 253 to the descending end.

The unit body 250 includes three mounting pieces 250a attached to the button unit mounting portion 231g extending outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface, and a flange-shaped shelf portion 250b extending inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. , A pair of through-holes 250c that penetrate the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

The button base 253 has a tubular lower cylinder portion 253a inserted into the inner circumference of the shelf portion 250b, a conical upper cylinder portion 253b whose diameter increases upward from the upper end of the lower cylinder portion 253a, and an upper portion. A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the tubular portion 253b so that the lower end can penetrate the through port 250c of the unit body 250 and protrudes outward from the lower end and can engage (contact) with the lower surface of the unit body 250. The pair of engaging claws 253c and the upper cylinder 253b project radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylinder portion 253b, which is shorter than the outer diameter of the upper end, and the lower end can contact the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250. A plurality of flat plate-shaped contact pieces 253d and a detection piece 253e extending outward from the outer peripheral surfaces of the lower cylinder portion 253a and the upper cylinder portion 253b in a flat plate shape and detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 are provided. ing.

As shown in the figure, the spring member 254 is a coil spring. The lower end of the spring member 254 is in contact with the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250, and the upper end is supported by a plurality of contact pieces 253d in the button base 253.

The light guide member 255 extends from the lower surface of the disk-shaped main body portion 255a fitted to the upper portion of the upper cylinder portion 253b of the button base 253 to the lower end of the lower cylinder portion 253a of the button base 253. It is provided with a plurality of columnar light guide portions 255b. The plurality of light guide portions 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decorative substrate 251 and can guide the light from the LEDs and emit the light from the entire upper surface of the main body portion 255a.

In this button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusion lens member 256, and the upper plate effect button body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down in the unit body 250 together. it can. In these button bases 253 and the like, the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 projects upward from the upper end of the unit body 250 due to the urging force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 are the unit body. By engaging with the lower surface of the 250, further ascent is restricted, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the ascending end.

When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 and is moved up. The pressing operation of the plate effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250, and further lowering is restricted. , The upper plate effect button 257 and the like are located at the descending end.

Further, the button unit 220C can make the upper plate effect button 257 emit light by emitting the LED of the effect button decoration board 251. The LED of the effect button decoration board 251 is a full-color LED, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be light-emitting and decorated in various colors.

As shown in FIG. 32, the effect operation unit 220 of the present embodiment has the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B from the lower surface of the lower case 240 in the assembled state. A gap is formed between the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the bottom surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. Further, the tip surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four lateral support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom surface of the washer of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and are upward of the touch unit 220B with respect to the lateral support pins 231b. Movement is regulated by a flat washer on the head of the screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231b and the tapered portion 243d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33, in the effect operation unit 220, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly larger than the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a on the lateral support pin 231b side. It protrudes upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower surface are below. A gap is also formed between the case 240 and the lower surface of the case 240. Further, a gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the mounting base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the lateral support pins 231b on both the left and right sides.

Further, the effect operation unit 220 is narrowed downward in the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is mounted from above in the pyramidal tubular receiving portion 230c that is narrowed downward in the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A. The lower end of the round pyramid-shaped receiving portion 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving portion 231e. As a result, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is mounted on the mounting base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the central side of the accommodating recess 231a) floating in the air.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21 and the like, in the effect operation unit 220, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 is linear along the rear side near the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B. It is exposed in a band shape). The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is about ⅔ of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. A rear decorative member 236 for the upper plate is arranged on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, the upper plate ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the upper plate rear decorative member 236. Further, the button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the front view of the touch unit 220B.

The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the player can be entertained by presenting the image (directed image) through the transparent touch panel 246.

By displaying an image imitating an operation button as an image displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and making it possible to accept touch detection by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246, the image is displayed to the player. The operation buttons of the above can be operated, and the effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 during the effect using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation buttons, and various images can be displayed.

Further, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by a plurality of dampers 222 in a floating state from the unit case 231, the touch unit 220B can be operated by operating the vibration device 242 according to the gaming state. It can be vibrated. By vibrating the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) by the vibration device 242 during the production using the touch panel 246, the vibration by the vibration device 242 is applied to the fingers and hands of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246. By transmitting it, it is possible to surprise the player as if he / she is operating the operation button of the image even though he / she is operating the operation button of the image. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the front view of the touch unit 220B, the player is made to press the upper plate effect button 257 according to the game state, and the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed. You can entertain the operation. In detail, the operation buttons of the image on the touch panel 246 are disliked to lack an operation feeling compared to the actual operation buttons because they only touch the touch panel 246, but the upper plate effect button 257 actually presses the operation. Therefore, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 without giving a sense of discomfort to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. ..

Since this effect operation unit 220 is arranged at a portion of the plate unit 200 that bulges forward and is provided with the upper plate 201, the game is played even when the effect is not performed using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a risk that a person will hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a floating state from the lower unit case 231, the elasticity of the damper 222 even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above. The impact can be absorbed to some extent by the force. More specifically, when the touch unit 220B is hit or an impact (load) acts from above, it is transmitted to the damper 222 into which the left and right lateral support pins 231b are inserted, and the damper 222 is lowered while the touch unit 220B is lowered. Is compressed. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered by the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 comes into contact with the upper end of the damper 222 into which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and as the touch unit 220B is lowered, the lower surface of the lower case 240 comes into contact with the front support pin 231c. The supported damper 222 is compressed downward. As a result, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

When the touch unit 220B is further lowered by the impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces of the accommodation recesses 231a of the unit case 231 on the left and right sides and the upper surface of the central support projection 231d. As a result, the impact from the touch unit 220B acts directly from the touch unit 220B to the unit case 231 without the intervention of the plurality of dampers 222.

Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a of the unit case 231 is bent so that the center thereof moves downward due to the load from the central support projection 231d. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a. As the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a bends, a pair of abutment portions 231e projecting downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a descend. Then, when the abutting portion 231e is further lowered by the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the abutting portion 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and the abutting portion 231e from the touch unit 220B. The impact will be transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

Since the outer peripheral wall of the abutting portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c are each formed in a pyramidal shape that narrows downward, from the abutting portion 231e to the tubular receiving portion 230c (mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is distributed and transmitted in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. In this way, by the time the impact acting on the touch unit 220B is transmitted to the mounting base 230, the structure for absorbing the impact is arranged in multiple layers, so that the impact acting on the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231 and the mounting base 230 can be made less likely to be damaged by the impact.

Further, the effect operation unit 220 is a linear light emitting portion of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235 according to the game state. The upper end of 237b can be made to emit light linearly. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B and the touch effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed and enjoyed. It can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, depending on the game state, the decorative LED 235a of the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 emits light-emitting decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 arranged on the rear side (rear side of the linear light emitting portion 237b) of the touch unit 220B. Can be made to. By luminescent decoration of the upper plate rear decorative member 236, the player's interest is attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, as in the case of the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. It is possible to entertain the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the touch unit 220B provided with the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is attached to the upper plate lower covering portion of the plate unit cover 260 described later by the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. It is arranged at a position higher than the upper surface of the 262, and a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. As a result, even if the water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate main body 212 and the game ball flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (above the upper plate lower covering portion 262) when exposed to the outside air in the upper plate 201. , It is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the touch unit 220B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33, since the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 for luminescent decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. It is possible to prevent defects such as short circuit and corrosion in the decorative substrate 235 after the upper plate without being exposed to the water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201.

As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 extends to the left and right, and the center of the left and right bulges forward to form a shell shape that is open to the rear. .. The plate unit cover 260 has a lower plate opening 261 which is opened forward at substantially the center of the left and right and whose rear end is closed by the plate unit base 210, and a top plate side (upper side) of the inner peripheral wall of the lower plate opening 261. The lower plate covering portion 262 that covers the lower side of the upper plate main body 212 and the effect operation unit 220, and the bass of the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 that is arranged on the left side of the front view of the lower plate opening 261. The speaker grill 263 that transmits the sound from the speaker, the plate unit left decorative member 264 that is arranged above the speaker grill 263 and is light-emittingly decorated by the plate unit left decorative substrate 345, and the lower plate opening 261 are arranged on the right side of the front view. A handle opening 265 through which the rear portion of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes, a bottom plate portion 266 that forms the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 260 and covers the lower side of the lower plate body 214, and a bottom plate at the center of the left and right sides. It includes a bottom plate opening 267 that penetrates the portion 266 up and down and is closed by the lower plate ball removing unit 320.

The bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall of the lower plate opening 261 is closed by the lower plate main body 214. The speaker grill 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal having a plurality of holes in the metal plate.

The surface of the dish unit cover 260 on the left side when viewed from the front is formed to have a smooth feel, whereas the surface on the right side is formed to have a rugged feel. Further, the right side of the front view has substantially overall translucency.

When the dish unit cover 260 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 are formed at intervals that can be grasped with one hand. As a result, when the player touch-operates the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B can be performed. Can be easily performed.

More specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the upper surface of the front end of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the upper surface of the rear end of the touch unit 220B and the upper plate lower covering portion 262. The thickness between the lower surface and the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the front-rear distance from the front end of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 to the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm, respectively. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined by about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. As a result, the player can grasp the space between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 by the player's hand.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 42, the lower right effect unit 270 of the door of the plate unit 200 is arranged on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 220, and rotates according to the gaming state. It is equipped with a spherical door lower right rotating body 270A that is luminescent and decorated. The lower right door effect unit 270 is attached to the unit base 271 which is attached so as to close the escape port 210 g on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and rotatably supports the lower right rotating body 270A of the door, and the unit base 271. The lower right drive motor 272 of the door, the drive gear 273 fixed to the rotating shaft of the lower right door drive motor 272, the driven gear 274 meshed with the drive gear 273 and attached to the lower right rotating body 270A of the door, and driven. It includes a shaft member 275 that rotatably supports the gear 274 and is attached to the unit base 271.

Further, the lower right door effect unit 270 is mounted on the opposite side of the lower right rotating body 270A of the door from the driven gear 274, and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271 with the rotating body side bearing member 276 and the lower right door. The base side bearing member 277 that rotatably supports the side of the rotating body 270A opposite to the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271, and the rotation of the lower right rotating body 270A of the door attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 that can detect the position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side of the front view of the lower right rotating body 270A of the door, and a decorative member 279 attached to the rear side of the unit base 271 and on the front side. A lower right base decorative board 280 with multiple LEDs, a lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271, a rotation detection sensor 278, a lower right base decorative board 280, and a door described later. It is provided with a lower right relay board 281 for a door that relays the connection between the lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and the peripheral control board (not shown).

The lower right rotating body 270A of the door constitutes an outer shell and is arranged between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, each of which has a hemispherical shell shape, and the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. It includes a rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are formed with semicircular notches 285a and 286a about the rotation axis, respectively. The front outer shell member 285 has a hemispherical shell-like surface having a metallic luster and a band decoration 285b extending in a circumferential direction, and a heart shape arranged in the center of the band decoration 285b. It is equipped with a heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b having a metallic luster and extending in a band shape in the circumferential direction on a hemispherical shell-like surface having translucency. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear outer shell member 286 are formed so as to be connected to each other.

As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the rotating body internal unit 290 has a disk-shaped lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 having a plurality of LEDs on both sides and a center of the lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291. The cylindrical first fixed shaft member 292, which is attached to the lower right of the door and extends perpendicular to the surface of the rotating body decorative substrate 291 and whose tip is attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292. A cylindrical shape that is attached to the opposite side of the lower right rotating body decorative board 291 of the door, extends perpendicular to the surface of the lower right rotating body decorative board 291 of the door, and has a tip attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. The second fixed shaft member 293 of the above is provided. Although not shown, a wiring cord for connecting the lower right relay board 281 of the door and the lower right rotating body decorative board 291 of the door is inserted inside the second fixed shaft member 293.

Further, the rotating body internal unit 290 is arranged on both sides of the rotating body decorative substrate 291 at the lower right of the door, and is a flat plate and an annular transparent reflector base 294 attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. The first reflector 295, which is attached to the reflector base 294 and has an annular shape and opens outward in the axial direction, and the first reflector 295, which is attached to the reflector base 294 through the ring of the first reflector 295, has a hexagonal shape in the center. It is provided with a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface thereof, and can reflect light from the lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 of the door. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of flat plate-shaped ribs extending radially.

The rotating body internal unit 290 includes a rotating body decorative substrate 291 at the lower right of the door, a first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, and a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296. They are separated from each other so that they can rotate relative to each other.

The unit base 271 has an annular ring portion 271a arranged behind the lower right rotating body 270A of the door and a flat plate shape forward from a portion diagonally upper right in front view with respect to the center of the ring portion 271a on the outer circumference of the ring portion 271a. 271b of the first protruding piece 271b protruding forward, 271c of the second protruding piece 271c protruding forward in a flat plate shape from a portion of the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a opposite to the first protruding piece 271b, and 271c of the second protruding piece. It is provided with a bearing groove 271d, which is recessed in a U shape from the front end to the rear and into which the tip of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted.

The lower right door drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first projecting piece 271b with the rotation shaft penetrating. The driven gear 274 is formed to have a larger diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a attached to the front end of the first protruding piece 271b, and a tubular shaft portion 275b protruding from the mounting portion 275a in a tubular shape. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer circumference of the tubular shaft portion 275b, and can non-rotatably support the tip of the first fixed shaft member 292 by the inner circumference of the tubular shaft portion 275b.

The rotating body side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second protruding piece 271c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second protruding piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are symmetrically attached to the second protruding piece 271c with the rotation axis of the lower right door rotating body 270A interposed therebetween. The two rotation detection sensors 275 have a rotation position in which the heart decoration 285c of the lower right door rotating body 270A faces forward (see FIG. 42 (a)) and a rotation position in which the heart decoration 285c faces backward (FIG. 42 (b)). (See) and can be detected respectively.

The lower right door effect unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the lower right door rotating body 270A by the lower right door drive motor 272 according to the gaming state, and stops the heart decoration 285c so as to face forward. Depending on whether or not it is present, it is possible to suggest the arrival of an opportunity to the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the door lower right effect unit 270, since the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A is attached so as not to rotate, the door right during the rotation of the door lower right rotating body 270A. When the lower rotating body decorative substrate 291 (LED) is made to emit light, the position of the light emitted from the lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 of the door moves as the lower right rotating body 270A of the door rotates, and the first reflector 295 and the first reflector 295 and the second Since the direction of the light reflected and induced by the two reflectors 296 changes, the lower right rotating body 270A of the door is light-emitting decoration as if the light is blinking without blinking the LED of the lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 of the door. The lower right rotating body 270A of the door can be rainbow-colored and decorated by irradiating light of various colors from the LED, and the player can be entertained.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the effect unit cover 300 of the plate unit 200 includes a hemispherical and transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical door lower right rotating body 270A in the door lower right effect unit 270. , The decorative portion 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover portion 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side of the front view of the dish unit cover 260, and the lower right side of the rotating body cover portion 301 penetrating back and forth to the locking unit 700. A cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted is provided.

The entire effect unit cover 300 is in the shape of a container with an open rear and has translucency. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is light-emittingly decorated by the lower right door decorative substrate 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is the dish unit right decorative substrate 346. Illuminated by.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the upper plate ball removing unit 310 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the plate unit base 210 from the front side and rearward. A cover 311 having an open vertical box shape and an insertion port 311a through which an extension piece 239a of the upper plate ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and a through hole 210e of the plate unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 mounted at a position at the upper left of the front view, a pressure transmission member 313 rotatably supported by the front base member 312 and rotated by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 239, and a pressure transmission member. It includes a first spring member 314 that urges the 313 in the direction in which the upper plate ball removing button 239 rises.

Further, the upper plate ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 210 so as to close the upper plate ball feed port 210d of the plate unit base 210 from the rear side, and a rear base member. The upper plate ball pulling slider 316, which is arranged between the 315 and the dish unit base 210 and is attached so as to be able to move up and down by the rear base member 315, and the press transmission member 313 is in contact with the upper plate ball pulling slider 316, and the upper dish ball pulling. It includes a second spring member 317 that urges the slider 316 upward.

The front base member 312 has a flat plate-shaped base portion 312a extending parallel to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and attached to the cover 311 and a pair of extending flat plates extending forward from both the left and right sides of the base portion 312a. The protrusion 312b, the shaft support 312c recessed rearward from the front end of the extension piece 312b, and the rear end of the first spring member 314 provided near the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a are locked. It is equipped with a hook-shaped spring locking portion (not shown).

The press transmission member 313 has a horizontally long columnar shaft portion 313a whose both ends are rotatably inserted into a pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rear extension extending rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape. The upper extension piece 313c that extends upward from the vicinity of the left end of the front view on the upper surface of the extension piece 313b and the rear extension piece 313b in a flat plate shape, and the lower end of the extension piece 239c of the upper plate ball removal button 239 can come into contact with the extension piece 313c. The lower extension piece 313d extending downward from the right end of the front view on the lower surface of the rear extension piece 313b and the first spring protruding downward from the lower side near the left end of the front view of the shaft portion 313a. It includes a hook-shaped spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downward extending piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward toward the rear, and the lower end thereof can be brought into contact with the upper plate ball removing slider 316.

The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the plate unit base 210, and is provided with a base portion 315a attached to the plate unit base 210 and a front surface of the base portion 315a separated from each other to the left and right. The slider support portion 315b that slidably supports both the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316 and the upper end of the plate unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a are opened forward at positions corresponding to the upper portion of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. It is provided with an upper entrance 315c that opens downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and allows game balls to flow.

Further, the rear base member 315 extends downward continuously with the upper inlet 315c on the rear side of the base portion 315a and is open rearward, and the lower end is curved rearward with the first taxiway 315d. The L-shaped second taxiway 315e, which extends downward from the lower side of the first taxiway 315d, then extends to the left in front view, and the left end is open to the left, and the entire is open to the rear, and the second The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that the two sides are surrounded by the flat plate-shaped passage lid 315f that closes the rear end side of the portion extending to the left in the taxiway 315e and the L-shaped second taxiway 315e. It includes an opening 315g that penetrates the base portion 315a, and a spring locking portion 315h that projects forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and locks the upper end of the second spring member 317.

The L-shaped second taxiway 315e in the rear base member 315 is inclined so that the portion extending to the left becomes lower toward the left. As shown in FIG. 43B, the left end of the second taxiway 315e is inserted into the notch 210j of the tubular lower plate ball supply port 210c in the dish unit base 210, and the second taxiway 315e The lower plate ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

The upper plate ball removal slider 316 is a flat plate-shaped slider base 316a whose left and right ends are slidably supported by the slider support portion 315b of the rear base member 315, and a plate from the left side to the front from the center of the front view at the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b that extends upward to the upper side of the receiving piece 210f through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and allows the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d of the pressing transmission member 313 to come into contact with the upper surface, and a slider below the transmission piece 316b. A triangular operation transmission portion 316c projecting rearward from the rear side of the base 316a and a hook-shaped spring engagement unit projecting from the front surface of the slider base 316a and engaging the lower end of the second spring member 317. It is provided with a stop portion 316d.

In the upper plate ball removing unit 310, the upper entrance 315c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end of the guide passage portion 212a of the upper plate main body 212, which is on the right end side in the front view, in the state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. As a result, the game ball in the upper plate 201 can be supplied from the upper inlet 315c to the ball feeding unit 540 via the first taxiway 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

Further, when the upper plate ball removal unit 310 presses the upper plate ball removal button 239 downward, the pressing transmission member 313 resists the urging force of the first spring member 314 by the extension piece 239a of the upper plate ball removal button 239. Then, the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d rotates around the shaft portion 313a in the direction of moving downward. When the lower end of the lower extension piece 313d moves downward with the rotation of the press transmission member 313, the upper plate ball is removed by the transmission piece 316b of the upper plate ball removal slider 316 with which the lower end of the lower extension piece 313d is in contact. The slider 316 slides downward against the urging force of the second spring member 317.

When the countersunk ball pulling slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmission unit 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first taxiway The 315d side is in a state of communicating with the second taxiway 315e side. As a result, the game ball in the upper plate 201 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper entrance 315c, the first taxiway 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second taxiway 315e. , The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 239 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 316 and the upper plate ball removal button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317. It can be restored to its original state.

As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the lower plate ball removing unit 320 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower plate main body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the plate unit cover 260, and the ball of the lower plate main body 214. A flat plate-shaped lower plate ball removing base 321 having an opening 321a corresponding to the extraction hole 214a, and a flat plate-shaped slide lid 322 capable of sliding left and right on the lower plate ball removing base 321 to close the opening 321a. A knob portion 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front surface of the dish unit cover 260, and a spring urging the slide lid 322 in the direction of closing the opening 321a by the slide lid 322. It includes a member 324 and a holding device 325 that holds the slide lid 322 in an open position against the urging force of the spring member 324.

The opening 321a of the lower plate ball removing base 321 is formed at a position to the right from the left and right in the front view. By attaching the lower plate ball removing base 321 to the lower plate main body 214, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported between the lower plate ball removing base 321 and the lower plate main body 214. The slide lid 322 is provided with a holding protrusion 322a held by the holding device 325 on the left end side in the front view.

The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower plate ball removing base 321 and a pair of holding claws 325b that project from the main body 325a so as to be openable and closable and can grip the holding protrusion 322a. When the holding device 325 inserts the holding protrusions 322a between the pair of open holding claws 325b and presses them toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325b closes to hold the holding protrusions 322a and the pair of holdings. The claw 325b is kept closed. When the holding protrusion 322a is moved to the main body 325a side in this state, the pair of holding claws 325b is opened and the holding of the holding protrusion 322a is released.

In the lower plate ball removing unit 320, when the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right side in the front view, the slide lid 322 is provided between the opening 321a and the ball removing hole 214a of the lower plate main body 214. The game ball located in the lower plate 202 does not come out downward from the ball extraction hole 214a, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 202.

From this state, by operating the knob portion 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball extraction hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be pulled out below the plate unit 200 through the ball extraction hole 214a and the opening 321a, and the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be removed. At this time, since the holding protrusion 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even if the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can continue to pull out the game ball inside.

To close the slide lid 322, slightly operate the knob 323 to the left to open the pair of holding claws 325b and release the holding protrusion 322a, and the urging force of the spring member 324 causes the slide lid 322 to slide to the right. Then, the ball extraction hole 214a is closed. By operating the knob portion 323 of the lower plate ball removing unit 320 in this way, it is possible to store the game balls in the lower plate 202 and to remove the game balls stored in the lower plate 202.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the ball lending operation unit 330 of the plate unit 200 is a unit case 331 attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit 220 near the right end of the front view and having translucency, and a unit. A ball lending button 332 that is exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and can be operated by the player, and a return button 333 that is exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 and can be operated by the player behind the ball lending button 332. It is provided with a display unit 334 which is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the return button 333.

When the ball lending operation unit 330 inserts cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then presses the ball lending button 332, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the dish unit. It can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 201 of 200, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the balance of cash and the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the balance of the lent amount are returned. In addition, the display unit 334 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine, an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the upper plate top decorative member 340 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the center of the left and right at the upper end of the plate unit base 210 and has a translucent upper plate top lens extending in a strip shape to the left and right. It includes a 340a and a top plate top decorative substrate 340b which is attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and has a plurality of LEDs attached to the upper surface.

The upper plate top decorative member 340 can make the upper plate top lens 340a emit light in a band shape by emitting the LED of the upper plate top decorative substrate 340b. Since the upper plate top decorative member 340 is arranged on the rear side of the effect operation unit 220, the upper plate top decorative member is similar to the light emitting decoration of the upper plate rear decorative member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237. By illuminating the 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 is enjoyed and the interest is suppressed from being lowered. be able to.

The plate unit 200 of the present embodiment has the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 for storing the game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a, and the game balls in the game area 5a. When displaying an image on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 according to the game state that changes by hitting, along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 near the game area 5a. Since the band-shaped linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper plate rear decorative member 236, the upper plate top decorative member 340, and the like can be made to emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight ( It is possible to notice the light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like entering from the outside of the field of view), and to attract the player's line of sight (interest) to the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, that is, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 side. .. Therefore, in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, when the effect of an image or the like is presented according to the game state, the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is made to emit light, so that the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 causes the player to emit light. It is possible to make the presentation of the effect by 244 noticeable, and it is possible to entertain the effect by the liquid crystal display device 244 on the upper plate side and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the plate unit 200 is provided with an upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the game state, when an image suggesting the arrival of a chance is displayed, it is outside the game area 5a. Since the arranged upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 suggests the arrival of a chance, the player is allowed to play in the game area 5a and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a. You can be bothered with the production in. Therefore, by paying attention to the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244), it is possible to enjoy a tight game with a sense of speed, and the interest of the player is reduced. At the same time, when displaying an image suggesting the arrival of a chance on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light to display the player on the upper plate side liquid crystal display. The device 244 can be noticed, and the player can be entertained by surely recognizing the arrival of an opportunity. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a may be anxious, and the player may not be able to concentrate on either of them, which may reduce the interest, but the game state (chance). Since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in response to the arrival), it is possible to concentrate in the game area 5a until the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light, and the game in the game area 5a is enjoyed. At the same time, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, the effect on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed, and the game can be sharpened and not bored.

Further, since the plate unit 200 that bulges toward the player under the game area 5a is provided with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is arranged at a position close to the player. It will be. As a result, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is easily hidden by the player located in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 becomes difficult to be seen by other players next to or behind. Therefore, the effect presented by the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be entertained only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the production by the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort and deteriorating the interest by being looked into by another player, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light when the effect is presented by the display device 244, it is possible to make it difficult to overlook the effect by the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be displayed. It can be entertaining and prevent the decline in interest.

Further, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member and the like can be made more noticeable as compared with the case where the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light in a dot shape. Even if the consciousness of the above is concentrated in the game area 5a, it is possible to make it easier to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and it is fun to enjoy the production by the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and the touch panel 246 and the like. Can be suppressed from decreasing. In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in a band shape, the light emission mode is different from that of other light emitting decorations, and it is possible to reduce misidentification as light emission of the light emitting decoration. It is possible to surely notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like.

Further, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at a position on the rear side of the outer peripheral edge of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 near the game area 5a, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light. , The light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily entered into the player's field of view, and the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be noticed to entertain the production of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. it can.

Further, an effect operation unit 220 having an upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and the like is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is in the game area 5a. Since the player who checks the amount of the game ball to hit turns his / her eyes at a certain frequency, the liquid crystal display device 244 on the upper plate side and the linear light emitting lens member 237 when the eyes are directed to the upper plate 201. Etc. are easily seen, and the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 is easily noticed. Further, since the player directs the line of sight to the upper plate 201 with a certain frequency, it is easy to direct the line of sight from the game area 5a to the upper plate 201 (upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244). Therefore, when the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately transferred to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect presented by the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed and enjoyed. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, since the effect operation unit 220 is arranged on the lower side of the game area 5a and the light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is irradiated to the player from the lower side, when it is arranged on the upper side of the game area 5a. Compared with the above, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and it is possible to surely draw the player's attention to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to entertain the production by the production operation unit 220 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 220 (upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244) is arranged at a position corresponding to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, the center of the player's line of sight is located at any position in the game area 5a. Even if there is, the light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, the player can surely pay attention to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the effect operation unit 220 can be enjoyed. However, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest.

Further, since the touch panel 246 is provided in the effect operation unit 220, it is possible to perform an effect of causing the player to operate the touch panel 246 in addition to the effect of the image, and it is possible to entertain the player with various effects. By having the player operate the touch panel 246, the player can participate in the production, and the player can actively enjoy the production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (linear light emitting unit 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B sends the game ball in the upper plate 201 to the ball feed unit 540 (ball launcher 680). It is arranged along the guiding passage portion 212a to be fed, and the upper plate ball removing button 239 for operating the upper plate ball removing unit 310 is arranged between the guiding passage portion 212a and the guiding passage portion 212a. That is, the linear light emitting lens member 237 is provided near the place where the player confirms the game ball required for the game, and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position that the player cares about even during the game. Therefore, it is possible to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237, and the player's interest is attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the effect by the touch unit 220B (the effect image by the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246). It is possible to make it easier to notice the timing of (touch operation, etc.).

Further, the touch unit 220B provided with the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is attached to the upper plate lower covering portion 262 of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. Since it is placed higher than the upper surface and a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B, the surface of the upper plate main body 212 and the game ball can be exposed to the outside air on the upper plate 201. Even if the water (water droplets) condensed in (water droplets) flows below the upper plate 201 (above the upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in 220B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33, since the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 for luminescent decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. It is possible to prevent defects such as short circuit and corrosion in the decorative substrate 235 after the upper plate without being exposed to the water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201.

Further, in the effect operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200, when the touch unit 220B including the touch panel 246 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibration exciter 242, a plurality (two) of the touch units 220B are generated. Since it is mounted on the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A while sandwiching the damper 222 of the above, the vibration of the touch unit 220B (vibration device 242) is absorbed and damped by the damper 222 and becomes the mounting base unit 220A. This is transmitted, and the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Therefore, if the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 when the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, only the touch unit 220B vibrates, so that the touch panel of the touch unit 220B is used for the player. It is possible to sufficiently impart the operation feeling of the 246, to entertain the player with the touch operation of the touch panel 246, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibrating device 242, the player is surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B in addition to the operation feeling of the touch panel 246, and suggests the timing to operate the touch panel 246. It is possible to entertain the operation effect by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the touch unit 220B is supported from the lower side by a plurality of dampers 222, even if the touch unit 220B is hit or strongly pushed from the upper side and an impact or a load is applied to the touch unit 220B, the damper 222 will be used. Since it is possible to absorb the impact and the like, it is possible to reduce the damage to the touch unit 220B and the mounting base unit 220A and the like due to the impact and the like, and the game is interrupted due to the damage to the touch unit 220B and the like. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered.

Further, since the touch panel 220B is operated by the touch panel 246, when the player operates the touch panel 220B, the touch panel 246 is touched for a longer time than when the button is pressed. If the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 when the 246 is touched, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, since the player can feel that the touch panel 246 is being operated by vibrating the player's finger, it is possible to give a sufficient feeling of operation, and the player can enjoy the operation of the touch panel 246. However, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest.

Further, by changing the image displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it becomes possible to correspond to various effects. , It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and deteriorating the interest by various productions. Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is equipped with a touch panel 246, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and touch, as compared with the conventional pressing button. Various operations such as hold can be performed. As a result, a wider variety of operation effects can be performed, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the touch unit 220B is mounted so as to be immovable upward and downward with respect to the mounting base unit 220A (unit case 231), and the touch unit 220B is provided by the elastic force (biasing force) of the plurality of dampers 222. Is pressed against the upper moving end, so that the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move during the operation of the touch panel 246, and the touch panel 246 can be operated accurately. Further, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it is possible to make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B which is thought to not move is vibrated according to the game state. It is possible to surprise the player by vibrating by the device 242, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other, for example, it is strong by driving the vibration device 242 at a position close to the part operated by the player on the touch panel 246. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the player operates the touch panel 246 at a position different from the position to be operated, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is notified that the operation is incorrect. It is possible to make the player perform the correct operation, to entertain the operation effect using the touch panel 246, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since a plurality of vibration devices 242 that are separated from each other are provided, a resonance phenomenon can be generated at an arbitrary position of the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of vibration of each vibration device 242. Can be done. Therefore, by controlling each vibration device 242 so that the resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further feeling of operation and greatly surprise the player. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player from losing interest.

Further, when the touch unit 220B is hit or strongly pushed from above and an impact or a load acts on the touch unit 220B, the left and right ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 sandwiched between them. Therefore, the impact from the upper side can be absorbed (attenuated) to some extent by the bending of the damper 222 and the touch unit 220B and transmitted to the unit case 231 side. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, an impact or load from the touch unit 220B side via the unit case 231 is applied to the mounting base 230. Can be widely dispersed and transmitted. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the projecting portion 231e protruding downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the tubular receiving portion 230c into which the projecting portion 231e is inserted on the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230. Since a gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall and the inner peripheral wall, the receiving portion 231e and the tubular receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other after the unit case 231 bends downward due to an impact or a load from the touch unit 220B. The impact and the like are transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the impact and the like are further attenuated by the bending of the unit case 231 and transmitted to the mounting base 230. Since the outer peripheral wall of the impact portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the impact portion 231e and the tubular receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other, the impact portion 231e (unit case). 231) Impacts and loads from the side are transmitted diagonally to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and are perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface. It will be disassembled in the vertical direction, and the force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward) that causes the mounting base 230 to bend will be reduced and transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit or strongly pushed from above, the impact and the like can be effectively damped by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231 and the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B and the like. It is possible to prevent the mounting base unit 220A from being damaged.

According to the pachinko machine 1, since the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 are provided on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 260 of the plate unit 200 that bulges forward under the game area 5a, the game is played in the game area 5a. The touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 are used to present the effect (operation effect) to the player according to the game state that changes by hitting the ball, and the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 are presented to the player during the effect. By operating the player, the player can be actively participated in the production, and the player can be entertained and the interest can be suppressed from being lowered. Then, the upper and lower thicknesses of the lower plate opening 261 (upper plate lower covering portion 262) of the plate unit cover 260 provided with the touch panel 246 are within the range of 15 mm to 50 mm that can be grasped by the player's hand. Since the thickness is set, when the player operates the touch panel 246, the player can operate the touch panel 246 while grasping between the touch panel 246 and the upper plate lower covering portion 262, and operate the touch panel 246 accurately. be able to.

More specifically, the thickness between the upper surface of the touch panel 246 and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 is set to a thickness within the range of 15 mm to 50 mm that can be grasped by hand. Therefore, for example, a finger excluding the thumb. When the thumb is positioned above the touch panel 246 with the thumb in contact with the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262, the touch panel 246 is positioned within the movement range of the thumb, and the touch panel 246 is operated with the thumb. Is possible. In this state, since the fingers other than the thumb are in contact with the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262, the thumb can be stabilized, and the thumb can touch the desired position of the touch panel 246 or on the touch panel 246. The finger can be moved in a desired direction, the operability of the touch panel 246 is improved, and the touch panel 246 can be operated accurately. Further, when the thumb is brought into contact with the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262, the touch panel 246 can be operated with other fingers, and the same effects as described above can be obtained. Therefore, since the touch panel 246 is easy to operate, the touch panel 246 can be accurately and easily operated when the touch panel 246 is used, and the player can be entertained by the operation of the touch panel 246. It can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, the touch panel 246 is provided within a range of 60 mm from the front end of the dish unit cover 260 to the rear, and is operated when the touch panel 246 and the upper plate lower covering portion 262 are grasped from the front end side to operate the touch panel 246. Since the touch panel 246 is arranged within the reach of the finger to be touched, the touch panel 246 can be operated with the finger stabilized, and the effect using the touch panel 246 is enjoyed and the player's interest is suppressed from being lowered. can do.

Further, since the upper surface of the touch panel 246 is tilted so as to become higher from the front side to the rear side, the surface of the touch panel 246 faces the player side and the touch panel 246 becomes easy to see, and the player operates the touch panel 246. The property can be improved, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved.

Further, since the upper surface of the touch panel 246 becomes higher toward the rear side, the thickness between the touch panel 246 and the upper plate lower covering portion 262 becomes thicker toward the rear side, so that the plate unit 200 becomes thicker toward the rear side. Strength and rigidity are increased. Therefore, even if the touch panel 246 is hit or strongly pressed from above, the touch panel 246, the plate unit cover 260, etc. can be made hard to break, and the game is interrupted due to the damage of the touch panel 246, etc. Can be reduced.

Further, since the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 that can be visually recognized from above through the touch panel 246 is provided, when the player is allowed to operate the touch panel 246, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 operates the touch panel 246. By displaying an image according to the purpose, the player can operate the touch panel 246 according to the content of the displayed image without knowing how to operate the touch panel 246, and the operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved. it can.

Further, since the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is provided, by displaying the effect image according to the game state, the player can be entertained by the effect image in addition to the operation effect of the touch panel 246. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the touch panel 246 is arranged in the center of the left and right, the touch panel 246 is easy to see, and the distance is the same from either side of the player's left or right hand, and the touch panel 246 is operated by the player's easy-to-use hand. The operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved by operating the touch panel 246 with an easy-to-use hand. Therefore, when the effect using the touch panel 246 is performed, the touch panel 246 can be immediately visually recognized and operated, and the operation effect can be quickly responded to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest. can do.

Further, the upper plate effect button 257 that can be operated by the player is provided, and in the operation effect presented according to the game state, in addition to the touch operation by the touch panel 246, the pressing operation by the upper plate effect button 257 is performed. Therefore, it is possible to present a variety of operation effects to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, since a part (guidance passage portion 212a) of the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) for storing the game ball is opened upward along the rear side of the touch panel 246, for example, the guide passage of the upper plate 201. By locking the finger other than the thumb to the portion 212a and operating the touch panel 246 with the thumb, the thumb can be stabilized by the finger locked to the guidance passage portion 212a, and the operability of the touch panel 246 is improved. The same action and effect as described above can be obtained, and the touch panel 246 is operated by grasping between the touch panel 246 and the upper plate lower covering portion 262 or by locking the finger to the guide passage portion 212a. Since it is possible to stabilize the fingers and improve operability, it is possible to select how to place the hands to stabilize the fingers according to the habits and preferences of the player, and it is possible to correspond to a wider variety of players. This makes it possible to facilitate the selection of the present pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to be played.

Subsequently, a configuration example of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47-49. FIG. 47 is a front view of the game board 5, FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the game board 5 from the front, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the game board 5 from the rear.

As shown in the figure, the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 has an outer rail 6002 and an inner rail 6003, and has a frame-shaped front component 6001 for partitioning the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is driven, and a front configuration. A game panel 1100 arranged so as to close the game area 5a on the rear side of the member 6001, and a function display unit 6040 arranged on the outside of the game area 5a and below the front component 6001 on the left side of the out port 6006. The attacker unit 2000 arranged on the right side in the game area 5a on the right side in the left-right direction and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the attacker unit 2000 arranged on the right side area in the game area 5a and above and below the front surface of the game panel 1100. A game ball guide path unit 6010 supported over the game, a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 arranged in a substantially central portion of the game area 5a and supported by the game panel 1100, and a back unit attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100. As an effect display means that can be visibly attached from the player side through the frame of the game panel 1100 and the center accessory (frame-shaped decorative body) 2300 on the rear side of the 3000 and the back unit 3000 to display a predetermined effect image. A predetermined effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the screen mounted on the right side of the center accessory 2300 and arranged adjacent to the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 so that the player can see it. It mainly includes a sub-projector display device 6201 capable of displaying.

The attacker unit 2000 is inserted from the front side into the opening formed in the lower right side of the game panel 1100 and then fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1100. The attacker unit 2000 has a plurality of receiving ports where a game ball driven into the game area 5a can be received. Specifically, the first starting port 2001, which is located approximately in the center of the left-right direction and where special lottery results can be obtained, and the rectangular large winning opening 2003, which is placed on the right side of the first starting port 2001 and greatly extends in the left-right direction And the general winning opening 2004 arranged on the left side of the large winning opening 2003 and the right side of the first starting opening 2001, and the second starting opening provided with the second starting opening from which a special lottery result can be obtained like the first starting opening. It is equipped with a unit 2005. The second starting port unit 2005 is located almost directly above the winning opening 2003.

The second starting port unit 2005 has a normal gate 2005a in which a predetermined normal lottery result is drawn when the game ball passes, a second starting port 2005c, and a second starting port according to the normal lottery result of the normal gate 2005a. The game ball discharge route 2005d that discharges the game ball 2006a that cannot go to the second starting port 2005c due to the movable piece 2005b that opens and closes and the movable piece 2005b that is closed after passing through the normal gate 2005a toward the big winning opening. And the game ball guide route 2005e capable of guiding the game ball to the second starting port 2005c by opening the movable piece 2005b after passing through the gate 2005a, and the game ball guide route 2005e are integrated. The start end of the second starting port unit 2005 communicates with the end of the above-mentioned game ball taxiway unit 6010, and when the game ball is hit to the right and enters the game ball taxiway unit 6010, the inside of the game ball taxiway unit 6010. To reach the second starting port unit 2005. Next, the game ball passes through the gate 2005a of the second starting port unit as it is and then reaches the movable piece 2005b, and when the movable piece 2005b is open, it passes through the game ball guide route 2005e and reaches the second starting port 2005c. On the other hand, when the movable piece 2005b is closed, the ball enters the ball, passes through the game ball discharge route 2005c, and falls toward the big winning opening 2003. The opening and closing of the movable piece 2005b is executed by a solenoid.

The upper side of the first starting port 2001 and the general winning port 2004 is open so that game balls can be accepted at all times. The large winning opening 2003 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2006 whose opening can be closed. The lower side of the opening / closing member 2006 is rotatably supported by the shaft, and when the large winning opening 2003 is closed to make the game ball unacceptable in a substantially vertical state, the upper side is rotated so as to be inclined forward. The large winning opening 2003 is opened so that game balls can be accepted. The opening / closing member 2006 is in a state in which the large winning opening 2003 is closed in a normal gaming state, and is performed by receiving (starting a prize) a game ball into the first starting port 2001 and the second starting port 2005c. It opens and closes by driving the attacker solenoid according to the result of the special lottery (big hit lottery) (when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" or "small hit"). However, as will be described later, when the result of the special lottery is "big hit (special hit)", the opening / closing member 2006 according to this embodiment accepts the game ball to the effective gate (described later) after the condition device is activated. It can be opened and closed by driving the attacker solenoid on the condition that there was. The effective gate is a special gate for activating the object continuous operation device after the condition device is activated. The effective gate is provided so that the pachinko machine 1 has a function capable of delaying the timing at which the accessory continuous operation device operates when the jackpot is won.

Next, the details of the game ball taxiway unit 6000 will be described. The game ball taxiway unit 6000 is made of a resin part product formed in the form of a hollow tube, and is attached to the game panel 1100 vertically on the right side of the game area 5a as described above. FIG. 50 shows the internal structure of the hollow tube by omitting the illustration of the front side portion of the game ball taxiway unit 6010. 51 (a) is an enlarged view of the taxiway unit 6010 of FIG. 50, and FIG. 51 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the taxiway unit 6010 in the longitudinal direction.

The start end 6010a of the taxiway unit 6010 is open at almost the uppermost part on the right side of the game area, and is hit right and bounced off by the reflector 6010b to flow down the right side of the game area. All of the balls are supplied into the game ball taxiway unit 6010 from the opening end 6010a. The front half region of a predetermined width following the start end 6010a of the game ball taxiway unit 6010 is formed by a substantially orthogonal orthogonal portion 6010c and a bent portion 6010d following the orthogonal portion 6010c. An effect gate 6011 is formed at the end of the orthogonal portion 6010c and at the beginning of the bent portion 6010d. When the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011, the passage information of the game ball is supplied to the peripheral control board (or the main control board), and the peripheral control board hits the game ball to the right when the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011. In the gaming state to be enabled, predetermined effect information of the effect device including the liquid crystal display device 1400 is formed. The game ball that has passed through the effect gate 6011 is guided to the straight line portion 6010e after passing through the bent portion 6010d while reciprocating in the left-right direction. The bending portion 6010c relaxes the falling speed of the game ball by bending the progress of the game ball.

The straight line portion 6010e following the bent portion 6010c of the game ball taxiway unit is formed in a straight line having a relatively long width and descending substantially vertically. As shown in FIG. 51 (b), a plurality of convex bodies 6010h having a hemispherical cross section are provided on the front side 6010f of the game ball taxiway unit in the straight portion 6010e so as to project toward the rear surface side 6010g. A convex body 6010h is provided so as to project from the rear surface portion toward the front surface portion. Since the convex body on the front side 6010f and the convex body on the rear side 6010g are formed in a staggered pattern, the game machine ball 6010i flowing down in the straight portion 6010e is a plurality of convex bodies arranged in a staggered pattern. The falling speed of the game ball is relaxed because it makes contact in order and advances while bending shortly back and forth. The height of the convex body 6010h in the front-rear direction is set within a range that does not impair the progress of the game ball passing through the game ball taxiway unit. In addition, in order to adjust the falling speed of the game ball, the width of a part of the convex body in the traveling direction of the game ball may be increased as shown by reference numeral 6010j. The straight portion 6010e is formed in a straight line without being bent like the bent portion 6010d in order to avoid the screen of the sub-projector display device 6201.

A bulging portion 6010k following the straight portion 6010e is formed in the lower region of the gaming region of the taxiway unit 6010. An inner tube 6010 m is formed in the bulging portion 6010 k, and the inner tube 6010 m leads to the second starting port unit 2005 described above. The above-mentioned effective gate 6010n is provided at the start end of the inner tube 6010m, and the game ball traveling while falling in the straight line portion 6010e heads for the inner tube 6010m as it is, passes through the effective gate 6010n, and then the second starting port. Reach unit 2005. The falling speed of the game ball passing through the game ball taxiway unit 6000 is relaxed particularly in the process of passing through the bent portion 6010d and the straight portion 6010e. Therefore, as compared with the case where the game ball freely falls without its speed being relaxed, it is possible to gain time from the time when the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 to the time when it passes through the effective gate 6010n. Therefore, since the peripheral control board can have a margin of time for the effect on the liquid crystal display device or the like, it is possible to provide the player with an effective effect. The details of this will be described later. The normal gate 2005a, the effect gate 6011, and the effective gate 6010n are provided with a gate switch (gate sensor) for detecting the passage of the game ball.

The center accessory 2300 is inserted from the front side into an opening large formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1100, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1100. FIG. 47. As shown in the above, the size occupies most of the game area 5a and is formed in a frame shape. As shown in FIG. 57, a logo movable accessory 6200 imitating a logo is provided on the upper part of the center accessory 2300 so as to be able to reciprocate and tilt counterclockwise from the right side to the center of the game board in front view. Further, as shown in FIG. 58, a rectangular movable accessory 6202 is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2300 so as to be reciprocally tilted clockwise around the lower side. The peripheral control board controls the movable mode of the movable accessory according to the gaming state.

Next, the details of the sub-projector display device 6201 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2300 will be described. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the sub-projector display device 6201 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is a front view (a) and a side view (b) of the sub-projector display device 6201.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 53, a sub having four screens 621 to 6214 composed of a first screen 6211, a second screen 6212, a third screen 6213, and a fourth screen 6214 on the right side of the center accessory 2300. A projector display device 6201 is provided, and each of the four screens 621 to 6214 can be moved in the vertical direction. Specifically, one of the four screens 621 to 6214 (usually the first screen 6211) up to a position where the player can see through the opening formed on the right side of the center accessory 2300. ) Is moved. As a result, of a specific screen (normally, the first screen 6211) that has been stopped after moving to a position where the player can see through the opening formed in the right portion of the center accessory 2300. A predetermined effect image can be displayed on the display surface.

That is, a specific projection in which the image light from the projector 6203, which will be described later, is projected from the rear side (back side) with respect to the region that can be visually recognized through the opening formed in the right portion of the center accessory 2300. The range is set. In this regard, each of the four screens 621 to 6214 is provided so as to be able to move to a predetermined conforming position that overlaps with the specific projection range and stop (displaying a predetermined effect image). Possible display position). Further, each of the four screens 621 to 6214 is located at a position that does not overlap with the specific projection range (a position on the lower side that is not visible to the player through the opening formed at the right side of the center accessory 2300). It is also provided so that it can be moved to and stopped (standby position that hides the screen).

Therefore, the peripheral control board selects one of the four screens 621 to 6214 and positions it at the display position according to the content of the effect in the game (based on the result of the lottery), and the other three screens. By controlling the screen to be positioned in the standby position, it is possible to project the image light from the rear side (back side) of the specific screen located in the display position.

In this respect, each of the screens 621 to 6214 according to this embodiment has a structure capable of projecting the image light projected from the rear side (rear side) as an effect image on the display surface on the front side. It is provided as (a so-called transparent screen for viewing the image projected on the back of the screen from the front). According to such a configuration, the image light is projected from the projector 6203, which will be described later, onto the specific screen located at the display position by the control by the peripheral control board, so that the image light is projected onto the front side of the specific screen. The projected effect image can be visually recognized through the opening formed in the right portion of the center accessory 2300.

At this time, on the specific screen, an effect image that complements the effect image on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and an effect image that is different from the effect image on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are displayed. Is desirable.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, an ax-shaped accessory 6206 imitating an ax is placed on the upper side of the screen (normally the first screen 6211) at the display position in the vertical direction with the cutting edge facing downward. It is provided so that it can be moved. The ax-shaped accessory 6206 is normally located on the upper side of the screen at the display position (when the first screen 6211 is located at the display position), and the opening formed on the right side of the center accessory 2300. It is hidden from the part so that it is difficult for the player to see. Further, the ax-shaped accessory 620 is formed so that at least its cutting edge is thicker in the front-rear direction than each of the four screens 621 to 6214. The peripheral control board has an ax shape so that the player can see it through the opening formed on the right side of the center accessory 2300 according to the replacement of the screen as the display position depending on the effect content in the game. It is possible to control the movable mode of the accessory 6206.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the upper side of the screen (usually the first screen 6211) at the display position and the rear side of the ax-shaped accessory 6206 are opaque and have a flat plate-like shielding role. The object 6207 is provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction like the ax-shaped accessory 6206. The shielding accessory 6207 is normally located on the upper side of the screen at the display position (when the first screen 6211 is located at the display position), and is an opening formed on the right side of the center accessory 2300. Like the ax-shaped accessory 6206, it is hidden from the part so that it is difficult for the player to see. Further, the shielding accessory 6207 is formed to have the same thickness in the left-right direction as each of the four screens 621 to 6214, and is located on the right side of the center accessory 2300 when the screen to be displayed is replaced. It can be moved so as to close the gap in the formed opening where the screen does not exist. The peripheral control board is used for shielding so that the player can see it through the opening formed on the right side of the center accessory 2300 according to the replacement of the screen as the display position depending on the effect content in the game. It is possible to control the movable mode of the accessory 6207.

As described above, when the screen to be the display position is replaced, the shielding accessory 6207 irradiates the image from the opening formed in the right portion of the center accessory 2300 (the image is emitted from the projection portion 6203a of the projector 6203 described later). The gap (the gap where the screen moves from the display position) where the screen does not exist is closed. Further, the shielding accessory 6207 is configured to be opaque so as not to transmit the light emitted from the projection unit 6203a of the projector 6203. For example, when the shielding accessory 6207 does not close the gap formed in the right portion of the center accessory 2300 in which the screen does not exist, the image is emitted from the projection portion 6203a of the projector 6203. At that time, light leaks through the gap, but by closing the gap with the shielding accessory 6207, the light does not leak through the gap, and the light from the projection unit 6203a of the projector 6203 It is possible to prevent the light from directly entering the player's eyes. Further, by closing the gap formed in the right portion of the center accessory 2300 by the shielding accessory 6207 in which the screen does not exist, the player does not see the internal space of the dark place box 6205 described later. The inside of the dark place box 6205 can always be a dark place.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is provided in the substantially central portion of the game area 5a in the game board 5, whereas the sub-projector display device 6201 is on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is provided at a position away from the central portion of the game area 5a on the game board 5. That is, the eyes of the player playing the game on the pachinko machine 1 are located in the front direction with respect to the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400, whereas the screen at the display position on the sub-projector display device 6201. It is not located in the forward direction with respect to the display surface of. For this reason, when the screen to be the display position is replaced, for example, a gap in which the screen does not exist is generated in the opening formed on the right side of the center accessory 2300, so that the projection unit of the projector 6203, which will be described later, is formed. When the image is emitted from the 6203a, even if the light leaks through the gap, the light from the projection unit 6203a of the projector 6203 is prevented from directly entering the eyes of the player. Can be done. By tilting the display surface of the screen at the display position of the sub-projector display device 6201 in a direction different from the line of sight of the player, the light from the projection unit 6203a of the projector 6203 can be directly seen by the player. You may make sure to prevent it from entering.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 53, the sub-projector display device 6201 can reflect the projector 6203 that emits an image from the projection unit 6203a as a light source and the image emitted from the projection unit 6203a of the projector 6203. A flat plate-shaped reflector 6204 having a mirror surface, and a flat plate-shaped four that enables an effect image to be projected on the display surface (front surface) side when the image reflected by the reflector 6204 is received on the back side. Until the image emitted from the screens 621 to 6214 (first screen 6211, second screen 6212, third screen 6213, fourth screen 6214) and the image emitted from the projection unit 6203a of the projector 6203 reaches the back side of the screen. The path is made into a dark place by being surrounded by a plate, and is composed of a box-shaped dark place box 6205 having a projector 6204 inside. Each of these four screens 621 to 6214 is composed of a special screen having transparency, and when the image reflected by the reflector 6204 is received on the back side, the effect image is displayed on the display surface (front surface) side. It is possible to project. Further, the path from the projection unit 6203a of the projector 6203 to the back side of the screen is not affected by the light from the outside by the dark box 6205, and the display surface of the screen. It is possible to clearly project the effect image on the (front) side. The opening on the front side of the dark box 6205 is adjacent to the opening formed on the right side of the center accessory 2300, and the opening is irradiated with an image from the projection portion 6203a of the projector 6203. Since it becomes an area, when any one of the four screens 621 to 6214 is located at the display position, the effect image can be visually recognized by the player through the opening formed in the right portion of the center accessory 2300. There is.

Further, the four screens 621 to 6214 are each composed of a special screen made of light black while having transparency, so that when the image reflected by the reflector 6204 is received on the back side. When the effect image is projected on the display surface (front surface) side, the black color can be emphasized and the effect image can be clearly projected. When the screen is composed of a general white screen, it is difficult to make the black color stand out due to the colored white color on the screen itself. In addition, the fact that the dark place box 6205 makes the inside of the dark place box 6205 on the back side of the screen at the display position a dark place also contributes to making the black color stand out. Then, when the screen to be the display position is replaced, the shielding accessory 6207 moves so as to close the gap in the opening formed on the right side of the center accessory 2300 where the screen does not exist. , The inside of the dark place box 6205 on the back side of the screen is always set as a dark place, and the black color can always be emphasized.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the four screens 621 to 6214 in the standby position are in the order of the first screen 6211, the second screen 6212, the third screen 6213, and the fourth screen 6214 in order from the front side. One of the four screens 6211 to 6214 (usually the first screen 6211) is moved from the standby position to the display position by a predetermined distance. Further, each of the four screens 621 to 6214 is provided with a drive source (drive means, not shown) such as a motor or a solenoid, and the power from the drive source is transmitted to the standby position or the standby position. It is possible to move the display position up and down. Further, each of the four screens 6211 to 6214 projects an effect image on the display surface (front surface) side when the image emitted from the projection unit 6203a of the projector 6203 is received on the back side, and the screen itself. Is thin and light. Therefore, it is possible to quickly move the screen between the standby position and the display position by the power from the drive source, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the replacement of the screen as the display position. The ax-shaped accessory 6206 and the shielding accessory 6207 are also provided with drive sources (drive means, not shown) such as a motor and a solenoid, respectively, and the power from the drive sources is transmitted. , Each can be moved up and down.

Furthermore, the sub-projector display device 6201 according to this embodiment is provided with at least the projector 6203, the reflector 6204, and the dark box 6205 as a unit. According to such a configuration, the position shift occurs in the specific projection range set for the area that can be seen through the opening formed in the right portion of the center accessory 2300. Will be suitably suppressed. As a result, even though the screen is positioned at the display position, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect image is not displayed well on the screen. In order to obtain such an effect, the four screens 621 to 6214 and their replacement mechanism should be unitized together with the projector 6203, the reflector 6204, the dark box 6205, and the like. Is more desirable.

In order to suppress the occurrence of such misalignment, the image light from the projector 6203 is projected even when the screen located at the display position is moved when the screen is replaced. For a particular projection range, it is more desirable to fix it rather than follow the movement of the screen. That is, in this case, the peripheral control board is 2 with respect to the specific projection range while the position of the specific projection range on which the image light from the projector 6203 is projected is maintained without being changed. Control is performed so as to reverse the optical positional relationship between the two screens (the screen located at the display position and one of the three screens located at the standby position).

When such a configuration is adopted, the specific projection range set for the area visible through the opening formed in the right portion of the center accessory 2300 is set regardless of the operating condition of the screen. It becomes possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of misalignment and defocus. As a result, after replacing the screen located in the display position with the screen located in the standby position, the effect image is not displayed properly on the screen newly positioned in the display position. , Etc. can be made less likely to occur.

Further, when such a configuration is adopted, the effect image is not displaced from the position where the effect image is projected, and only the screen as a display body is removed from the position, so that the screen can be replaced. It will be done. Therefore, it becomes more difficult to grasp the situation that the display body is being replaced, and it becomes possible to suddenly make the display body (screen) having a different directing form appear.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52, of the four screens 621 to 6214, the first screen 6211 has an area capable of displaying all the video light projected on the specific projection range as an effect image. And is formed as a display surface having a shape (here, a rectangular shape) (this form). Therefore, when the first screen 6211 is in the display position, the effect image is displayed in at least the entire area that can be visually recognized from the front view (this display mode).

However, the second screen 6212, the third screen 6213, and the fourth screen 6214 have an area, shape, and property that can appropriately express all the image light projected on the specific projection range as a production image. It is not formed as a display surface (directive form), and when these screens 6212 to 6214 are in the display position, the directive image is appropriately displayed in at least all the areas that can be visually recognized from the front. There is no such thing (directive display mode).

Here, as a directing form of such a screen, for example, a screen having a display surface having a size and a shape that cannot overlap a part of a specific projection range, or an unevenness causes a focus shift. Examples thereof include a screen having a display surface and a screen having a display surface having a color scheme (such as being reddish with respect to the screen of this embodiment). That is, the effect form of the screen is, in short, a production image different from the effect image displayed on the screen of the present embodiment even if there is no change in the image light from the projector 6203. It can be said that it is a form that can be put out.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first screen 6211 of the four screens 621 to 6214 has a rectangular shape with no notch on the display surface, whereas the second screen 6212, the second screen 6212, Although the display surface of the three screens 6213 and the fourth screen 6214 has a rectangular shape like the first screen 6211, notches and cracks are formed in a part of the display surface. Specifically, the second screen 6212 has a notch penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center of the upper portion thereof, and the third screen 6213 has a notch penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center of the upper portion thereof. The two screens 6212 are formed so as to extend downward and become larger than the notch. Further, in the fourth screen 6214, not only the notch penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center of the upper part extends downward from the notch of the third screen 6213 and becomes larger, but also the notch extends to the center of the lower part. When it reaches, the display surface is formed as if it were cracked. As described above, the second screen 6212, the third screen 6213, and the fourth screen 6214 have different shapes of the notches formed in a part of the display surface, and the third screen 6213 is different from the second screen 6212. , The fourth screen 6214 is configured to have a larger notch area than the third screen 6213. That is, the second screen 6212, the third screen 6213, and the fourth screen 6214 have different display surface areas on which a predetermined effect image can be displayed by the amount of the cutout area, and the second screen 6212 The area of the display surface is narrowed in the order of the third screen 6213 and the fourth screen 6214 rather than the third screen 6213.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned directing form can be realized not by a display device using the projector 6203 but also by a display body such as a liquid crystal display. For example, when the present embodiment is such that the display area visible from the player side is constructed only by the display screen of one liquid crystal display, the display area visible from the player side is formed by a plurality of liquid crystals. If a gap is provided between the liquid crystal displays while being constructed on the display screen of the display, a space portion in which no effect image can be displayed will be provided in a part of the above display area. .. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to create a directing form having a display performance different from that of the present form.

Further, in the second screen 6212, the third screen 6213, and the fourth screen 6214 among the four screens 6211 to 6214, the shape of the notch formed in a part of the display surface differs in the degree of the notch. However, each is formed so as to substantially match the shape of the lower part of the ax-shaped accessory 6206. The operation of the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is controlled by the peripheral control board (based on the result of the lottery) according to the content of the effect in the game.

Then, when any of the screens of the second screen 6212, the third screen 6213, and the fourth screen 6214 is positioned at the display position, the lower tip of the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is formed in a part of the display surface. It is designed to move downward so as to touch the lower end of the notch (however, in the fourth screen 6214, it touches in the middle of the notch). That is, since the notch extends downward in the order of the third screen 6213 from the second screen 6212 and the fourth screen 6214 from the third screen 6213, the ax is in that order when it is positioned at the display position. The shape accessory 6206 is designed to move downward. As described above, when any one of the second screen 6212, the third screen 6213, and the fourth screen 6214 is positioned at the display position, the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is cut formed in a part of the display surface. The notch is closed and the screen is sandwiched between the display surfaces. For example, when the notch formed in a part of the display surface is not closed by the ax-shaped accessory 6206, when an image is emitted from the projection portion 6203a of the projector 6203, light is emitted through the notch. However, by closing the notch with the ax-shaped accessory 6206, light does not leak through the notch, and the light from the projection unit 6203a of the projector 6203 is seen by the player. It is possible to prevent direct entry.

Further, in the sub-projector display device 6201, each of the four screens 6211 to 6214 projects an effect image on the display surface (front surface) side when the image emitted from the projection unit 6203a of the projector 6203 is received on the back side. It is a thing, and the screen itself is thin. Further, in the sub-projector display device 6201, since the image emitted from the projection unit 6203a of the projector 6203 is received on the entire back side of the screen, the image emitted from the projection unit 6203a of the projector 6203 is on the back side of the screen. It is necessary to separate by a predetermined distance from the distance to reach the projector, but by using a reflector 6204 capable of reflecting the image emitted from the projection unit 6203a of the projector 6203, the reflector 6204 and the display position thereof. The projector 6203 is provided below the screen in the above, and is devised so that the thickness of the sub-projector display device 6201 in the front-rear direction does not increase. For example, when the image emitted from the projection unit 6203a of the projector 6203 is directly received on the back side of the screen without using the reflector 6204, the projection unit 6203a of the projector 6203 is used to receive the image emitted from the back surface of the screen. The distance to the side must be separated by a predetermined distance, and the thickness of the sub-projector display device 6201 in the front-rear direction becomes thick. In this way, when the sub-projector display device 6201 is used, the thickness in the front-rear direction is not thicker than that of a display device generally used in pachinko machines such as the liquid crystal display device 1400, so that the installation space is large. Can be saved, and the game area 5a in the game board 5 can be effectively utilized.

Next, operation examples of the four screens 621 to 6214, the ax-shaped accessory 6206, and the shielding accessory 6207 at the time of production using the sub-projector display device 6201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. 53 and 54 are front views (a) and side views (b) for explaining the operation at the time of production using the second screen 6212 among the four screens 621 to 6214, and FIGS. 55 and 54. 56 is a front view (a) and a side view (b) for explaining the operation at the time of the effect of replacing the screen set as the display position from the second screen 6212 to the third screen 6213. Of the four screens 621 to 6214, the same operation is performed for the effect using the first screen 6211, the third screen 6213, and the fourth screen 6214.

As shown in FIG. 53, when the second screen 6212 is located in the display position among the four screens 621 to 6214, the first screen 6211, the third screen 6213, and the fourth screen 6214 are located in the standby position. , Only the display surface of the second screen 6212 is visible to the player. Further, the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is located above the second screen 6212 at the display position, and its cutting edge is sandwiched between the notches formed in the second screen 6212 at the display position. The sandwiched part is visible to the player. On the other hand, the shielding accessory 6207 is located above the second screen 6212 at the display position and is concealed so as not to be visually recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54, when the second screen 6212 moves downward from the display position, the cutting edge of the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is sandwiched between the notches formed in the second screen 6212 at the display position. In this state, the ax-shaped accessory 6206 and the shielding accessory 6207 also move downward. The shielding accessory 6207 is an opening formed in the right portion of the center accessory 2300 (the opening formed in the dark box 6205, the area where the image is irradiated from the projection portion 6203a of the projector 6203). It is moving until the gap where the screen does not exist (the gap where the screen moves from the display position) is closed. Then, as the ax-shaped accessory 6206 sandwiched between the second screen 6212 at the display position is swung down, the second screen 6212 is displayed at the display position by the amount that the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is swung down. The ax-shaped accessory 6206 is swung up and down, such that the second screen 6212 moves so as to return to the display position as the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is swung upward. Along with this, it is possible to perform an effect in which the second screen 6212 with the ax-shaped accessory 6206 sandwiched is rattling in the vertical direction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, when the screen to be the display position is replaced from the second screen 6212 to the third screen 6213, the second screen 6212 moves downward from the display position toward the standby position, and the second screen The third screen 6213, which is located behind the 6212, moves upward from the standby position to the display position. In this way, when the screen to be the display position is replaced from the second screen 6212 to the third screen 6213, the second screen 6212 and the third screen 6213 are moved at the same time so as to pass each other, and the player can move the screen at the display position. It's hard to notice that the screen is being replaced. The shielding accessory 6207 is an opening formed in the right portion of the center accessory 2300 (the opening formed in the dark box 6205, the area where the image is irradiated from the projection portion 6203a of the projector 6203). Of these, the screen is moved so as to close the gap where the screen does not exist (the gap where the screen moves from the display position).

Then, as shown in FIG. 56, after the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is sandwiched between the notches formed in the third screen 6213, the third screen 6213 in the state where the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is sandwiched. Continues to move upward until it is in the display position, while it continues to move downward until the second screen 6212 is in the standby position. Further, the ax-shaped accessory 6206 and the shielding accessory 6207 also move upward in accordance with the upward movement of the third screen 6213. As a result, the screen used as the display position is replaced with the third screen 6213, but the third screen 6213 has a notch larger than that of the second screen 6212 formed on the display surface, and the screen at the display position is inserted. When it is changed, the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is swung in the vertical direction, which makes it seem as if the crack (notch) that has entered the display surface suddenly becomes large, which has a great impact on the player. Can be given.

As shown in FIG. 49, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and the back box 3001 mainly supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 at a position separated from the game panel 1100 to the rear side by a predetermined distance. In the back box 3001, a shutter-type movable accessory (described later) arranged in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and a falling movable accessory (described later) imitating a claw that can fall in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 are provided. It is configured to prepare. A board board holder 6023 is fixed below the back box 3001. The board board holder 623 is provided with a main control board box 6024 for accommodating a main control board for controlling game operations on the back surface thereof. Further, on the back surface of the back box 3001, a peripheral board box 6022 in which the peripheral control board is housed is attached.

As shown in FIG. 59, the shutter type movable accessory 6301 is composed of an upper shutter body 6302 and a lower shutter body 6303. The upper shutter body 6302 is supported by the back box 3001 on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 so as to be able to move forward and backward from the back surface of the upper part of the center accessory 2300 to the center of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is supported on the front side of the center from the back side of the lower part of the center accessory to the center of the liquid crystal display device so that it can move forward and backward. The peripheral control board moves the upper shutter body 6302 and the lower shutter body 6303 separately or simultaneously according to the game state, and the upper shutter body 6302 and the lower shutter body 6303 are united on the front surface of the image 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400. The integrated shutter body is formed.

As shown in FIG. 65, the drop movable accessory 6250 suddenly drops a relatively large width from the non-opening region at the top of the game panel 1100 to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Therefore, in the game machine, when the player's attention is directed to the above-mentioned upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (touch panel 246), the player's attention and viewpoint are the liquid crystal on the game panel 1100 side (game area 5a side). It can be directed to the display device 1400. Next, the details of the falling movable accessory 6250 will be described. FIG. 60A is a perspective view of the falling accessory as seen from the front, FIG. 60B is a perspective view of the falling accessory as viewed from the back, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective of the falling accessory as viewed from the front. FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the falling accessory as viewed from the back, FIG. 63 is a front view showing the first operation of the falling accessory, and FIG. 64 is a second view of the falling movable accessory. It is a front view which shows the operation.

The falling movable accessory 6250 includes a falling body 6250a that imitates a claw, an arm body 6250b that supports the falling body, and a folder 6250c that supports the base 6251 of the arm body 6250b and controls the falling behavior of the falling body 6250a. It is configured to prepare. The folder 6250c is fixed to the back box 3001 so as to be on the right side of the game area 5a and behind the center accessory 2300.

The folder 6250c is configured to accommodate the drive mechanism 6250f of the arm body 6250b by the front cover 6250d and the rear cover 6253e. The drive mechanism 6250f includes a cam 6251f that contacts the bottom surface 6250e of the tapered portion of the base 6251, a first motor 6250g for rotationally driving the cam 6251f, a first rail 6250h that guides the vertical movement of the base 6251, and a first rail 6250h. , A second rail 6250i, a rack 6250j that moves up and down along the second rail 6250i, a pinion 6250k that meshes with the rack 6250j to move the rack 6250j up and down, and a second motor 6250m for rotationally driving the pinion. And have. The first rail 6250h is formed at a height approximately half that of the folder 6250c, and the lower end of the first rail 6250h is fitted and supported by the rib 6250r on the inner surface of the rear cover 6253e. When the falling body 6250a descends, the lower end of the base 6251 abuts on the rib 6250r, so that the lowest descending position of the falling body 6250a is restricted to substantially the center of the folder.

As shown in FIG. 63, when the cam 6251f is in contact with the tapered portion 6250e of the base portion 6251 and the tapered portion 6250e is supported by the maximum diameter of the cam 6251f (FIG. 63 (a)), the falling body 6250a It is supported at its top position. When the cam 6251f reciprocates within a small angle in the clockwise direction by the first motor 6250g, the contact position between the cam 6251f and the bottom surface of the tapered portion 6250e moves slightly up and down as shown in FIG. 63 (b). Along with this, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line, the falling body 6250a also moves up and down so as to be slightly exposed from the upper end position of the center accessory 2300. On the other hand, when the rotation angle of the cam 6251f becomes large and the engagement state between the cam 6251f and the bottom surface 6250e of the tapered portion is finally released, the falling body 6250a freely falls and the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed from the back side of the center accessory 2300. It descends at a stretch to about the middle position on the front surface of the (Fig. 64 (a), Fig. 65).

From this state, when the second motor 6250m rotates the pinion 6250k to raise the rack 6250j (FIG. 64 (b)), the falling body 6250a also rises as if pushed by the rack 6250j. After the falling body 6250a is raised to the uppermost position, the first motor 6250g rotates until the cam 6251f abuts on the bottom surface 6250e of the tapered portion, so that the falling body 6250a is supported by the cam 6251f and returns to the uppermost position. Next, the second motor 6250m lowers the rack 6250j to the lowermost position by rotating the pinion 6250k in the reverse direction. Unlike the first rail 6250h, the second rail 6250i is formed to have a length substantially equal to the vertical length of the folder 6250c in order to guide the vertical movement of the rack. The position of the cam 6251f and the position of the rack 6250j are detected by the photosensors 6250p and 6250q, and the peripheral control board is the rotation position of the first motor 6250g and the second motor 6250m according to the output from the photosensor. To control.

Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70. FIG. 66 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 67 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 66, and FIG. 68 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input to / from the game ball rental device connection terminal board that relays the electrical connection with the display board, FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 66, and FIG. 70 is a block diagram. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the peripheral control MPU.

As shown in FIG. 66, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly composed of the main control board 4100, the payout control board 4110, and the peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

As shown in FIG. 66, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on, and also performs the game operation. The main control MPU4100a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various control programs such as the main control program to be controlled, a ROM for storing various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various detection switches are input. Main control input circuit 4100b, main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d for driving various solenoids for movable accessories, etc. It mainly includes a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e that monitors signs of a voltage power failure or momentary power failure.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU4100a. It also has a built-in watch dock timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

Further, the main control MPU4100a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU4100a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU4100a can take out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 4100b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. Main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function that has a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and main control output circuit 4100cc without a reset function that does not have a reset terminal. It is composed of and. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset. It is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 4100cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100cc without a reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The first start port 2001, the second start port 2005c, the start port switch 3022 (collectively, the first start port switch and the second start port switch) that detects the game ball that has entered each, and the general winning opening. The detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the game ball entered in 2004 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. Has been done. In addition, a normal gate 2005a, a gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball that has passed through an effective gate 6010n (generally referred to as each switch), a count switch 2110 for detecting a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening 2003, and The detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 attached to the back unit 3000 and detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet is mainly transmitted via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 4100b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the control MPU 4100a.

The main control MPU 4100a is a main control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from the 4100ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and a drive signal is sent from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the start port solenoid (movable piece 2005b drive solenoid) 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161. By outputting or outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display board 1191 are output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. 1st special symbol display 1185, 2nd special symbol display 1186, 1st special symbol storage display 1184, 2nd special symbol storage display 1187, normal symbol display 1189, normal symbol storage display 1188, A drive signal is output to the game status display 1183 and the round display 1190.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. Main control output with reset function by outputting various information (game information) to the board 4110 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

In the present embodiment, the start port switch 3022, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas the general winning port switch 3020 has a non-contact type proximity switch. , A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2005c and also passes through the gate frequently, so that the game ball is frequently detected by the start port switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352. Occurs in. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the start port switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352. Further, when a big hit game state that is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2003 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the game ball is frequently detected by the count switch 2110. Therefore, the count switch 2110 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2004 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening switch 3020 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening switch 3020 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a sends various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100 kb without a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 4100 cc without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the board 4110. When the payout control board 4110 normally completes receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 4100. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data in the main control input circuit 4100b, so that the main control input circuit 4100b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU4100a normally receives various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. It is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function to the payout control board 4110.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100 bc without the reset function. , No reset function Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 4100cc to the peripheral control board 4140.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is configured around the main control CPU core 4100aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of the main control serial I / O ports, provides a bus 4100ah. The circuit is connected via (not shown). The main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like (illustrated). Omitted). When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec outputs a command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100ea and transmission is started to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has 32 bytes as a storage capacity. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. (Not shown) BC0 (not shown) is provided. With this capacitor BC0, the main control MPU4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 4110, is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and is completely erased from the main control internal RAM by the main control MPU 4100a. It is supposed to be (cleared).

As shown in FIG. 67, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of the game ball displays the state of the payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls related to the payout, the operation switch 860a that also has various functions, and the pachinko machine 1. The error LED display 860b and the like are provided. Further, the operation switch 860a having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on a detection signal output by being operated. The RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.) Is output.

As shown in FIG. 67, the payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls related to payout controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on and pays out the game medium executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. Detection from the payout control MPU4120a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in various control programs including a payout control program that controls operation, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various detection switches related to payout. A payout control input circuit 4120b for inputting signals, a payout control output circuit 4120c for outputting various signals to an external board, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744, and a CR. It includes a CR unit input / output circuit 4120e for exchanging various signals with the unit 6. In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, "payout control built-in ROM") of the payout control MPU4120a. It also has a built-in watch dock timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control program serializes various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to the payout as payer serial data transmission signals via the payout control input circuit 4120b. Receive serial data with. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 860a as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error release navigation command (corresponding to the first error release command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error release navigation commands are transmitted to the payer serial data, respectively. As a signal, serial data is output to the receiving port of the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b (command transmission means). Further, this payout control program pays out after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 860a, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program also issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. At the same time, when the detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 4120b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 4120b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 4120b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 4120c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and a payout control output circuit 4120cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. It is composed of and. The payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function is reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 4120cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 4120cc without a reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

First, the detection signals from the ball-out switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage of the prize ball device and the counting switch 751 that detects the game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage of the prize ball device are the prize ball device. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the board in the prize ball case and the payout control input circuit 4120b. The detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit formed in the rotation detection board of the prize ball device is first the rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device, the board inside the prize ball case, and the payout control input. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the circuit 4120b.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame with respect to the main body frame and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame with respect to the outer frame are paid out via the payout control input circuit 4120b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the MPU 4120a.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is first input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the handle relay terminal plate 192, the power supply board 851, and the payout control input circuit 4120b.

The payout control MPU 4120a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b by the serial data method at the input terminal of the serial input port, or the operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 860a. The signal) is output to the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b. When the payout control MPU4120a normally receives various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 4120ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function to the main control board 4100.

Further, the payout control MPU 4120a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 4120 kb without a reset function, thereby payout control without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 4120 kb to the main control board 4100. When the main control board 4100 normally completes receiving various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, the main control board 4100 outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 4110. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

Further, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, so that the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function can be used. The drive signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit, and the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit to the payout motor via the board inside the prize ball case, or the state of the pachinko machine 1 is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. Is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function to output the drive signal to the error LED display 860b from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function. ..

The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically). Is that the payout rotating body and the game ball mesh with each other near the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, and the payout rotating body is difficult to rotate. When the number "3" is displayed, it means that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, a problem occurs in the counting switch 751 based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751). When the number "5" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). Then, when the number "6" is displayed, it is notified that the tank is "full" (specifically, the game ball stored based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is full). Then, when the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6). When the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (with prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number. To that effect) is notified.

Further, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs the number of balls of the game ball actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function is output. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 4110 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 to the external terminal board via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (configured by incorporating an infrared LED and a photoIC) (not shown), and the amusement park (hall) is provided through these plurality of photocouplers. The number of game balls and various other information (game information, error details related to the payout operation of the game balls, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in the above. The external terminal board and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer. It is designed so that it does not malfunction or break down, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the main control board 4100 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout. Is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are, first, the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the input / output circuit 4120e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining amount display 365c, such as a game ball. It is output to the rental device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the residual frequency display 365c. Further, in the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the residual power display 365c, the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. There is.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (not shown) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. By the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU4120a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 860a is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is sent to a predetermined payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b. The payout control MPU4120a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and with this as an opportunity, the payout control MPU4120a sends the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is also output to the payout control output circuit 4120 cc without a reset function, and is also output to the main control board 4100 from the payout control output circuit 4120 cc without a reset function.

Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 4120 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 68. As shown in FIG. 68, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 4110, and also includes the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. The electrical connection between the boards of the above is also relayed (to be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay. The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, between the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 4110, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay The boards of the terminal board 880 and the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by each wiring (harness). Further, AC24V described later from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC + 12V (hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”)) from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage creation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. , The game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is supplied to the payout control board 4110, while the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are supplied to the frequency display board 365. ..

A switch 365a and a return switch 365b are mounted on the frequency display board 365, and a residual frequency display 365c, which is a segment display, is mounted.

In the ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b, the ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending switch 365a is pressed, the ball lending switch 365a is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is sent to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 362 is pressed, the return switch 365b is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal plate 869.

The residual frequency indicator 365c has three segment indicators arranged side by side in a row, and three digits are driven by a so-called dynamic lighting method in which one digit segment indicator is sequentially driven among these three digit segment indicators. The segment display of is controlled to be lit. By such lighting control, the remaining frequency display 365c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 and displays the error of the CR unit 6. The residual frequency indicator 365c is a digit signal DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicators, and the designated one-digit segment indicator. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be lit and displayed are from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board. When input via 880, the 1-digit segment display is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment indicators are emitted. The contents of the light emission can be visually recognized through the loan balance display unit 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the residual frequency display 365c. In the CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. When the CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending switch 365a and the return switch 365b are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the loan remaining display unit 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the residual power display 365c through the current limiting resistor mounted on the terminal board 869 for the rental device for a game ball or the like.

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 is a one-time payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of loaned balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which corresponds to an amount of 100 yen) in one payout operation. The BRQ is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a) into which BRDY and BRQ are input sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended, to a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball rental is possible or impossible, is transmitted to the game ball rental device connection terminal board. It is output to the CR unit 6 via 869. For example, if the hall clerk or the like presets the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball rental button 361 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is to be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out in succession, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, the return button 362 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 361.

Next, the power supply board 851 will be briefly described. The power supply board 851 includes a power supply switch 852 supplied from the pachinko island facility and capable of electrically connecting or electrically disconnecting an AC 24 volt (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 855 that generates various power sources. It is provided with a launch control unit that controls launch by a launch solenoid of a ball launching device and ball feed control by a ball feed solenoid.

The power supply control unit 855 improves the power ratio of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a and the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a in which the power switch 852 is operated to rectify the AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility. The power factor improving circuit 855b, the smoothing circuit 855c for smoothing the power with the power factor improved by the power factor improving circuit 855b, and various alternating currents for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 855c to various substrates. It includes a power supply creation circuit 855d for creating a power supply.

The launch control unit 857 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid and ball feed control by ball feed mainly comprises a launch control circuit 857a. The launch control circuit 857a includes an operation signal from the potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch intensity) of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a, and a touch switch 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching. The detection signal from the launch stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch (launch) of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will, and the detection signal from the launch stop switch 518 are via the handle relay terminal plate 192. It has been entered. Further, in the launch control circuit 857a, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal to that effect is input via the payout control board 4110. ..

The launch control circuit 857a adjusts the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512, and controls the output to the launch solenoid 654.

As shown in FIG. 69, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, a game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, and an upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. In addition to performing drawing control, it also controls the output of images from the projector 6203 for projecting an image on the screen of the sub-projector display device 6201 to detect and control the contact state of the touch panel 246, while the speaker box provided on the main body frame. The LCD and sound control unit 4160 that controls the sound of music and sound effects flowing from the speakers housed in the door frame and the speakers provided on the door frame, calendar information that specifies the date, and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second. The volume of music, sound effects, etc. played from the real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165, the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame, and the speaker provided in the door frame. , A volume adjustment volume that is adjusted by rotating the knob portion.

As shown in FIG. 69, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. From the peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and control the production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later. Peripheral control unit that is executed each time a V-blank signal is input Various information that is continued across the steady processing (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, light emission of various LEDs, etc. Peripheral control RAM 4150c that stores information for managing schedule data that defines aspects, etc., and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of jackpot game states and special Peripheral control SRAM 4150d that stores information for managing various production flags, and peripheral control external watch dock timer 4150e (hereinafter, "peripheral control external" for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally WDT4150e ”) and. Further, the peripheral control unit 4150 controls the effect operation by receiving the passing information of the game ball by the switch of the effect gate 6011 and the input information of the operation of the effect operation means such as the effect button 257.

The peripheral control RAM 4150c can hold the stored contents only for a time when a momentary power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power failure occurs). ) Lose its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor") provided on the power supply board. , The stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the power supply board is provided with the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, so that the peripheral control SRAM 4150d retains the stored contents. You can't do it and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT4150e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU4150a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, if the peripheral control MPU4150a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT4150e to the peripheral control external WDT4150e within a certain period of time (until the timer starts up), the reset is applied. When the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT4150e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT4150e can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 4100 are received, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp drive board is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). Serial for motor drive board to transmit game board side motor drive data for transmission to drive board 4170 and output drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. Door-side motor drive data for transmitting from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or outputting drive signals to an electrical drive source such as a dial drive motor provided on the door frame. Frame decoration drive amplifier board Transmission from the motor serial I / O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board, and peripheral door relay terminal board, or to each decorative board of the door frame Door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of provided LEDs, etc. from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port to peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the board and the peripheral door relay terminal board.

Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, the detection signal from the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 provided on the effect operation unit 220 is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Then, the serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit via the peripheral door relay terminal board, the frame peripheral relay terminal board, and the peripheral control input circuit, and the serial I for detecting the operation unit of the peripheral control MPU4150a. It is input to the / O port.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies (movable accessories) provided on the game board 5, and the gate switch of the effect gate 6011. The detection signal from the player and the detection signal from the press switch such as the effect button are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 or the like, and the serialized detection data is serialized on the game board side. It is input from the transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU4150a via the peripheral control input circuit. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is adapted to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT4150e together. I am diagnosing whether or not it is.

Next, the peripheral control MPU4150a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is centered on the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, and has a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I. It is composed of a / O port 4150ae, a WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 4150ag for peripheral control, and a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak.

Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads and writes various data to peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via internal bus 4150ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT4150af, Peripheral control Various data are read and written to the various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data to the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Then, various data are read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT4150af, and peripheral control parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the / O port 4150ag and the input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, and is DMA0. It has four channels, ~ DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT4150af. , Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, to perform data transfer independently without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In addition, while reading and writing to the storage device of the RAM 4150ab with built-in peripheral control via the internal bus 4150ah, various serial I / O ports 4150ae with peripheral control, WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, parallel I / O ports 4150ag with peripheral control, and Reads and outputs to / from an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Between the O port 4150ae, the WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, the various parallel I / O ports 4150ag for peripheral control, and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, while reading and outputting to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d via peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and external bus 4150h, various peripheral controls are performed. For input / output devices such as serial I / O port 4150ae, WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 4150ag for peripheral control, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, via peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150ai. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 4150d, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae, WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 4150ag for peripheral control, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 4150ae are serial I / O ports for lamp drive boards, serial I / O ports for motor drive boards, serial I / O ports for frame decoration drive amplifier boards, and frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs. It has a serial I / O port for, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring operation unit information.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is out of control, and when this timer is up, it resets in hardware. It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is reset when the watch dock timer is started and the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watch dock timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 4150ag output various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal and door side motor drive light emission latch signal, as well as output clear signal to peripheral control external WDT4150e, and play games. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialization is performed. The movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU4150a can be output, and the upper decoration on the door frame 3 can be output. It outputs the lighting signal of the LED mounted on the upper decorative board of the unit. This LED is a high-brightness white LED, and is a confirmation lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I / O ports 4150ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag are directly connected electrically. It is possible to take noise countermeasures for LED lighting control, which has a heavy meaning in terms of games. The LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A / D converter is electrically connected to the volume control volume, and the resistance value changes by rotating the knob of the volume control volume, and the resistance value is divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob. The compressed voltage is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) are controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the speaker and the door frame are provided in the speaker box provided in the main body frame 4. Music and sound effects are played from the speakers. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to the game production are announced. (For example, the screen unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side is produced as more powerful, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player). The notification sound also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame 3, but the notification sound and the notification sound are completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. The volume from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with built-in sound source, which will be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume to set the volume low, the speaker and the door frame provided in the speaker box provided in the main body frame are provided. Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker is reduced, the volume is loud when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or when the player is cheating (maximum volume in this embodiment). The notification sound set to can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded by the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side will be produced as more powerful, or the game will shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are schedule data for sound generation that generates sound effects, and schedule data for electric drive sources that generate drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is composed of screen data that defines the screen configuration arranged in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in a time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP4160a of the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP4160a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the above, a track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data of electric drive sources such as a motor and a solenoid arranged in chronological order, and the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid is defined.

Some of the control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed, and some are copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later when the power is turned on. In some cases, what is done is read out and executed. Further, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when the power is turned on in the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later. In some cases, the copy is read out.

Further, the peripheral control ROM 4150b is used as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 to correct the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side according to the usage time of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness due to aging of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side is an LED type. , The date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side was first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 in 5% increments in a range from 100% to 70%. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, which is set, is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the brightness is increased. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side is turned on, the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the power is turned on from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is first turned on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, and the liquid crystal display device on the game board side. When the 1400 backlight is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted and turned on.

As shown in FIG. 70, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs and is to be backed up. It is stored in the management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cc and the backup second area 4150cc, and the peripheral control ROM 4150b, which exclusively store the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca. Various control program copy areas 4150cd that exclusively store copies of various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are copied. Various control data copy areas 4150ce that are exclusively stored, and backup unmanaged work area 4150cf that exclusively stores information that is not backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. Is provided.

When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), a value of 0 is forcibly written to the work area 4150 cf, which is not managed by backup, and the value is cleared to zero, while backup For the managed work area 4150ca, backup first area 4150cc, and backup second area 4150cc, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a power-on command from the main control board 4100 instructs the start of RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect. (For example, instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 66 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on) is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 4150ca is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, which will be described later. Bank0 (1fr) that exclusively stores 1fr) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt, which will be described later, occurs. It is composed of Bank0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 4150 cc to the backup second area 4150 cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” means that when the VDP4160a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the peripheral control MPU4150a Since a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the above can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU4150a, in other words, one frame (1 frame) each time the V-blank signal is input. Since the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning.) “(1ms)” is defined as “(1ms)” because the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. It is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 in the transmission data storage area 4150ca on the lamp drive board side. Is a storage area in which is set, and in the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 It is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and in the reception command storage area 4150cc, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received and the received various commands are stored. It is a storage area to be set, and various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM4165aa of RTC41654a described later) is set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and is set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set.

Bank 0 (1 ms) is provided with a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai, and the like. Has been done. In the transmission data storage area 4150 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 in the transmission data storage area 4150 cg on the motor drive board side. It is a storage area in which the motor drive data SM-DAT on the game board side is set, and in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, various types provided on the game board based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5. It is a storage area in which various information acquired such as the original position and movable position of the movable body is set, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai is dialed based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit. Various information acquired from the rotation (rotation direction) of the operation unit and the operation of the pressing operation unit (for example, the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit created based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit. This is a storage area in which history information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) are set.

Bank0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and Bank0 (1ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The transmission data storage area 4150 cg on the motor drive board side is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emitting data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral area is executed. When the control unit steady-state processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is placed in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The door-side emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. To. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, When the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the door-side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It has become.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf is opened to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is in the first and second areas of the transmission data storage area 4150 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is to proceed based on this.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Occasionally, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cg. It has become like.

Next, the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc, which exclusively store a copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cc and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs with two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The effect information (1 ms) is copied to the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac at high speed, and is stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). Is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. It is copied at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 4150cc, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are set as one pair, for a total of two pairs managed as one page. ing. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) match.

Further, in the backup second area 4150cc, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are set as one pair, so that a total of two pairs are managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150 kb has Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) as one pair, for a total of two pairs. It is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 4150cc has a total of two pairs, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms). This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cc and the backup second area 4150cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) in the peripheral control unit for each frame (1 frame). Each time a steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and are stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a normally used storage area. The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac makes a high-speed copy, but the programs that execute the high-speed copy by these peripheral control DMA controllers 4150ac are standardized. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

The peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are such that when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), the power on command from the main control board 4100 starts the RAM clear effect and each of them. When it is instructed to start the state effect (for example, it is instructed to start the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 66 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on). However, it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-mentioned point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cc, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are cleared to zero. Further, when the upper plate effect button 257 of the effect operation unit 220 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side. It has become. By operating the upper plate effect button 257 according to the screen of this setting mode, it is possible to clear each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, the history of the jackpot game state). , The contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d.

It should be noted that such settings are not based on the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 of the effect operation unit 220, but on the screen display related to the settings on the touch panel 246 and the input of the detection signal according to the contact state of the contact surface with respect to the screen display. May be done.

The backup management target work area 4150da is used for managing various information such as effect information (SRAM) (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of a jackpot game state and a special effect flag), which is various information that is continued over days. It is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information) as a backup target. Here, briefly explaining the name of Bank0 (SRAM), as described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 4150db to the backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. Since various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control SRAM 4150a is backed up in "(SRAM)", "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", and "Bank3" , And "Bank4", respectively (the effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc have two banks as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (RAM), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). In addition, it is copied to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 4150db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are set as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page, and the backup second area. 4150dc is an area for managing Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc.

Drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and sound control of music, sound effects, etc. played from the speakers housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speakers provided in the door frame. As shown in FIG. 69, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 to perform the operation incorporates a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in sound source"), and the liquid crystal on the game board side. VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Speaker) 4160a with built-in sound source that controls drawing of the display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. LCD and sound control ROM 4160b that stores various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data, and audio that transmits serialized music and sound effects as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. It includes a data transmission IC 4160c. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, as sprite data used for displaying screens and images described later, for example, ring-shaped image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and operation menu background image described later can be displayed. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, volume adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, volume adjustment icon described later. Volume setting icon used for display In addition to image data, etc., the position of each part on the back of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the player's perspective. Main body frame back image data used for displaying the main body frame back image, service mode screen display The service mode screen image data used for the above, the break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b also store the suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting that the pressing operation unit (operation unit) of the operation unit should be operated.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c is set to 4150 cae, and the screen data at the beginning of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae is set to the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various types of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After extracting from the control data copy area 4150ce and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP4160a, when the V blank signal described later is input, the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage, each time a V blank signal is input. The first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP4160a one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a transfers the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c to 4150cae, and set the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae to the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the periphery of the peripheral control unit 4150. After extracting from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the control RAM 4150c and outputting to the sound source built-in VDP4160a, when a V blank signal is input, the head is headed according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series into the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage, and a V blank signal is input. Each time, the first sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP4160a one by one.

In addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP4160a receives screen data from the peripheral control MPU4150a, and based on the input screen data, the game board side character data and the upper plate side from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b. It also has a built-in VRAM for extracting character data, creating sprite data, and generating drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (one frame). Hereinafter, it is referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP4160a outputs the image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. By outputting the image data from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 are synchronized. Further, the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source receives a detection signal according to the contact state of the contact surface of the touch panel 246, and when the detection signal is received, outputs the detection signal to the peripheral control MPU4150a so that the effect control program can perform the contact surface of the touch panel 246. It is possible to grasp the contact state of. In this way, when the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 to the sound source built-in VDP4160a, the sound source built-in VDP4160a becomes Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, sprite data is created, and one screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (1). The drawing data for the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, and the upper plate The image data for the side liquid crystal display device 244 is output from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" is the built-in VRAM containing the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 244 on the precision plate side. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side, and outputs image data for the liquid crystal display device 244 on the upper plate side from the channel CH2. When output to the dish-side liquid crystal display device 244, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 244 on the upper plate side is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU4150a is configured to execute the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Further, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly.

The sound source built-in VDP4160a employs a frame buffer method. In this "frame buffer method", drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method of outputting the drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244.

Further, when the above-mentioned sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU4150a based on the command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP4160a has music stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. An output channel is set, and music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 3 are serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as audio data.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP4160a include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without being completely dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the upper plate effect button 257 of the effect operation unit 220 to shift to the setting mode described later.

However, regarding such sound settings, instead of operating the upper plate effect button 257 of the effect operation unit 220, the screen display related to the setting on the touch panel 246 and the input of the detection signal according to the contact state of the contact surface with respect to the screen display are used. It may be done based on.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP4160a include a plurality of multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP4160a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined to obtain the volume of the combined effect sound. Actually, the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speaker provided in the door frame 3 are amplified, and the amplified production sound is serialized to be audio data as audio data. It is designed to output to the transmission IC 4160c.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized production sound is the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value and accommodated in the speaker box provided in the main body frame. The volume flowing from the speaker and the speaker provided on the door frame is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks. The knob portion of the set volume adjustment volume 4140a is combined with the substrate volume adjusted by rotation operation, and the volume of the combined effect sound is actually housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame. Amplifies to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker and the speaker provided on the door frame, serializes this amplified production sound and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c, and uses it for the notification sound. The sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track and the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used are completely adjusted. The maximum volume, which is not dependent on the sound, is combined, and the volume of the combined notification sound is actually the master volume that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. The value is amplified, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, the hall clerk commits a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. To briefly explain the control to play the notification sound to notify the user, etc., first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated is used. , The sub-volume value set for the mute, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value for which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of this combined production sound. And the volume of the notification sound are actually amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, and the amplified production sound and notification sound are amplified. Is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, only the maximum volume notification sound flows. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, but the production sound proceeds according to the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. doing. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after this predetermined period elapses, The volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute up to now is adjusted by rotating the knob part of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. It is set (at this time, if it is adjusted by operating the dial operation unit or the pressing operation unit of the operation unit to shift to the setting mode, it is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound). The sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 is caused in the hall. When the notification sound is played to notify the clerk, etc., the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is played from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame. Since the production sound is proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data, when the notification sound stops flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame after a predetermined period of time has passed. , The production sound does not start to flow again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but starts to flow again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow and progresses according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period elapses.

The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b includes game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, and upper plate side character data for drawing in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. , Are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

When the serialized audio data from the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right side audio data as positive signal and negative signal to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board as differential serial data with a positive signal and a negative signal. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects can be reproduced in stereo from the speakers housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speakers provided in the door frame.

The audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data as serial data of the difference method between the left and right sides of the board extending from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, so that, for example, a positive signal of the left side audio data can be obtained. Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are combined on the frame decoration drive amplifier board to make one left audio data, they are mutually Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

As shown in FIG. 69, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC4165a. The RTC4165a has a built-in RAM4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM4165aa"). The RTC4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in the present embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. That is, the RTC4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information as the peripheral control MPU4150a. The effect based on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be developed. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 244 on the upper plate side, or on New Year's Day, a New Year countdown is performed. The screen to be executed may be unfolded by the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 244 on the upper plate side. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa stores and holds the LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side is of the LED type. There is. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. .. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side, in 5% increments in a range of 100% to 70%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the panel side and the liquid crystal display device 244 on the upper plate side is included.

Further, in addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa also stores the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information as the date and hour, minute and second information first stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. The input date and time information is also stored.

When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the precision plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU4150a can be turned on / off or only turned on. It is designed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the manufacturing line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side, the year when the input date and time information was input on the manufacturing line as the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side was first turned on It is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

As described above, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa has the brightness setting information and the input date and time information when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side is of the LED type. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big hit game state occurs at a low probability or a high probability).

Further, the brightness setting information and the like stored and stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 set at the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit or the pressing operation unit of the operation unit, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit or the pressing operation unit of the operation unit is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side, and the customer If you operate the dial operation unit or pressing operation unit of the operation unit during the period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the waiting state and the demonstration is being performed, the screen for performing the setting mode will be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display. It is designed to be displayed on the device 1400. By operating the upper plate effect button 257 of the effect operation unit 220 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side can be adjusted to the desired brightness. Can be done. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

However, regarding such brightness setting, instead of operating the upper plate effect button 257 of the effect operation unit 220, the screen display related to the setting on the touch panel 246 and the input of the detection signal according to the contact state of the contact surface with respect to the screen display are used. It may be done based on.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU4150a executes the above-mentioned luminance correction program, and when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is an LED type, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is installed. The decrease in brightness due to the aging of the display device 1400 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU4150a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is first turned on, and specifies the date and time as calendar information and time. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information that specifies the minutes and seconds, and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for the purpose and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side which is currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side was first turned on and the current date and time, and from the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side was first turned on. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side is turned on, this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for the above. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is added by 10% to 85%. The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so as to be the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. The current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition process of the control unit power-on processing, and the time The current time information set in the information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

As described above, the volume adjustment volume adjusts the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame by rotating the knob portion. You can do it. As described above, the resistance value of the volume control volume is changed by rotating the knob, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak rotates the knob. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the position is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. Music from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame by controlling the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with built-in sound source) so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6. And sound effects are flowing.

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 and a game production (For example, the screen unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side is produced as more powerful, or there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player. The notification sound for (etc.) also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, but the notification sound and the notification sound are completely adjusted in volume based on the rotation operation of the knob. The mechanism is such that the sound flows independently of the sound, and the volume from mute to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume to set the volume low, the speaker and the door frame provided in the speaker box provided in the main body frame are provided. Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker is reduced, the volume is loud when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or when the player is cheating (maximum volume in this embodiment). The notification sound set to can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screens unfolded by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume, the dial operation portion and the pressing operation portion of the operation unit are operated. By operating it, you can shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit or the pressing operation unit of the operation unit is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side, and the customer If you operate the dial operation unit or pressing operation unit of the operation unit during the period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the waiting state and the demonstration is being performed, the screen for performing the setting mode will be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display. It is designed to be displayed on the device 1400. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit according to the screen of this setting mode. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150akZ converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is used. The value of the board volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit or the pressing operation unit of the operation unit. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP4160a. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume, and the volume is adjusted according to the operation of the dial operation portion or the pressing operation portion of the operation unit. There are two methods, one is to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value. Since the volume control volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, it is necessary to make sure that the main body frame is open from the outer frame. Then, it is the clerk in the hall who can rotate the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and it may be difficult to hear the music or sound effect, or the player may feel loud and the music or sound effect may be noisy. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit are operated within a predetermined time, and the pachinko machine 1 is in a waiting state for a customer to be demonstrated by the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side. If the dial operation unit or pressing operation unit of the operation unit is operated within the period, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side, and the operation unit is displayed according to the screen of this setting mode. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to the desired volume. Therefore, if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effects, the dial of the operation unit You can increase the volume to the desired level by operating the operation unit or pressing operation unit, and if you feel the volume adjusted by the hall clerk is loud and the music or sound effects are noisy, you can use the dial operation unit of the operation unit or The pressing operation unit can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined time, is waiting for a customer, and the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and playing the game is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume. As a result, if the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the volume adjusted is low and it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, he / she will be seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation part and the pressing operation part of the operation unit to increase the volume to a desired level, and the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time. If you feel the volume adjusted by is loud and the music or sound effects are noisy, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game operates the dial operation part or the pressing operation part of the operation unit. It can be reduced to the desired volume.

Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74. FIG. 71 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 72 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. Is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. 72, and FIG. 74 is a table showing an example of various commands received by the main control board from the payout control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, is described, then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board are described, and the main control board receives the command. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

When the detection signals from the general winning port switch 3020 start port switch 3022 and various winning switches such as the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 66 are input to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, these detection signals are used. Based on this, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 to drive the payout motor of the pachinko machine 1 (prize ball device 740) to pay out the game balls as rental balls, which are storage trays. When the device is electrically connected (such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 71 (a), transmission is performed from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. Commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands to be executed. One prize ball is specified by command 10H, and two prize balls are specified by command 11H. In command 1EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor to pay out the game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 and the ball lending machine are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall) and the pachinko machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko game machine is referred to as "" As shown in FIG. 71 (b), commands 20H to 2EH are prepared for prize ball commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110, and the command 20H gives a prize. One ball is specified, two prize balls are specified by command 21H, ..., 15 prize balls are specified by command 2EH. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 71 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and a self-check is specified in this command 30H. After the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input when the ACK signal to be output as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the status indicating the type of the command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and It is composed of a mode showing a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the various commands are related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the jackpot, the power on, the normal electric role effect, the notification display, and the state. It is divided into display and others.

The special drawing 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the start port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 66, and the classification is as shown in FIG. 72, and the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. (1) The special symbol display 1185 is composed of commands named special symbol 1 synchronized effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special symbol 1 synchronized effect end, and change state designation. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command specifies the loss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The special figure 1 synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the special figure 1 synchronization effect, and the variable time state designation command indicates the probability and the time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 1 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the switch of the second starting port, and as shown in FIG. 72, the second special symbol of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. It is composed of commands related to the display 1186, which are named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned "B * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command specifies the loss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect indicates the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 2 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

As shown in FIG. 72, the categories related to jackpots include jackpot opening, jackpot 1 open Nth display, jackpot 1 closed display, jackpot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, and jackpot opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned "C * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command indicates the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is the start during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (the Nth round of the jackpot 2003). (Opening or opening start) is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 closing display command indicates the opening during closing of the large winning opening 1 between rounds (closing or closing start between rounds of the large winning opening 2003). The command for displaying the 1-count display of the large winning opening has counted 0 to 10 counts (the number of game balls entered into the large winning opening 2003 detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 66). The jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command instructs the jackpot symbol information display.

In addition, the small hit opening command indicates the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command starts during the small hit opening (at the time of the small hit, the large winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 is open or open. The small hit count display command indicates (start), and the small hit count display command is used when the small hit medium / large winning opening winning effect (during the small hit, the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2003 is detected by the count switch 2110). (Direction) is instructed, and the small hit ending command is instructed to start the small hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (large attacker unit 2000). It is sent when the Nth round of the winning opening 2003 is opened), and the big winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the big winning opening 1 is closed (the closing of the big winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 starts), and the big winning opening 1 is closed. The mouth 1 count display command is a count switch when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the large winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 is opened and the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2003 is a count switch. (When detected by 2110), the jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is transmitted when the jackpot symbol is opened (when the jackpot 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 is opened). To.

Further, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small hit (at the time of opening the large winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 at the time of the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium / large winning opening (when the game ball entered into the large winning opening 2003 is detected by the count switch 2110 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is It is sent at the start of the small hit ending. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

As shown in FIG. 72, the power-on category is composed of various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned a status of "D * H" and a mode of "** H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated at the time of turning on the power shown in FIG. 67. It is something to instruct).

The power-on command is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board is powered on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the power is restored from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. It is executed and the power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing.

The normal-figure tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 66, and the classification is based on the normal-figure tuning related to the normal symbol display of the function display board as shown in FIG. 72. It consists of commands named start of production, designation of normal symbol, end of synchronization of normal design, and designation of state at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned "E * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal figure synchronization effect start command is for instructing the start of the normal figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the normal symbol designation command is for designating the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the variable time state designation command indicates the probability and the time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the normal symbol synchronization effect end command is transmitted. , Ordinary symbol is transmitted when the fluctuation time elapses (when the ordinary symbol is confirmed), and the change state specification command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

The normal electric service production-related is related to the movable piece 2005b which is opened and closed by the drive of the start port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 66, and as shown in FIG. It consists of a command named display and ending per solenoid. These various commands are assigned "F * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The opening command per normal figure indicates the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open display command of the normal power indicates the start during the opening of the normal power (the movable piece is expanded by the drive of the start port solenoid). Therefore, the ending command for the solenoid is instructing the start of the ending for the solenoid.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open power display command is when the movable piece is expanded by driving the start port solenoid. ), And the ending command per normal figure is sent at the start of the ending per normal figure. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

As shown in FIG. 73, the notification display category is composed of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. To these various commands, "6 * H" is assigned as the status and "** H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is used when a game ball enters the big winning opening 2003 other than during the big hit (when the condition device is operating) (even though it is not a big hit, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000). When the count switch 2110 detects it), the start of the winning abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical connection in the path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, it is instructed to start the connection abnormality notification, and the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command is, for example, the disconnection of the electrical connection between the main control board 4100 and the start port switch 3022, the count switch 2110, and the like. -Instructs to start disconnection / short-circuit error display when a short circuit occurs, and the magnetic detection switch error display command is a magnetic detection switch error notification when an error occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. Instructs the start of.

Further, in the door opening command, the door frame 3 is directed to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 72. When the door is in the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. This is to instruct the end of the door opening notification when the state is set. On the other hand, in the main body frame opening command, the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. The main body frame opening notification is instructed when the main body frame is opened, and the main body frame closing command is such that the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619. When it is in a state, it instructs the end of the main body frame opening notification.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 when the command is sent to, the disconnection / short-circuit error display command is sent to any of the start port switch 3022, count switch 2110, etc. Is transmitted, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame is closed with respect to the main body frame based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame opening command is transmitted when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619), and the main body frame is closed. The command is transmitted when the closing of the main body frame is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

As shown in FIG. 73, the status display division is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to an error clearing command), and frame status 2 command. There is. To these various commands, "7 * H" is assigned as the status and "** H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, respectively, and detailed description thereof will be described later. .. When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it outputs "7 * H" as shown in FIG. 73. Along with setting it as a status, the received command is set as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU4100a adds "7 * H" which is additional information to these received commands. Formats the command into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when the error release navigation is performed, the error release navigation command is sent when the error release navigation is performed, and the frame state 2 command is sent when the power is restored. , And when the frame state changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

As shown in FIG. 73, the test-related division is composed of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8 * H" and a mode of "** H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. , Which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame shown in FIG. 69). It inspects various boards such as the decorative drive amplifier board 194).

The test command is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board is turned on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the power is restored from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. It is executed and the test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing.

In other categories, as shown in FIG. 73, start opening winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and Special symbol 2 Consists of a command named memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command is for instructing the start of the starting opening winning effect, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 2001 or the second starting port 2005c based on the detection signal from the starting port switch 3022. The start of the production and the start of the production are instructed, respectively, the fluctuation shortening operation end specification command instructs the state transition from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation shortening non-operation state, and the high probability end designation command is high. It instructs the state transition from the probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbol 1 hold (the game ball enters the first starting port 2001 and the function display board. The first special symbol display conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the special symbol 2 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbol 2 hold (second start). A game ball enters the mouth 2005c and the second special symbol display on the function display board conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol. The normal symbol memory command is , Ordinary symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (the number of balls (holding number) that the game ball has passed through the normal gate 2005a and has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display board) The special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command is based on the special symbol 1 hold by pre-reading before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display board. This is to instruct the start of the look-ahead effect that notifies the notice of the display result by the first special symbol display, and the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command is special for the second special symbol display of the function display board to hold the special symbol 2. Before it is used for the variable display of the symbol, it is instructed to start the pre-reading effect of pre-reading and notifying the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display based on the special symbol 2 hold.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start port winning command is used when the start port is won (when the game ball enters the first start port 2001 based on the detection signal from the first start port switch, or when the second start is started. When the game ball enters the second starting port 2005c based on the detection signal from the mouth switch), the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame mainly produce the sound. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is sent to notify the effect, and is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed). , The special symbol 1 storage command is sent at the end of the stop period (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed) after the fluctuation is confirmed after the high probability number of times is exhausted in the case of "high probability N times", and the special symbol 1 operation pending ball number change. When (the game ball enters the first start port 2001 and there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display board, the second start port 2005c It is sent when the game ball enters and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol on the second special symbol display and the number of holdings decreases). The 2 memory command is not yet used to display the change of the special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display board when the number of balls on hold for the special symbol 2 is changed (the game ball enters the second starting port 2005c). When there is a hold number, when a game ball enters the second start port 2005c and the hold number increases, or when the hold number is used to display the change of the special symbol on the second special symbol display. It is sent when the number of holdings decreases), and the normal symbol memory command is sent when the number of holding balls for normal symbol 1 operation changes (when the game ball passes through the normal gate 2005a and the normal symbol display on the function display board changes the normal symbol. When there is a hold number that has not been used yet in the display, when the game ball passes through the normal gate 2005a and the hold number increases, or when the hold number increases, it is used for the normal symbol display to change the normal symbol. When the number of reserved balls decreases), the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 operation increases (when a game ball enters the first starting port 2001 and the number of reserved balls increases). ), And the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 operation hold balls increases (when a game ball enters the second starting port 2005c and the hold number increases). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the start opening winning command is transmitted mainly by voice from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame at the time of starting opening winning. However, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 69 uses the start port winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to notifying by voice from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, it is also used for monitoring the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. It is the one of the specification. On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening winning command, and the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame emit voice. Some specifications do not notify.

Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 74, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 4110 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, frame state 1, error release navigation, and The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command) includes out-of-ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, connection abnormality and CR not connected, and bit 0 (B0, "B") when the ball is out. Indicates a bit.) Is set to a value 1, bit 1 (B1) is set to a value 1 when the tank is full, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value 1 in stock of 50 or more, and a connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command are set to have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

The error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command) includes a ball, a count switch error, and a retry error. For a ball, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value of 1, and for a count switch error. A value of 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value of 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) in a retry error. Here, the "counting switch error" indicates whether or not the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 67 is defective. The "retry error" indicates that the inconsistent game ball is repeatedly paid out by the retry operation. Bits (B0), bits (B1), and bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, and a value of 1 for B6. And the value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared during ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bits 1 (B1) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and so on. The value 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, the frame state change, and the error release navigation, and the error release navigation command is transmitted at the time of error release navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later.

Next, an example of the control process executed on the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 87. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the starting opening winning process. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during fluctuation.

Further, FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game start process. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start process. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game process. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game process. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100. FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing a table configuration in the special symbol random number storage means.

In the main process, as shown in FIG. 75, when the supply of electric power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU4100a executes the power-on process (step S1). In this power-on processing, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a) is normal (whether it is the set value at the time of power failure), and if it is normal. For example, according to the backup data stored in the RAM, the process of returning to the state at the time of power failure (processing at the time of power recovery) is executed, and if the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the device settings around the CPU (normal initial settings) , Set interrupt timing, etc.).

If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM as backup data. If the RAM clear switch instructing to clear the backup data stored in the RAM is turned on in the power-on processing, the RAM is cleared and the normal initial setting is performed. Further, in the power-on processing, if the backup data is not saved in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a), the RAM is cleared and the normal initial setting is performed.

Further, in the power-on processing, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been started to the peripheral control board 4140 when the normal initial setting is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 4140 that the main control board 4100 has started. Even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again supplied. When the supply is started, the power-on processing is executed.

When the power-on processing is completed, the main control MPU4100a starts a loop processing for repeatedly executing each processing for the game. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate at different power supply voltages, after converting the power supply voltage supplied to the pachinko machine 1 from the external power supply to a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, each of them Supplying to the device. Then, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure warning signal indicating that the power supply voltage supply from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped is output. Will be sent. Then, when the power failure warning signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, the power failure occurrence processing is executed (step S4).

In this power failure processing, when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the gaming machine is in the state before the power failure. This is a process of storing the state at the time of power failure in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) as backup data in order to start from. The details of the processing will be described later, but in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing when a power failure occurs is not an interrupt processing but a branch processing executed immediately after the start of the loop according to the presence or absence of detection of a power failure warning signal. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power source is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step). S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the power outage occurrence process is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. The main control MPU4100a first sets the interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether the contents of the RAM before the power failure are retained at the time of power recovery.

Subsequently, the main control MPU4100a sets a default value indicating that the power failure occurrence processing has been performed in the backup flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM (step S4c). After completing the above processing, the main control MPU4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d), enters an infinite loop, and prepares for stopping the power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power outage or the like (hereinafter referred to as "instantaneous power failure"), the process when a power failure occurs is actually started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that the above process cannot recover from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watch dock timer, and is configured to be reset if the watch dock timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watch dock timer is updated periodically while the processing is normally performed, but the processing is started when a power failure occurs and the update is not performed. As a result, even if the process when the power is cut off occurs due to the momentary power failure and the infinite loop is entered, the reset is performed after a predetermined period of time elapses, and the main control MPU 4100a is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

Next, in the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during the execution of the main process. As shown in FIG. 77, the timer interrupt process is mainly executed. The control MPU4100a executes the processing of steps S11 to S18 after executing the register save processing (step S10). In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-mentioned switch (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated by the random number update process 1 and the random number updated by the random number update process 2 described above are different. The random number will be described later, but the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may also be updated in the random number update process 1. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command for instructing the payout of the game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

Further, in the normal control process of step S14, the normal symbol is changed based on the progress state of the game, and the normal electric accessory (movable piece 2005b) is controlled to change the open / closed state of the second starting port 2005c. To execute. In the special control process of step S15, the first special symbol (first identification symbol) and the second special symbol (second identification symbol) are variablely displayed on the special symbol indicators 641 and 642 based on the progress state of the game. A special electric accessory (that is, an opening / closing member 2006 that opens / closes the large winning opening 2003 by an attacker solenoid) is controlled, and a process of changing the opening / closing state of the large winning opening 2003 is executed.

In the output data setting process of the following step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating the game state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer, etc.) and a drive signal being output to a special figure start storage display (not shown) Execute processing, etc. In the command transmission process in step S17, a process of transmitting an effect command to the peripheral control board 4140 is executed. Further, in the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control board 4140 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the processing of steps S11 to S17 is executed, the register restoration processing (step S18) is executed, and the processing ends.

Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the above-mentioned random number update process 1 (step S12) and random number update process 2 (step S3) will be described. In this embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, a random number for big hit determination used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state (also called a big hit determination or a big hit lottery), and a big hit game state in the big hit determination are used. Random numbers for jackpot symbols used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol (the symbol associated with the type of jackpot (probability variation jackpot, number of rounds, etc.)) when it is determined to generate, in the jackpot lottery Reach judgment random number used for judgment (reach judgment) as to whether or not to perform high expectation production such as reach production when it is judged that it is neither a big hit nor a small hit (loss), special symbol display 641, The variable display pattern random number (random number for variable time) used to determine the variable display pattern (variable time, etc.) of the special symbol displayed on 642, and the movable piece that opens and closes the second starting port 2005c are controlled to the open state. There are random numbers for normal hit judgment, etc. used for judgment of whether or not to do (normal lottery hit judgment).

Further, as will be described later, the random number for determining the jackpot according to this embodiment is also used for determining whether or not the specific condition performed when it is determined that the jackpot has been lost is satisfied. Will be done. In addition, the random number for the jackpot symbol is the type of jackpot that is performed when it is determined that the jackpot has been won (whether or not to activate the probability fluctuation function or the time saving function, and the jackpot in the jackpot game (special bonus game). It is also used to determine the type of jackpot for which the opening mode of 2003 is determined.

Of these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number related to the occurrence of the big hit game state, the big hit symbol random number, and the normal symbol hit determination random number related to whether or not the movable piece 2005b is controlled to the open state. Update. That is, the random numbers used for the occurrence of the big hit game state and the determination as to whether or not the movable piece 2005b is controlled to the open state are updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability of each random number in a predetermined period (probability of determining that a big hit gaming state is generated, probability of determining that a movable piece is controlled in an open state) can be made constant, and the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the big hit game state is generated, the reach determination random number not related to the normal lottery, the variable display pattern random number, and the like are updated.

Next, the special control process will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process.

In this special control process, first, the first and second starting port winning processes (step S110) are performed. In the first and second starting port winning processes, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 2001 and the second starting port 2005c. Then, after the first and second start port winning processes (step S110) are performed, the process according to the state of the process flag is selectively selected from the plurality of processes (steps S120 to S230) shown in the figure. Will be done.

More specifically, when the first and second start opening winning processes (step S110) are completed, it is first determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120), and if the processing flag is 0 (step S120). YES) in step S120) and the fluctuation start process (step S130) are executed. In this fluctuation start processing (step S130), the processing flag is updated to "1" after the setting for starting the fluctuation display of the special symbol is made based on the result of the big hit lottery.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern (either the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display) of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is used. After the variation time from the start of the variation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) to the stop display is determined in, the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). As a result, if the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the variable processing (step S180) is executed. In this variable processing, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and based on the time-out, the special symbol in the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is displayed. Stop the fluctuation display. After that, when it is determined in the fluctuation start process (step S130) that the big hit has been won, the process selection flag is updated to "3". On the other hand, the processing selection flag is updated to "4" when it is determined that a specific condition is satisfied (a small hit is won) even though the big hit is lost. However, when the big hit is lost and the specific condition is not satisfied (pure loss), the processing selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing (step S130) is restarted.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S170), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S190). As a result, if the processing flag is 3 (YES in step S190), the jackpot game start processing (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, the type of jackpot is determined, and after the opening mode (number of rounds, opening time, winning limit number of game balls, etc.) in the jackpot 2003 according to the type is set, the processing flag is set. Updated to "5". On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S190), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). As a result, if the processing flag is 4 (YES in step S210), the small hit game start processing (step S220) is executed. In this small hit game start process, after the opening mode (opening number of times and opening time for controlling the opening operation of the opening / closing member 2006) in the large winning opening 2003 according to the small hit is set, the processing flag is set to "6". Is updated to.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 5 (step S230). As a result, if the processing flag is 5 (YES in step S230), the jackpot game processing (step S240) is executed. In this big hit game process, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is controlled based on the opening mode in the big winning opening 2003 set in the big hit game start process (step S200). Further, when the big hit game is completed, the processing flag is updated to "0" after the determination as to whether or not to activate the probability fluctuation function or the time saving function is performed. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing (step S130) is restarted.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 5 (NO in step S230), the processing flag is assumed to be 6, and the small hit game processing (step S250) is executed. In this small hit game process (step S250), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is controlled based on the opening mode in the large winning opening 2003 set in the small hit game start process (step S220). Further, when the small hit game process is completed, the processing flag is updated to "0", that is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the variation start process (step S130) is restarted.

As described above, when any of the processes of step S130, step S150, step S180, step S200, step S220, step S240, and step S250 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag, the special control process is performed. Is terminated.

Next, the first and second starting port winning processes (processes in step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the first and second starting port winning processes.

In the first and second starting port winning processes (step S110), the processing related to determining whether or not the game ball has been won in the first starting port 2001 and the second starting port 2005c and the winning process are largely performed. On the condition that it is determined that there was a problem, the process for updating the pending state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is performed.

Therefore, the main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second starting port sensor (switch), it is determined that the game ball has won the second starting port 2005c (YES in step S201). Next, the process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second big hit lottery (random numbers for big hit determination, random numbers for big hit symbols, etc.) are acquired, and the second hold provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a). Judgment is made as to whether or not the value of the number counter is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold count counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, first, as the second start hold storage process (step S203), the main control MPU4100a has various data (random numbers for jackpot determination, for jackpot symbols) acquired by winning a prize in the second start port 2005c. Random numbers, etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of holding. Next, as the hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM.

In the process of step 203, a winning notification command indicating that the game ball has won the second starting port 2005c (more accurately, the type of special symbol, the holding order, etc.) is set, and thus The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, through the control by the peripheral control board 4140, when the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like displays the hold display on the second starting port 2005c side, it can be quickly updated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S201 that the detection signal from the second start port sensor is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second hold count counter becomes the upper limit value 4 When it is determined that the above is true, then, as the process of step S205, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the first start port sensor. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the first starting port sensor, it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 2001 (YES in step S205), and then The process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first big hit lottery (random numbers for big hit determination, random numbers for big hit symbols, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit. Judgment is made as to whether or not the value is less than 4. As a result, if the first hold count counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, first, as the first start hold storage process (step S207), the main control MPU4100a has various data (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbol) acquired by winning a prize in the first start port 2001. Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the type of special symbol and the holding order. Next, as the hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM.

In the process of step 207 as well, a winning notification command indicating that the game ball has won the first starting port 2001 (more accurately, the type of special symbol, the holding order, etc.) is set, and thus The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, through control by the peripheral control board 4140, it is possible to quickly update the case where the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like displays the hold display on the first start port 2001 side.

On the other hand, in the process of step S205, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the first starting port 2001, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first hold number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the number has reached 4, the first and second starting port winning processes are terminated at this point.

In this embodiment, after the winning process for the second starting port 2005c (steps S201 to S204) is executed, the winning process for the first starting port 2001 (steps S205 to step S208) is executed. There is. However, instead of this, there may be a mode in which the winning process for the first starting port 2001 is executed and then the winning process for the second starting port 2005c is executed.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a may execute advance determination processing based on various acquired random numbers, and further transmit a command indicating the result of advance determination processing to the peripheral control board 4140 as a winning notification command. The advance determination process is performed prior to the lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, the big hit lottery, the probability variation lottery, the small hit lottery, and the determination of the variable display pattern described later), and the lottery result is determined in advance. It is a process to judge. The advance determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the advance determination table. The advance determination table is the same table as the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the advance judgment process, the random number is compared with the advance judgment table, and the lottery result when the lottery is performed using the random number (big hit or small hit, type of big hit, variable display pattern, etc.) ) Is determined (the determination made prior to the lottery in this way is also called "look-ahead determination"). The peripheral control board 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received prize notification command (preceding determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect is "look-ahead". Also called "directing").

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the preceding determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the contents of the prior determination table may be different from the contents of the table used for the lottery.

Further, the main control MPU4100a transmits a winning notification command indicating the result of the advance determination process only when the gaming state satisfies a specific condition, and when the specific condition is not satisfied, the advance determination process is performed. You may send a winning notification command that does not represent the result. For example, when the variable display due to the winning of the first starting port 2001 is not started immediately after winning and is held, the main control MPU4100a issues a winning notification command indicating the result of the advance determination processing regarding the winning. You may send it. Here, in the jackpot game state and the time-saving game state, the main control MPU4100a does not send a prize notification command indicating the result of the advance determination process, but transmits a prize notification command that does not indicate the result of the advance determination process. You may. Specific conditions for the second starting port 2005c may be similar.

In the fluctuation start processing (step S130) executed when the processing flag is “0”, the main control MPU4100a first sets the values of the two hold count counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 641 and 642 (first start storage). It is determined whether or not both the number and the second start storage number) are “0” (step S301). Here, the values in the two hold number counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 641 and 642 are the storage areas related to the first start storage and the second start storage (random number storage means 4515, 4532 for special symbols (see FIG. 87). ) Is shown, respectively. Therefore, if the values of the hold number counters are all “0” in step S301, the first jackpot lottery and the second jackpot lottery are related. It is determined that none of the start conditions are satisfied, and then, as the process of step S318, the variation start process ends when the process flag is updated to "1".

On the other hand, if neither the first start memory number nor the second start memory number is "0" (NO in step S301), the special symbol is used to update the order of executing the jackpot lottery that is in the pending state. The shift processing in the random number storage means 4515 and 4532 is performed (steps S302 to S310).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 is provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [4] 4515d). These storage areas are associated with the values of the first start storage numbers (“1” to “4”), respectively. Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 is also provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [4] 4532d). These storage areas are associated with the values of the second start storage numbers (“1” to “4”), respectively. In each storage area 4515a to 4515d and 4532a to 4532d, a big hit judgment random number storage area 4580 in which a big hit judgment random number is stored, a big hit symbol random number, a reach judgment random number, a variation display pattern random number, and the like are stored. A random number storage area 4581 for a jackpot symbol is provided.

That is, the main control MPU4100a appropriately manipulates the random numbers stored in the storage means 4515 and 4532 as shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area when the special symbol fluctuates. However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the big hit is won in the lottery process on the first special symbol side and the case where the big hit is won in the lottery process on the second special symbol side. Although there is no difference in the expected value of the profit (the number of prize balls that can be obtained, etc.) given to the player, in the lottery process on the first special symbol side, it is a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device. In contrast to the case where a prize is won, in the lottery process on the second special symbol side, the probability of winning a small hit is "0%", so that only the lottery process on the second special symbol side is executed. As long as it is done, the small hit game state is not generated.

In this regard, in the shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, the execution of the lottery of the first special symbol is always postponed, and the hit (small hit) without the operation of the condition device is not won. (Ii) The random numbers stored in the storage means 4515 and 4532 are manipulated so that all the lottery based on the winning of the starting port 2005c (the lottery of the second special symbol) is digested first. As a result, until the number of holdings for the lottery on the second special symbol side is interrupted and becomes "0", only the games (lottery on the second special symbol side) under the above-mentioned small hits are sequentially performed. Will be able to. Further, as will be described later, in the gaming state in which the so-called time saving function is activated, the lottery (variation) is performed so that the holding state of the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, which is the side to be digested first, is not interrupted. Since control is performed to increase the frequency of changing the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2005c, which triggers the execution of the second special symbol, only the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side is continuously executed. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small hit.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 87, in the shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, as the processing of step S302, the second special symbol that is preferentially digested. Whether or not the value of the hold number counter (second start storage number) corresponding to the display 642 is "0", that is, the random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532. Determine if it is not. As a result, when it is determined that the random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 (NO in step S302), the second from the storage area [1] 4532a. A random number related to the special symbol is read out and acquired (step S303). That is, as will be described later, the random numbers read in this way (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbol, random numbers for reach determination, random number of variation display pattern) are not only processed for the lottery of jackpot, but also the variation pattern (variation) of the special symbol. A game to the second start port 2005c by being subjected to a process for setting the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2006, a process for setting the gaming state, etc. The second starting game can be advanced with the winning of the ball.

Next, the main control MPU4100a has each storage area (storage area [2] 4532b to storage area] of the nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) in order to update the digestion order related to the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side. [4] Various random numbers stored in 4532d) are shifted to the n-1st storage area (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [3] 4532c), respectively (step S304). As a result, at least the storage area [4] 4532d becomes empty, and new start information (holding) for the second special symbol can be stored in the storage area [4] 4532d.

After that, the main control MPU4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "1" so that the game on the second special symbol side (second start game) is in progress (step S305). ). Further, in order to update the number of holdings related to the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side, the holding number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is subtracted by "1" (step S306). At this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp is performed so that the number of holds for the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side updated in this way is reflected in the lighting mode of the second special symbol storage display 644. Be told. The special symbol variation flag set to "1" in this way is reset after the variation start processing is completed, for example, when the processing flag is updated to "0".

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 87, when it is determined in the process of step S302 that no random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532. (YES in step S302), a random number related to the first special symbol is read out from the storage area [1] 4515a of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515, and this is acquired (step S307). That is, as will be described later, the random numbers read in this way are processed not only for the lottery for big hits, but also for the setting of the variation pattern of the special symbol, the processing for setting the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2006, and the setting of the gaming state. The first starting game can be advanced with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2001 by being subjected to the processing related to the above.

Next, the main control MPU4100a has each storage area (storage area [2] 4515b to storage area] of the nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) in order to update the digestion order related to the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side. [4] Various random numbers stored in 4515d) are shifted to the n-1st storage area (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [3] 4515c), respectively (step S308). As a result, at least the storage area [4] 4515d becomes empty, and new start information (holding) for the first special symbol can be stored in the storage area [4] 4515d.

After that, the main control MPU4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "2" so that the game on the first special symbol side (first starting game) is in progress (step S309). ). Further, in order to update the number of holdings related to the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side, the holding number counter corresponding to the first special symbol is subtracted by "1" (step S310). At this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp 643 is reflected in the lighting mode of the first special symbol storage display 643 so that the number of holds for the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side updated in this way is reflected in the lighting mode of the first special symbol storage display 643. Is done. Similarly, the special symbol variation flag set to "2" is reset after the variation start processing is completed, for example, when the processing flag is updated to "0".

After that, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation function is operating, that is, whether or not the probability fluctuation state is high (step S312), and if it is not in the probability fluctuation state (NO in step S312), when the probability fluctuation is not activated. Select the jackpot determination table, that is, the table in which the probability of becoming a jackpot is set low, while in the case of the probability fluctuation state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of the probability fluctuation operation, that is, the probability of becoming a jackpot is Select a table that is set high. In this example, the probability of a big hit is set to 1/400 when the probability fluctuation is not activated (that is, normal time), and the probability of a big hit is 10 when the probability fluctuation is activated (that is, when the probability is high). It is set to / 400.

After any table is selected in the process of step S313 or step S314, the big hit determination random number related to any special symbol acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307 based on the table is a big hit. It is determined whether or not the random number (big hit value) corresponds to (step S315 (big hit lottery)). Then, in the case of a jackpot value (YES in step S315), the type of jackpot is determined based on the random number for the jackpot symbol related to any of the special symbols also acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307. (Step S316). After that, the flag corresponding to the type of jackpot is set to the ON state (set) (step S317), and the process proceeds to step S318.

On the other hand, if the acquired random number is a loss that is not a big hit value (NO in step S315), it is determined whether or not the random number is a random number (small hit value) corresponding to a small hit (step S319). Then, if it is a small hit value (YES in step S319), the small hit flag is set to "ON" (step S320) assuming that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S318. However, if it is not a small hit value (NO in step S319), it is assumed that the predetermined specific condition is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S318 without going through step S320. In step S318, the processing flag is updated to "1", and the fluctuation start processing is terminated. In this example, the probability of a small hit is set to 3/400 regardless of the gaming state.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of whether the lottery is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the random number for the jackpot symbol is a random number generated in a random number range of 0 to 99, for example. Numerical values are prepared, and in the process of step S303 or step S307, one of these random number values is acquired as the value of the random number for the jackpot symbol. Then, the acquired random number value is subjected to the process of determining the type of jackpot in the process of step S316. For example, if the random number value is 0 to 52, it is determined as jackpot A. If it is 53 to 57, it is determined as a jackpot B, if it is 58 to 63, it is determined as a jackpot C, if it is 64 to 81, it is determined as a jackpot D, and if it is 82 to 99, it is determined as a jackpot E. ..

According to such a determination method, as shown in FIG. 88, the probability that the type of big hit (hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device) is determined as "big hit A" is "53%", and the type of big hit The probability that is determined to be "big hit B" is "5%", the probability that the jackpot type is determined to be "big hit C" is "6%", and the jackpot types are "big hit D" and "big hit". The probability of being determined as "E" is "18%" respectively.

Here, when "big hit A" is won, the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function (open) are performed after the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit A is performed regardless of the game state at the time of the corresponding selection. It is controlled to a probabilistic external advantageous gaming state in which both of the extension function) are activated. In the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit A, the opening and closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is performed as a long opening hit game in which the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated many times (16 times in this embodiment) in a long-time opening / closing pattern. The long-time opening / closing pattern means that a predetermined long time (for example, 26 seconds to 33 seconds) elapses after the opening / closing member 2006 is changed from the closed state to the open state, or a predetermined large number (for example, 10 pieces). This is a pattern in which the opening / closing member 2006 is returned to the closed state when any of the conditions that the game ball of No. 1 wins the grand prize opening 2003 is satisfied. In this long-time opening / closing pattern, the time for the opening / closing member 2006 to be in the open state is longer than the time for the opening / closing member 2006 to be in the open state in the short-time opening / closing pattern described later. That is, in the game per long opening, a large number of prize balls (about 1750 in the present embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege.

On the other hand, even when the "big hit B" is won, the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function (the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function after the big hit game according to the winning of the big hit B is performed regardless of the game state at the time of the corresponding selection ( It is controlled to a probabilistic external advantageous gaming state in which both of the opening extension function) are activated. However, in the big hit game according to the winning of the big hit B, the opening and closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is performed as a medium opening hit game in which the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated several times (9 times in this embodiment) in a long-time opening / closing pattern. .. That is, in the game per medium opening, a medium amount of prize balls (about 1000 in the present embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege.

On the other hand, when "Big hit C" is won, the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit C is performed only when the game state at the time of the corresponding selection is "external advantageous game state in which the time saving function is activated". After that, it is controlled to a probabilistic external advantageous gaming state in which both the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function (opening extension function) are activated. However, if the game state at the time of the corresponding selection is not the "external advantageous game state in which the time saving function is activated", the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function (opening extension) are performed after the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit C is performed. Of the functions), it is controlled to a high probability gaming state (probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state) in which only the probability fluctuation function is activated. In the big hit game according to the winning of the big hit C, the opening and closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is performed as the above-mentioned medium opening hit game in which the opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated several times (9 times in this embodiment) in a long-time opening / closing pattern.

On the other hand, when "Big hit D" is won, the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function (open) are performed after the big hit game according to the winning of the big hit D is performed regardless of the game state at the time of the corresponding selection. Of the extension function), it is controlled to a high probability gaming state (probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state) in which only the probability fluctuation function is activated. In the big hit game according to the winning of the big hit D, the opening and closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is performed as the above-mentioned medium opening hit game in which the opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated several times (9 times in this embodiment) in a long-time opening / closing pattern.

On the other hand, when the "big hit E" is won, the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function (opening extension) are performed after the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit E is performed regardless of the game state at the time of the corresponding selection. It is controlled to a normal gaming state (usually an external disadvantageous gaming state) in which none of the functions) is activated. In the big hit game according to the winning of the big hit E, the opening and closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is performed as the above-mentioned medium opening hit game in which the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated a medium number of times (9 times in this embodiment) in a long-time opening / closing pattern.

By the way, when a small hit (a hit without the operation of the condition device) is won against such a big hit A to E (a hit with the operation of the condition device), the opening / closing member 2006 is opened / closed for a short time. Only a small number of times (in this embodiment, two times) a small opening hit game (small hit game) is performed in the pattern, and the same game as before the small opening hit game (small hit game) is performed. The game state does not differ from the later. The small time opening / closing pattern is a game in which a predetermined small time (for example, 3 seconds to 6 seconds) elapses or a predetermined small number (for example, 2 pieces) is played after the opening / closing member 2006 is changed from the closed state to the open state. This is a pattern in which the opening / closing member 2006 is returned to the closed state when any of the conditions for winning the prize is satisfied in the large winning opening 2003. That is, in the small opening game (small hit game), since only a small amount of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege, the opening / closing member 2006 operates. However, it can be said that care must be taken in handling (positioning) in the game design in that the game interest may decline.

As described above, in the pachinko machine according to this embodiment, "big hit A" to "big hit E" are prepared as the types of hits (big hits) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. Therefore, to further elaborate the process of step S317, when the type of jackpot is "big hit A", the jackpot flag A is set to the ON state (set), and when it is "big hit B", the jackpot flag B is set to the ON state (set). ), Set the jackpot flag C to the ON state (set) when it is "Big hit C", set the jackpot flag D to the ON state (set) when it is "Big hit D", and set the jackpot flag E to the ON state (set) when it is "Big hit E". It will be in the ON state (set).

Next, the variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is set based on the result of the big hit lottery (step S315) will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process.

As shown in FIG. 81, in the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is “1”, the main control MPU4100a first sets the jackpot flag to “ON” as the process of step S401. Judge whether or not. As a result, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is "ON" (YES in step S401), the jackpot fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is performed so that the fluctuation pattern when the jackpot is won is set. (Step S402).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S401 that the big hit flag is not "ON", then, as the process of step S403, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is "ON". As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is "ON" (YES in step S403), it is considered that a specific condition is satisfied although it is a loss, and the small hit is won. In order to set the fluctuation pattern at the time, the small hit fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is performed (step S404).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S403 that the small hit flag is not "ON", the next step S405 is a high expectation effect (for example, reach effect) in which the expectation of winning the big hit is high. Determine if or not to do. In the process of step S405, for example, it is determined that the high expectation effect is performed when the reach determination random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 80) is a predetermined hit value, and the acquired reach is obtained. When the judgment random number is not a predetermined hit value, it is judged that the high expectation effect is not performed. Then, as a result, when it is determined that the high expectation effect should be performed (YES in step S405), the high expectation loss fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is performed so that the variation pattern when the high expectation effect is performed is set. (Step S406).

Regarding the number of predetermined hit values prepared for the reach determination random number, the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (both the probability change function and the time saving function are not activated) and the normal external advantageous gaming state (only the time saving function is activated). , The probabilistic external disadvantageous gaming state (only the probabilistic variation function is activated) and the probabilistic external advantageous gaming state (both the probabilistic variation function and the time saving function are activated) may be different for each gaming state. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the probability that it is determined that the high expectation effect should be performed based on the reach determination random number being a predetermined hit value is usually in the external disadvantageous gaming state. Although it is "1/12", in the normal external advantageous gaming state and the probabilistic external advantageous gaming state, the degree of expectation at the time of reach is further increased (or efficient hold digestion is performed). , It may be judged that the high expectation production should be performed with a lower probability. On the contrary, in the probabilistic external disadvantageous game state, it is judged that the high expectation production should be performed with a higher probability so that the possibility of a big hit can be made more frequently recognized. May be good.

On the other hand, in the process of step S405, if it is determined that the high expectation effect with high expectation of winning the big hit should not be performed (NO in step S405), the loss fluctuation pattern when the high expectation effect is not performed. In order to set (normal loss fluctuation pattern), the low expectation loss fluctuation pattern table setting process is performed (step S407).

Here, the tables set in the low-expected loss fluctuation pattern table setting process are prepared in a form in which they are associated with each of a plurality of gaming states. For example, in the normal gaming state, the number of holds is a predetermined value. When the above is the case, the shortening fluctuation is performed.

However, in the game state in which the time saving function is activated, the fluctuation time is set so that the number of holdings for the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side, in which the probability of winning a small hit is "0", is not interrupted. It is set. More specifically, when the number of holdings on the second special symbol side is less than or equal to a predetermined value, the shortening variation is not adopted even though the game state is in which the time saving function is activated, and the shortening variation is adopted in the normal gaming state. Only the fluctuation time having a length equal to or longer than the fluctuation time when not played (the fluctuation time longer than the shortened fluctuation in the normal gaming state) is selected. In addition, regarding the fluctuation time on the first special symbol side, the shortened fluctuation is not adopted regardless of the number of holdings, and only the fluctuation time having a length equal to or longer than the fluctuation time when the shortened fluctuation is not adopted in the normal gaming state. Is now selected. As a result, when the game is in a gaming state in which the time saving function is activated, the hold on the side of the first special symbol that can win the small hit is suppressed, and as a result, the small hit is applied to the pachinko machine 1. It will be possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that it is installed.

Then, as will be described later, as shown in FIG. 81, when the selection table related to the fluctuation pattern is set in any of the processes of step S402, step S404, step S406, and step S407, the main control MPU 4100a Next, as the process of step S410, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the set selection table. Next, as the process of step S411, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol thus determined is set as an effect command, and the winning information is based on the state of the big hit flag (step S317) and the small hit flag (step S320). Set a command (a command that indicates the winning type including the winning and small hits).

Further, the value of the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is set to ON (step S413). When this special symbol LED operation flag is set to ON, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is displayed based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. Fluctuation display related to the lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs as a device is started. After that, the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414), and the variation pattern setting process is completed.

By the way, the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 77 as an effect command set in the process of step S411. .. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the result of the big hit lottery is shown based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command through the control described later by the peripheral control board 4140 side. The display effect will be performed as follows.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (small hit) without the operation of the condition device, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is set as described above. Without ending within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, it is extended to the period after the fluctuation display of the lighting patterns of multiple LEDs as the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is stopped (effect time is extended). After (extension), it may be possible to execute so as to indicate that the hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device has been rejected (extension effect pattern of FIG. 97 (b)). That is, in this case, after the special symbol is stopped, when the small open hit game is executed, the display effect that encourages the acquisition of the prize ball does not appear, and it is relatively early after it is shown that the big hit is lost. It becomes possible to shift to the next fluctuation (holding digestion of a special symbol), and the extension that may give some expectation as an effect until the opening / closing member 2006 operates is also suitably avoided. Become.

Further, as will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is special in contrast to the above-mentioned display effect (extended loss effect) at the time of a small hit, which indicates that the big hit is lost after the special symbol is stopped. There is also a display effect (extended jackpot effect) that indicates that the jackpot was won after the symbol has stopped. That is, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not terminated within the fluctuation time of the above-set fluctuation pattern, and the first special After extending to the period after the stop of the fluctuation display related to the lighting pattern of multiple LEDs as the symbol display or the second special symbol display, the hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device was won. (Extension effect pattern of FIG. 97 (b)) so that it can be executed as shown in.

That is, in this case, the above-mentioned display effect at the time of a small hit is positioned as a mere loss effect (highly expected loss fluctuation pattern) that appears at the time of a big hit loss. As a result, it becomes difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and by extension, the opening / closing member 2006 operates according to the winning of the small hit. It becomes possible to suppress the decrease of.

However, as the function display unit of the pachinko machine 1, instead of the 7-segment LED, eight LED groups that do not form a specific symbol may be adopted. In this example, the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display composed of 7-segment LEDs are each composed of eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol storage display and the second special symbol storage display are each composed of four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol storage display is composed of two LEDs.

In addition to being able to achieve the same effects as above with this function display unit, the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display are composed of eight LED groups that do not make any symbols. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player as compared with the case of using the 7-segment LED having the meaning of the numerical symbols. Therefore, since it is difficult to understand the content displayed by the function display unit, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit from becoming anxious and difficult to concentrate on the game during the game, and the movement of the game ball and the movable effect can be suppressed. It is possible to make the game more enjoyable by focusing on the production images and the like.

When such a function display unit is adopted, the lighting mode of the plurality of LEDs (special symbols) at the time of winning the small hit (when the special symbol is stopped) is the plurality of LEDs (special) at the time of winning the big hit. It is desirable to control the lighting mode (when the special symbol is stopped) so that it appears as a mode similar to each other, such as whether or not one LED is lit. That is, in this case, when the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the stop of the special symbol, it is immediately (at least after the extension of the effect) which result is obtained even if the same symbol (plurality of LEDs) is viewed. It becomes difficult to grasp (until a short time elapses until the winning is clearly stated). Therefore, it becomes possible to concentrate on the extended display effect (extended effect), and the interest in the special symbol (plurality of LEDs) is diminished, so that the period is extended to the period after the special symbol is stopped. It becomes possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to recognize even the displayed display effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being presumed to have a small hit due to the peculiarity when the extended effect appears, and by extension, depending on the winning of the small hit. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the operation of the opening / closing member 2006.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of a big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a list diagram showing an example of a large hit fluctuation pattern table T1 in a normal time, a small hit fluctuation pattern table T2 in a normal time, and a highly expected loss fluctuation pattern table T3 in a normal time. In addition, ○ in the winning column of FIG. 89 means a big hit, △ means the establishment of a specific condition at the time of loss (small hit), and × means the failure of the specific condition at the time of loss (pure loss). means.

As described above, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON in the process of step S401 (see FIG. 81), the main control MPU4100a is elected as a jackpot as the process of step S402 (see FIG. 81). The jackpot fluctuation pattern table setting process is performed so that the fluctuation pattern at that time is set.

In this jackpot fluctuation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous game state (probability change function and time saving function are not activated), the normal external advantageous game state (only the time saving function is activated), and the probability change external disadvantageous game state (probability change function only). It is determined whether the game state is in the probabilistic external advantageous game state (probability change function and time saving function are both activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different jackpot fluctuation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each gaming state, and usually the external disadvantageous gaming state (probability change function and time saving function are not provided). When it is determined that the hit is in operation), the jackpot fluctuation pattern table T1 at the normal time shown in FIG. 89 is selected regardless of the type of jackpot.

Then, as described above, when the jackpot variation pattern table T1 at the normal time is selected, the main control MPU4100a is acquired by the process of step S303 (see FIG. 80) while referring to the selected table T1. Fluctuation display pattern The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random numbers (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display (LED) is also determined.

Here, assuming that, for example, values from "0" to "99" can be acquired as the variation display pattern random numbers of the special symbol, these values from "0" to "99" are used in the normal jackpot variation pattern table T1. Of these, 9 specific values are assigned to variation number 1 (variation time Ta1) (selection rate at the time of jackpot 9%), and 20 specific values are assigned to variation number 5 (variation time Tb1). (Selection rate at the time of big hit 20%), 30 specific values are assigned to fluctuation number 9 (variation time Tc1) (selection rate at the time of big hit 30%), and 40 specific values are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation number 12 (variation time Td1) (selection rate at the time of big hit 40%), and one specific value is assigned to the fluctuation number 15 (variation time Te) (selection rate at the time of big hit 1). %). In this way, except for the variable number 15 for which the jackpot is confirmed, the number of specific values (big hit values) to be allocated tends to increase as the variable number increases.

As will be described later, when the variation number 1 (variation time Ta1) is selected, it is shown that the jackpot was won with the effect content "a (or a')" appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the variation number 5 (variation time Tb1) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 has won the big hit with the effect content "b (or b')" appearing. Is performed, and when the variation number 9 (variation time Tc1) is selected, a big hit is won while the effect content "c (or c')" appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the display effect indicating that the display is performed and the variation number 12 (variation time Td1) is selected, a big hit is made when the effect content "d (or d')" appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. A display effect indicating that the product was won was performed, and when the variation number 15 (variation time Te1) was selected, the jackpot was won with the effect content "e" appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Is displayed. By the way, the production content a, the production content a', the production content b, the production content b', the production content c, the production content c', the production content d, the production content d', and the production content e are all on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The types of display effects that appear (for example, the types of reach effects and the types of story effects) are different.

Further, as will be described later, as for the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Tb1 is longer than the fluctuation time Ta1, the fluctuation time Tc1 is longer than the fluctuation time Tb1, and the fluctuation time Tc1 is longer than the fluctuation time Tc1. Also, the fluctuation time Td1 is longer, and the fluctuation time Te is longer than the fluctuation time Td1.

Then, as described above, in the jackpot variation pattern table T1 at the normal time, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 80). , The effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the command "01H" if the variation number is 1) and the winning information command (the winning type including the winning and the small hit). The command shown) and are set respectively (step S411). Further, the value of the fluctuation time associated with the determined fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation time Ta1 if the fluctuation number is 1) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. It is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414).

On the other hand, in performing the jackpot variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the gaming state is different from the normal external disadvantageous gaming state, the jackpot variation pattern table associated with the determined gaming state is selected. Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern are set, but this description will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal external disadvantageous game state, which of the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side and the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side won the big hit? Regardless of, it was decided to select the jackpot fluctuation pattern table T1 at the normal time, but when the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side is performed and when the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side is performed. By selecting a jackpot variation pattern table having different contents, a display effect having different contents may appear.

In addition, when it is determined that the player is in a normal external disadvantageous game state (both the probability change function and the time saving function are not activated), the normal jackpot variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 89 should be selected regardless of the jackpot type. However, one of the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern tables prepared for each jackpot type may be selectively used based on the state of the jackpot flag according to the jackpot type.

That is, in this case, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern can be made different according to the type of jackpot, and when a specific fluctuation pattern appears, the probability of being a jackpot of a specific type is increased. Will be. In addition, even if the fluctuation time is the same, the fluctuation number (effect command) can be changed according to the type of jackpot. In this case, the fluctuation pattern as well as the fluctuation pattern can be changed simply by checking the production command. , You will be able to grasp the type of jackpot. Therefore, if the peripheral control board 4140 side compares the effect command with the winning information command to judge the appropriateness, the reliability of communication with the main control board 4100 is improved. You will be able to do it.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of a small hit will be described with reference to FIG. 89.

As described above, if it is determined in the process of step S403 (see FIG. 81) that the small hit flag is ON, the main control MPU4100a will perform the small hit as the process of step S404 (see FIG. 81). The small hit variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the variation pattern at the time of winning is set.

In this small hit variation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous game state (probability change function and time saving function are not activated), the normal external advantageous game state (only the time saving function is activated), and the probability change external disadvantageous game state (probability change function). It is determined whether the game state is in the probabilistic external advantageous gaming state (probability change function and time saving function are both activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different small hit variation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each game state, and usually, both the external disadvantageous game state (probability change function and time saving function) are provided. When it is determined that the table is inactive, the small hit variation pattern table T2 at the normal time shown in FIG. 89 is selected.

Then, as described above, when the small hit variation pattern table T2 at the normal time is selected, the main control MPU4100a is acquired by the process of step S303 (see FIG. 80) while referring to the selected table T2. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display (LED) is also determined.

Here, assuming that, for example, values from "0" to "99" can be acquired as the variation display pattern random numbers of the special symbol, in the small hit variation pattern table T2 at the normal time, these "0" to "99" Of the values, 35 specific values are assigned to fluctuation number 2 (variation time Ta2) (selection rate at the time of small hit is 35%), and 30 specific values are fluctuation number 6 (variation time Tb2). (Selection rate at the time of small hit 30%), 30 specific values are assigned to fluctuation number 10 (variation time Tc2) (selection rate at the time of small hit 20%), and 5 A specific value is assigned to the variation number 13 (variation time Td2) (selection rate at the time of small hit 5%). In this way, as the variable number increases, the number of specific values (small hit values) allocated tends to decrease.

As will be described later, when the variation number 2 (variation time Ta2) is selected, the result of the big hit lottery is shown with the effect content "a (or a')" appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the effect is performed and the variation number 6 (variation time Tb2) is selected, the display showing the result of the big hit lottery while the effect content "b (or b')" appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the effect is performed and the variation number 10 (variation time Tc2) is selected, the display showing the result of the big hit lottery while the effect content "c (or c')" appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the effect is performed and the variation number 13 (variation time Td2) is selected, the display showing the result of the big hit lottery while the effect content "d (or d')" appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The production is done. By the way, as such a display effect showing the result of the big hit lottery, for example, a display effect showing that the big hit has been lost or a game state in which the prize ball can be obtained by the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is shifted. A display effect (a display effect that appears even when a big hit is won) that indicates that the game is to be performed is appropriately adopted.

Further, as will be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta2 is set as a time (same or approximate time) that matches the fluctuation time Ta1 with reference to the fluctuation time Ta1. When the time Ta1 (variation number 1) or the fluctuation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, any result can be obtained as a big hit lottery under the effect content "a (or a')". A pair of productions about what was done appears. Further, the fluctuation time Tb2 is set as a length of time (same or approximate time) based on the fluctuation time Tb1, and the fluctuation time Tb1 (variation number 5) and the fluctuation time Tb2 (variation). When the number 6) is selected, a pair of effects as to what kind of result was obtained as a big hit lottery appears under the effect content "b (or b')". Further, the fluctuation time Tc2 is set as a length of time (same or approximate time) based on the fluctuation time Tc1, and the fluctuation time Tc1 (variation number 9) and the fluctuation time Tc2 (variation). When the number 10) is selected, a pair of effects as to what kind of result was obtained as a big hit lottery appears under the effect content "c (or c')". Further, the fluctuation time Td2 is set as a time (same or approximate time) having a length based on the fluctuation time Td1 as a reference, and the fluctuation time Td1 (variation number 12) and the fluctuation time Td2 (variation). When the number 13) is selected, the effect content "d (or d')" appears, and a pair of effects as to what kind of result was obtained as a big hit lottery appears.

Then, as described above, in the small hit variation pattern table T2 at the normal time, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 80). And the effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, command "02H" for variation number 2) and the winning information command (winning type including winning and small hits). (Command indicating) and are set respectively (step S411). Further, the value of the fluctuation time associated with the determined fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation time Ta2 in the case of the fluctuation number 2) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. It is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414).

On the other hand, in performing the small hit variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the gaming state is different from the normal external disadvantageous gaming state, the small hit variation pattern table associated with the determined gaming state is used. Is selected, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined fluctuation pattern, but this description will be omitted. However, if a small hit is won in a gaming state in which the time saving function is activated (external advantageous gaming state), a single fluctuation pattern is determined, and display processing (for example, pure loss) is performed without inciting expectations. It is desirable to perform the same display processing as the low-expected effect of the time).

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of high expectation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 89.

As described above, if it is determined that the high expectation effect should be performed in the process of step S405 (see FIG. 81), the main control MPU4100a has high expectations as the process of step S406 (see FIG. 81). In order to set the fluctuation pattern when performing the production, the high expectation loss fluctuation pattern table setting process is performed (step S406).

Even in this highly expected loss fluctuation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous game state (probability change function and time saving function are not activated), the normal external advantageous game state (only the time saving function is activated), and the probability change external disadvantageous game state (probability change external disadvantage game state). It is determined whether the gaming state is in the probabilistic variation function (only the probabilistic variation function is activated) or the probabilistic variation external advantageous gaming state (the probabilistic variation function and the time saving function are both activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different high-expected loss fluctuation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each gaming state, and usually an external disadvantageous gaming state (probability variation function and time saving function) is available. When it is determined that the table is inactive, the high-expected loss fluctuation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 89 is selected.

Then, as described above, when the high-expected loss fluctuation pattern table T3 in the normal state is selected, the main control MPU4100a refers to the selected table T3 in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 80). The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the acquired variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 (LED) is also determined.

Here, assuming that a value from "0" to "99" can be acquired as a random number of the fluctuation display pattern of the special symbol, in the high-expected loss fluctuation pattern table T3 at the normal time, these "0" to "99" Of the values of, 40 specific values are assigned to variation number 3 (variation time Ta3) (selection rate 40% at the time of high expectation loss), and 17 specific values are variation number 4 (variation time). It is assigned to Ta4) (selection rate 17% at the time of high expectation loss), and 25 specific values are assigned to fluctuation number 7 (variation time Tb3) (selection rate 25% at the time of high expectation loss). , 13 specific values are assigned to variation number 8 (variation time Tb4) (selectivity 13% at the time of high expectation loss), and 3 specific values are assigned to variation number 11 (variation time Tc3). (Selection rate at the time of high expectation loss 3%), two specific values are assigned to the variation number 14 (variation time Td3) (selection rate at the time of high expectation loss 2%). In this way, as the variable number increases, the number of specific values (outliers) allocated tends to decrease.

As will be described later, when the variation number 3 (fluctuation time Ta3) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is rejected as a big hit when the effect content "a, no development (or a')" appears. When the display effect indicating that the effect was performed and the variation number 4 (variation time Ta4) was selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 was rejected as a big hit with the effect content "a, with development" appearing. Is displayed, or a display effect indicating that the jackpot has been lost is performed when the effect content "c'" appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the variation number 7 (variation time Tb3) is selected. When this is done, a display effect indicating that the jackpot was rejected is performed under the effect content "b, no development (or b')" on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the variation number 8 (variation). When the time Tb4) is selected, the display effect indicating that the jackpot was rejected under the appearance of the effect content "b, with development" on the liquid crystal display device 1400, or the effect content "b" on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the display effect indicating that the jackpot was lost is performed with the appearance of "d'" and the variation number 11 (variation time Tc3) is selected, the effect content "c (or)" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. , C') ”appears, a display effect indicating that the jackpot was lost is performed, and when the variation number 14 (variation time Td3) is selected, the effect content“ d ”is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. (Or, d') ”appears, and a display effect is performed to indicate that the jackpot was lost. By the way, as will be described later, when the variation numbers 4 and 8 are used, they appear as a loss effect pattern with different effect contents depending on the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Since the variation number of the jackpot effect pattern that is a pair of variation numbers 4 and 8 is changed between the variation numbers 1 and 5 and the variation numbers 9 and 12, the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140 side is set. It will be possible to make the production patterns with different jackpot expectations appear accordingly.

Further, as will be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta3 is set as a time (same or approximate time) of a length that matches the fluctuation time Ta1 with reference to the fluctuation time Ta1. When the time Ta1 (variation number 1), the fluctuation time Ta2 (variation number 2), and the fluctuation time Ta3 (variation number 3) are selected, any of the jackpot lottery is performed under the effect content "a". A pair of renditions about whether the result was obtained appears. However, when the fluctuation time Ta1 (variation number 1) or the fluctuation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, the effect content "a" is set to the opening period before the opening / closing member 2006 opens / closes the grand prize opening 2003. Since such an effect may be extended, a variation time Ta4 (variation number 4) longer than the variation time Ta3 (variation number 3) is prepared as a paired loss effect pattern when such an extension effect is performed. ing. Further, the fluctuation time Ta4 (variation number 4) is also set as a time (same or approximate time) having a length (same or approximate time) based on the fluctuation time Tc3 (variation number 11). Depending on the control on the control board 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the fluctuation time Tc3 (variation number 11). As a result, as described above, the variation number of the jackpot effect pattern, which is a pair of the variation number 4 of the loss effect pattern, is changed between the variation number 1 and the variation number 9.

Furthermore, the fluctuation time Tb3 is set as a time (same or similar time) having a length based on the fluctuation time Tb1 as a reference, and the fluctuation time Tb1 (variation number 5) and the fluctuation time Tb2 (variation number 5). When the variation number 6) and the variation time Tb3 (variation number 7) are selected, the effect content "b" appears, and a pair of effects indicating what kind of result was obtained as a big hit lottery appears. However, when the fluctuation time Tb1 (variation number 5) or the fluctuation time Tb2 (variation number 6) is selected, the effect content "b" is set to the opening period before the opening / closing member 2006 opens / closes the grand prize opening 2003. Since such an effect may be extended, a variation time Tb4 (variation number 8) longer than the variation time Tb3 (variation number 7) is prepared as a paired loss effect pattern when such an extension effect is performed. ing. Further, the fluctuation time Tb4 (variation number 8) is also set as a time (same or approximate time) having a length (same or approximate time) based on the fluctuation time Td3 (variation number 14). Depending on the control on the control board 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the fluctuation time Td3 (variation number 14). As a result, as described above, the variation number of the jackpot effect pattern, which is a pair of the variation number 8 of the loss effect pattern, is changed between the variation number 5 and the variation number 12.

Then, as described above, in the highly expected loss fluctuation pattern table T3 at the normal time, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the fluctuation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 80). Then, the effect command associated with the determined fluctuation pattern (for example, command "03H" if the fluctuation number is 3) and the winning information command (winning including winning and small hits) (Command indicating the seed) and each are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the fluctuation time associated with the determined fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation time Ta3 if the fluctuation number is 3) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. It is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414).

On the other hand, in performing the jackpot variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the gaming state is different from the normal external disadvantageous gaming state, the highly expected variation pattern table associated with the determined gaming state is displayed. A selection is made, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined fluctuation pattern, but this description will be omitted.

According to the jackpot fluctuation pattern table T1 at the normal time, the small hit fluctuation pattern table T2 at the normal time, and the high expected loss fluctuation pattern table T3 at the normal time, the jackpot expectation is higher than the display effect a and the display effect b Is higher, the display effect c is higher than the display effect b, the display effect d is higher than the display effect c, and the display effect e is higher than the display effect d. In particular, since the display effect e can appear only when the big hit is won, it is confirmed that the big hit is won when the effect e appears.

Next, the variable processing (step S180) executed when the processing flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 82, in the changing process (step S180), the main control MPU4100a first sets the variable time in the timer in the process of step S412 (see FIG. 81) as the process of step S501. Determines if the time is up. If the fluctuation time set in the timer has not timed up (NO in step S501), the processing during fluctuation is terminated.

If the fluctuation time set in the timer is timed up (YES in step S501), the special figure LED operation flag set to ON in the process of step S413 is set to OFF (step S502). When this special symbol LED operation flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is displayed based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The variation display (variation of the special symbol) related to the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs as a device is terminated. Further, in order to end the display effect of the big hit lottery on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a confirmation stop command indicating that the effect result of the display effect should be confirmed and displayed on the peripheral control board 4140. Is set (step S503). The fixed stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 77. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the effect result in the display effect is confirmed and displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control board 4140 side. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, depending on the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not terminated even though the confirmation stop command is received, and the subsequent opening period is continued. As described above, the display effect may be controlled so as to be extended.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S504). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S504), the processing flag is updated to "3" assuming that the special symbol is in the processing stage where the fluctuation is stopped so as to indicate that the jackpot has been won (step S505). , Ends the processing during the change.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not ON but the big hit is lost (NO in step S504), then, as the process of step S506, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON. If the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S506), the processing flag is updated to "4" assuming that the special symbol is in the processing stage where the fluctuation is stopped so as to indicate that the small hit has been won (step). S507), the processing during the change is terminated.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not ON and is a pure loss (a loss that does not satisfy a specific condition) (NO in step S506), it is special so that it is shown that both the big hit and the small hit have been rejected. Assuming that the symbol is in the processing stage where the fluctuation is stopped, the processing flag is updated to "0" (step S508), and the processing during the fluctuation is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation related to the special symbol is performed on condition that the interrupt is suspended and digested in the process of step S130.

Next, the jackpot game start process (step S200) executed when the process flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game start process.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the jackpot game start process (step S200), the main control MPU4100a first operates the condition device as the process of step S601. Next, as the process of step S2602, a function (probability fluctuation function) for increasing the winning probability of a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device is in operation (probability fluctuation function) as compared with the case of the normal external disadvantageous gaming state or the normal external advantageous gaming state. It is judged whether or not it is in the probability fluctuation state). As a result, when it is determined that the probabilistic external disadvantageous gaming state or the probabilistic external advantageous gaming state is in the game state and the probability variation function is operating (YES in step S602), the probability variation function The operation is stopped (step S603).

Next, as the process of step S604, the function (time saving function) for facilitating the game ball from entering the second starting port 2005c is operating (time saving game state) while the operation of the probability fluctuation function is stopped in this way. Judge whether or not. If it is not determined in the process of step S602 that the probability variation function is operating, the process proceeds to step S604 without executing the process of step S603. As a result, when it is determined that the time saving function is in operation in either the normal external advantageous gaming state or the probabilistic external advantageous gaming state (YES in step S604), the time saving function is activated. Stop (step S605).

Then, in order to perform the big hit game with both the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function stopped in this way, as a process of step S606, the big winning opening 2003 is repeatedly opened in the big hit game. The maximum number of times (16 times or 9 times in this embodiment), the maximum number of game balls that can be entered into the big winning opening 2003 in each round game (predetermined large number), and each round The opening mode in the big hit game is set, such as the opening / closing operation time limit of the opening / closing member 2006 in the game (a predetermined long time of the long-time opening / closing pattern). That is, in the process of step S606, first, the type of jackpot is determined based on the jackpot flag set in the process of step S317 (see FIG. 80). Then, the information related to the "opening mode in the big hit game" prepared in association with each type of big hit (big hit A to big hit E) determined in this way is obtained from the ROM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). It is read and the read information is set. As a result, the big hit game can be executed with the above-mentioned opening mode according to the type of big hit (big hit A to big hit E). If it is not determined in the process of step S604 that the time saving function is operating, the process of step S606 is performed without executing the process of step S605.

After that, prior to the big hit game, the interval production before the big hit game is performed (for example, the opening production such as "Congratulations" and the challenge bonus production such as "Chance to win the ball!") Are executed. As possible, an interval effect command at the time of a big hit is set, which indicates the time from when the special symbol is stopped until the special bonus game (big hit game) is started (step S607). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the stop of the special symbol (as described above). Since (extended effect) can be executed, the interval effect command set in this way is also prepared based on this. That is, in relation to the time required for the extended effect that appears even when the small hit is won, only the interval effect command indicating a specific fixed time (for example, 8 seconds) is set regardless of the type of the big hit. Then, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 87, so that at a specific fixed time (for example, 8 seconds) indicated by the command. Is to selectively perform either the interval effect as described above or the extension effect as described above on the liquid crystal display device 1400 through the control described later by the peripheral control board 4140 side.

Next, the interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S607 is set (step S608), and the process flag is updated to "5" (step S609). , Ends the jackpot game start process.

Next, the small hit game start process (step S220) executed when the process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start process.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the small hit game start process (step S220), the main control MPU4100a first performs the small open hit game (small hit game), so that the small hit game is performed as the process of step S701. The number of times the large winning opening 2003 is repeatedly opened in the game (twice in this embodiment), the maximum number of game balls that can be entered into the large winning opening 2003 at the time of opening (a predetermined small number), and the like. , The opening mode in the small opening hit game (small hit game) such as the opening / closing operation time limit (small time opening / closing pattern) of the opening / closing member 2006 at the time of opening is set.

After that, prior to the small opening hit game (small hit game), the interval production before the small game is performed (for example, a challenge bonus production such as "chance to get a ball!") Can be executed. An interval effect command at the time of a small hit is set, which indicates the time from the stop of the special symbol to the start of the small bonus game (small hit game) (step S702). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small hit is won, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the stop of the special symbol (as described above). Since the extension effect of) can be executed, the interval effect command set in this way is also prepared based on this. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in relation to the time required for the extension effect that appears even when the big hit is won, a specific fixed time (for example, a random number for the big hit symbol) at the time of the small hit is won. Only the interval effect command that indicates 8 seconds) is set. By setting such a time when the extension effect appears, it is possible to suppress the presumption of the existence of a small hit, and by extension, the opening / closing member 2006 operates according to the winning of the small hit, which reduces the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

Next, the interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S702 is set (step S703), and the process flag is updated to "6" (step S704). , Ends the small hit game start process.

As will be described later, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 77, so that in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the peripheral control board 4140 side. Through the control described later by the above, the interval effect is performed for the time indicated by the interval effect command.

Next, the jackpot game process (step S240) executed when the process flag is “5” will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game process.

As shown in FIG. 85, in the jackpot game process (step S240), the main control MPU4100a first sets a flag during the jackpot game indicating that the jackpot game has already been performed as the process of step S801. Judge whether or not it is in the ON state (set).

Here, the jackpot gaming flag is operated to the OFF state when the processing status is immediately after shifting to the jackpot game processing (step S240). Therefore, when the processing status is immediately after shifting to the jackpot game processing (step S240), it is determined that the jackpot gaming flag is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S801), and then the processing in step S802. I do.

In the process of this step S802, whether or not the above-mentioned interval effect (opening effect of big hit confirmation, challenge bonus effect of opening confirmation of big winning opening 2003 (execution confirmation of bonus game), or extension effect) is completed, that is, the above. It is determined whether or not the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) set in the process of step S607 (see FIG. 83) has timed up. The interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) has not timed up, and the above-mentioned interval effect (opening effect of big hit confirmation, challenge bonus effect of opening confirmation of big prize opening 2003, or extension effect) is still being executed. In the case (NO in step S802), the jackpot game process is temporarily terminated, and the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) waits until the time is up through the processes of steps S801 and S802 (interruption process is repeated). It will be.

However, in the main control MPU4100a according to this embodiment, even if the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up as a result of such processing (YES in step S802), only this is a big hit. Judgment as to whether or not the game ball has passed the effective gate 6010n (specific entrance) after the interval production timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up so that the game is not started. (Step S803). As a result, when it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the effective gate 6010n, the jackpot game process is temporarily terminated, and the process in step S803 waits until it is determined that the game ball has passed through the effective gate 6010n ( By repeating the interrupt process), after the time (8 seconds in this case) predetermined by the interval effect timer has expired, until the game ball is accepted by the effective gate 6010n, the opening / closing means 2006 of the large winning opening 2003 It is designed to be extended and maintained in the closed state without operating.

According to the extension control over the closing control period of the big winning opening 2003, the closing control period (opening / closing member 2006) from the stop of the special symbol to the start of the big hit game based on the winning of the big hit. Of the period during which the special symbol is maintained and controlled in the closed state), the time from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up is set in advance after the special symbol is stopped and displayed. When the "first closing control period having a given length" is set (step S802), after the first closing control period has elapsed, the "second closing control period having an indefinite length" is set. "Closed control period" will appear further (step S803). Therefore, it becomes possible to realize a novel effect by mutually utilizing the attribute as the closed control period having a predetermined length and the attribute as the closed control period having an indefinite length. ..

More specifically, the first closed control period (8 seconds in this case) is used as, for example, as the addition time with the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol set above, and this addition time is used. As one unit, it is possible to realize an effect using attributes as a closed control period having a predetermined length, such as extending the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 to the variable display of a special symbol. become able to. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the display effect related to the big hit lottery may be executed with the effect content for the time obtained by adding the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the first closing control period. There is. On the other hand, for the second closing control period (here, the time until the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n), for example, a feature-length movie until the opening / closing member 2006 operates during the same period is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It becomes possible to realize an effect using the attribute as a closed control period having an indefinite length, such as displaying on the display device 1400. That is, for the second closed control period (here, the time until the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n), the player can appropriately end the synchronization period, so that a feature-length movie or the like can be used. Even when a redundant production is realized, the range of the production can be expanded without causing adverse effects such as deterioration of the game entertainment due to the extension of the production.

Then, as a result of performing such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S803 that the game ball has passed through the effective gate 6010n, the accessory continuous operating device is activated to cause a big hit (accompanied by the operation of the condition device). The state shifts to a state in which the operation (big hit game) of the opening / closing member 2006 according to the winning of the hit) is possible. That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a first sets the jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is started as the process of step S804, and the jackpot game indicating that the jackpot game has already been performed. The middle flag is operated (set) in the ON state, and then the process proceeds to step S805.

That is, as will be described later, the jackpot start command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 77, so that in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the peripheral control board 4140 Through the control described later by the side, the display effect during the jackpot game will be performed. Further, by operating (setting) the big hit game flag to the ON state, when the big hit game process (step S240) is started by the interrupt control from the next time onward, such steps S801 to S804 The process of the following step S805 for performing the process related to the execution of the jackpot game is performed without performing the process of.

In the process of step S805, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 2003 is open. If it is open (YES in step S805), then as the process of step S806, the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the large winning opening 2003 is set in the process of step S606 (see FIG. 83). It is determined whether or not the set opening / closing operation time limit (predetermined long time or predetermined intermediate time) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation time limit has elapsed (YES in step S806), the opening / closing member 2006 is closed to close the grand prize opening 2003 (step S808).

However, even if it is determined in the process of step S806 that the set opening / closing operation time limit has not yet elapsed (NO in step S806), the same applies after the large winning opening 2003 is opened. If the number of game balls entered in the grand prize opening 2003 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number (for example, 10) set in the process of step S606 (YES in step S807), step S808 is described. And close the big prize opening 2003. On the other hand, if the opening / closing operation time limit set above has not yet passed (NO in step S806) and the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 2003 has not yet reached the upper limit. (NO in step S807), the big hit game process is finished while keeping the big winning opening 2003 in the open state.

On the other hand, in the process of step S805, when it is determined that the big winning opening 2003 is not open, the number of times the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the opening / closing member 2006 (the number of round games) is set to the above step S606 (FIG. 83). It is determined whether or not the maximum number of times (16 times or 9 times) set in the process of (see) has been reached (step S809). If it has not reached (NO in step S809), the opening / closing member 2006 is operated to open the big winning opening 2003 (step S810), and the big hit game process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of step S809, when it is determined that the round game has already been performed the maximum number of times, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is stopped, so that a big hit (a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device). The operation (big hit game) of the opening / closing member 2006 according to the winning of the game will be disabled. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processes of steps S811 to S817, for example, in the process of step S317 (see FIG. 80), in addition to the jackpot flag, the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). Based on the winning type of the jackpot that was the trigger for executing the jackpot game stored in, the game state after the jackpot game is set, and then the jackpot game process is terminated. The winning species here is related to whether or not the winning species activates the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function. For example, when the jackpot that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is jackpot C. Will differ in the content of the information regarding whether or not the time saving function is activated according to the game state when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit.

That is, first, the jackpot flag and the jackpot in-game flag are each turned off (step S811), and the winning species of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is determined (step S812, step S814). Here, in the process of step S812, it is determined whether or not the winning species (big hits A to D) activate the probability variation function. As a result, when it is determined that the winning species does not activate the probability variation function, the process proceeds to the process of step S814 without operating the probability variation function. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S812 that the winning species activates the probability variation function, the probability variation function is activated (step S813), and then the process proceeds to the process of step S814. To do.

Further, in the process of step S814, it is determined whether or not the winning type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C won in the time saving game state) is the one that activates the time saving function. As a result, when it is determined that the winning species does not activate the time saving function, the operation of the condition device is stopped without operating the time saving function (step S816), and when the processing flag is set to "0" ( Step S817), the jackpot game process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S814 that the species is the winning species that activates the time saving function, the time saving function is activated (step S815), and then the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S816). ), When the processing flag is set to "0" (step S817), the jackpot game processing ends.

According to such a big hit game start process, the big winning opening 2003 is opened according to the type of big hit (step S806) until it is determined that the round game has reached the maximum number of times in the process of step 807. , Step S807, and step S809), and the prize balls according to the type of big hit can be obtained by the player.

Next, the small hit game process (step S250) executed when the process flag is “6” will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game process.

As shown in FIG. 86, also in the small hit game process (step S250), the main control MPU4100a first indicates that the small hit game has already been performed as the process of step S901. It is determined whether or not the in-game flag is in the ON state (set).

Here, the small hit game in progress flag is operated to the OFF state when the processing status is immediately after shifting to the small hit game process (step S250). Therefore, when the processing status is immediately after shifting to the small hit game process (step S250), it is determined that the small hit game in-progress flag is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S901), and then step S902. Is processed.

In the process of step S902, whether or not the above-mentioned interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extension effect) is completed, that is, the interval effect timer set in the process of step 703 (see FIG. 84) determines in advance. It is judged whether or not the time (8 seconds in this case) is up. If the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) has not timed up and the above-mentioned interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extension effect) is still being executed (NO in step S902), the small hit game The process is temporarily completed, and the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) waits until the time is up through the processes of steps S901 and S902.

However, in the small hit game process (step S250) according to this embodiment, unlike the big hit game process (step 240), as a result of such processing, the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up. In the case (YES in step S902), the small hit game is started only by this, and then, as the process of step S903, the small hit start command indicating to start the small hit game is set and the small hit is started. The above-mentioned small hit game in-game flag, which indicates that the game is already being played, is operated (set) to the ON state. That is, in this case, as long as the player confirms that the above-mentioned second closing control period does not appear (there is no extension control from the first closing control period having a certain length), the conditional device After completely removing the expectation that a bonus game may be performed according to the hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of (not a notification by a production with a lot of false information, but a control related to the progress of the game) It is possible to play the game (after removing the feeling of expectation depending on the presence or absence).

Further, as will be described later, the small hit start command set in the process of step S903 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 87, so that the liquid crystal display device 1400 In the above-mentioned small hit game, the display effect during the small hit game is performed through the control described later by the peripheral control board 4140 side. Further, by operating (setting) the small hit game in-progress flag to the ON state, when the small hit game process (step S250) is started in the next and subsequent interrupt processes, such step S901 -The process of step S904 for performing the process related to the execution of the small hit game is performed without performing the process of step S903.

In the process of step S904, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 2003 is open. If it is open (YES in step S904), then as the process of step S905, the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the large winning opening 2003 is set in the process of step S701 (see FIG. 84). It is determined whether or not the set opening / closing operation time limit (predetermined small time of the small time opening / closing pattern) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation time limit has elapsed (YES in step S905), the opening / closing member 2006 is closed to close the winning opening 2003 (step S907).

However, even if it is determined in the process of step S905 that the set opening / closing operation time limit has not yet elapsed (NO in step S905), the same applies after the large winning opening 2003 is opened. When the number of game balls entered in the grand prize opening 2003 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number (for example, two) set in the process of step S701 (YES in step S905), the step S901 is described. The process shifts to S907 and the grand prize opening 2003 is closed. On the other hand, if the opening / closing operation time limit set above has not yet passed (NO in step S905) and the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 2003 has not yet reached the upper limit. (NO in step S905), the small hit game process is completed while the large winning opening 2003 is maintained in the open state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S904 that the large winning opening 2003 is not open, the number of times the large winning opening 2003 is opened by the opening / closing member 2006 is determined by the process of step S701 (see FIG. 84). It is determined whether or not the set maximum number of times (twice) has been reached (step S908). If it has not arrived (NO in step S908), the opening / closing member 2006 is operated to open the large winning opening 2003 (step S909), and the small hit game process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of step S908, when it is determined that the opening / closing member 2006 has already opened the large winning opening 2003 for the maximum number of times, the small hit flag and the small hit in-game flag are turned off. The state is operated (step S910), and when the processing flag is set to "0" (step S911), the small hit game processing is terminated.

According to such a small hit game process, the large prize opening 2003 responds to the big hit until it is determined in the process of step 906 that the opening of the large prize opening 2003 by the opening / closing member 2006 has reached the maximum number of times. Although it is an open mode in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the large winning opening 2003 as compared with the open mode, the prize balls corresponding to the open mode can be obtained by the player. Become.

Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 96. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady-state processing. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process (step S1100). FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S1200). FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start processing (step S1210). FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the stop symbol determination process (step S1225a) in the first effect mode, and FIG. 96 shows an example of the stop symbol determination process (step S1225b) in the second effect mode. It is a flowchart.

In the sub-main process, as shown in FIG. 90, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU4150a performs the initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, the loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

Here, the peripheral control MPU4150a according to this embodiment executes a 2 ms steady-state process as an interrupt process every time 2 ms elapses. That is, in this 2 ms steady processing, the counter value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is counted up (“1” is added to the counter value). Then, as a result of repeating the count-up every time 2 ms elapses, when the counter value becomes 8 (when 16 ms elapses), the 16 ms elapse flag T is set and the 16 ms elapse monitoring is performed. The counter value of the counter is reset.

In this regard, in the process of step 1002, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is monitored until it is set in the 2 ms steady-state process described above (loop process). As a result, when it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set (Yes in step 1002), after resetting the 16 ms elapsed flag (step S1003), the 16 ms steady processing described later is performed (step S1004). The 16 ms steady-state process is performed every 16 ms.

In this 16 ms steady processing, the liquid crystal display device 1400, the LED of each decorative board provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are used based on various effect commands received from the main control board 4100. The process of controlling the speaker is executed. When the 16 ms steady-state process is completed, the process returns to the process of step S1002, and the 16 ms progress flag T is monitored again until the 2 ms steady-state process is set (loop process).

As shown in FIG. 91, in the 16 ms steady-state process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first analyzes (command analysis process) various effect commands received from the main control board 4100 as the process of step S1100. Next, based on the above-analyzed effect command, the control (effect control process) related to the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is executed (step S1200). More specifically, the setting of the advance notice effect that can appear on the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the determination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that can appear on the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the like are performed.

Next, the peripheral control MPU4150a executes a sound control process related to the sound output of the speaker in order to generate a sound effect (for example, BGM) that promotes the effect effect (step S1300). Further, the light emitting decoration control process related to the light emitting decoration by each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is executed (step S1400).

After that, information is transmitted to the lamp drive board and the liquid crystal control board with the commands set in each of the above processes S1200 to S1400 (in addition to the display commands described later, sound output commands, light emission decoration commands, etc.). Output processing is performed (step S1500). As a result, the effect corresponding to the set command is performed through the liquid crystal display device 1400, the speaker, the door frame, each decorative substrate provided on the game board, and the like.

After this information output process (step S1500) is performed, when the random number update process in which the random numbers used for various settings are updated in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed (step S1600), the 16 ms steady state is executed. End the process.

The processing of steps S1100 to S1600 (16ms steady-state processing) is set as a processing amount to be completed within 16ms, but if 16ms of time has elapsed from the start of the 16ms steady-state processing, the step is taken. Even if the execution up to the process of S1600 is not completed, the process in progress at that time is continued as it is without returning to the process of step S1100 (from the command analysis process). Will be processed up to. That is, when 16 ms elapses during the execution of the 16 ms steady state process, only the 16 ms progress flag is set, and when it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms progress flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU4150a according to this embodiment, the random number update process (step S1600) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing for updating various random numbers. Is not limited to this. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop processing and the 16ms steady processing in the sub-main processing.

Next, the command analysis process (process of step S1100) will be described with reference to FIG. 92.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the command analysis process, the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) first receives an effect command from the main control board 4100 as a process of step S1101 to receive the peripheral control board 4140. It is determined whether or not it is stored in the storage area (RAM) (step S1101).

That is, when the peripheral control board 4140 according to this embodiment receives an effect command from the main control board 4100, it interrupts other processing such as 16 ms steady processing to generate a command reception interrupt process, and this command reception interrupt process is generated. In the interrupt process, the effect command from the main control board 4100 is stored in the reception command storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140. The reception command storage area is provided with a plurality of areas corresponding to the reception order of the effect commands from the main control board 4100, and in the command reception interrupt process, the effect commands are associated with each other in the reception order. In the form of a command, each of these multiple areas is stored separately.

In this regard, in the process of step S1101, the contents of the reception command storage area are confirmed, and if the production command is stored, the production command having the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is read from the reception command storage area. (Step S1102).

Next, whether or not the read effect command is a pattern command (command indicating a variation pattern) among the effect commands set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S411 (see FIG. 90). Is determined (step S1103). As a result, when it is determined that the command is the same effect (YES in step S1103), the variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, and the variation pattern reception flag is set. At the time of setting (step S1104), the command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the read effect command is not a pattern command (command shown in FIG. 89) (NO in step S1103), the read effect command is processed in step S411 (see FIG. 81). It is determined whether or not it is a winning information command (a winning information command indicating the winning type including a winning or a small hit) among the production commands set on the main control board 4100 side ( Step S1105). As a result, when it is determined that the effect command is the same (YES in step S1105), when the winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1106), the said End the command analysis process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the read production command is not a winning information command (NO in step S1105), a flag corresponding to the production command received in the corresponding storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 is set. At the time of setting (step S1107), the command analysis process is terminated. Examples of such an effect command include a fixed stop command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S503 (see FIG. 82), step S606 (see FIG. 83), and step S702. The interval effect command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of (see FIG. 84) and the big hit start set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S803 (see FIG. 85). There is a command, a small hit start command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S903 (see FIG. 86), and the like.

Next, the effect control process (process of step S1200) will be described with reference to FIG. 93.

As shown in FIG. 93, in this effect control process, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220), and the jackpot are based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress state of the game. Either the display process (step S1230) or the small hit display process (step S1240) is selectively performed.

That is, as will be described later, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the variation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 92) is set. On the condition that the display is performed, the process for starting the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400, including the variable display of the decorative pattern, is performed. For example, a display effect pattern (such as a stop symbol of a decorative symbol or the presence or absence of the above-mentioned extension effect) is determined based on a pattern command or a winning information command, and the display effect pattern is determined according to the determined display effect pattern (for the liquid crystal control board). In addition to setting the display command, it also performs processing such as setting related to the advance notice effect.

Further, the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is "1" basically corresponds to a fixed stop command that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 92). To end the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400, including the variable display of the decorative pattern, so that the result of the big hit lottery is shown on condition that the flag is set (for the liquid crystal control board). ) Set display commands, and so on. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is reset.

Further, in the jackpot display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is "2", a flag corresponding to a jackpot interval effect command that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 92) and a flag corresponding to the jackpot display process A display indicating on the liquid crystal display device 1400 that the big winning opening 2003 will be opened or a display during the big hit game state (for example, a round display, etc.) on condition that the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set. Control each of them. Further, at the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of big hit and the flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

Further, in the small hit display process (step S1240) executed when the process selection flag is "3", the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of small hit that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 92). Or, on condition that the flag corresponding to the small hit start command is set, the liquid crystal display device 1400 indicates that the big winning opening 2003 will be opened, and the effect display during the small hit game state is displayed. Control each. Further, at the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of small hit and the flag corresponding to the small hit start command are reset.

However, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU4150a according to this embodiment, the display effect at the time of big hit or small hit in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not terminated within the fluctuation time indicated by the received pattern command. , After extending to the period (interval period) after the stop of the variable display related to the lighting patterns of multiple LEDs as the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display, in the display effect after this extension. I try to have a case where the result of the big hit lottery can be shown.

That is, in this case, as will be described later, in the decorative symbol variation start processing (step S1210), the time required for the extension effect in the interval period, which is longer than the variation time indicated by the pattern command received from the main control board 4100, is also included. The display effect pattern is determined, and the display command (for the liquid crystal control board) corresponding to the determined display effect pattern is set. Further, in the decorative symbol variation processing (step S1220), even though the flag corresponding to the confirmation stop command is set, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not completed, and an intermediate effect stage appears. Based on this, the process is terminated.

Then, in the big hit display process (step S1230) or the small hit display process (step S1240), the display effect extended in this way is indicated by the display command set in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). The processing to be continuously performed will be performed according to the contents to be performed. Therefore, in the processing at the time of this extension, even if the flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set, the effect control according to the command (display control indicating that the grand prize opening 2003 is opened, etc.) Do not do.

As described above, the command set in the process of steps S121 to 1230 in the effect control process is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. As a result, the display effect of the content (display effect pattern, etc.) indicated by the above command appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 through the control by the liquid crystal control board side.

The effect control process also performs a touch panel process. In this touch panel process, the effect control process detects the contact state on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 based on the detection signal received from the touch panel 246. This effect control process acquires the coordinate value of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, specifies the position represented by this coordinate value as a detection point, and operates including this initial position. Get information. In this effect control process, not only such coordinate values may be acquired, but also the range of the contact surface may be acquired. The details of this touch panel processing will be described later.

Next, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0” will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start processing.

As shown in FIG. 94, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the peripheral control MPU4150a first, as the process of step S1221, the variation pattern that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 92). It is determined whether or not the reception flag is in the ON state (set). That is, in the process of step 1221, the variation pattern is described in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 92) based on the fact that the predetermined start condition (YES in step S301) is satisfied on the main control board 4100 side. It waits for the reception flag to be operated in the ON state.

Then, until the variation pattern reception flag is operated to the ON state, the peripheral control MPU4150a controls the demo effect and the effect mode by the following steps S1232 to S1237.

That is, first, it is determined whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the state of executing the demo effect (step S1232), and when it is determined that the state is not the same, the display effect such as the previous symbol change is completed. After that, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (step S1236). As a result, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the liquid crystal display device 1400 sets a display command (for the liquid crystal control board) for starting the demonstration effect. Then, the display command set in this way is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 92, and the demonstration effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 through the control by the liquid crystal control board side. Will be done.

If it is not determined in the process of step S1236 that the predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbol variation start process is temporarily terminated and the variation pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221) or the predetermined time. Will wait until either condition (YES in step S1236) is satisfied.

Further, as a result of performing such processing (step S1236, step S1237), if it is determined in the processing of step S1232 that the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the state of executing the demo effect (step S1232). YES), it is determined whether or not the player is allowed to operate the effect mode (step S1233).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit without the operation of the condition device (small hit) or a hit with the operation of the condition device (big hit), the liquid crystal is displayed. Regarding the display effect on the display device 1400, a plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display without ending within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern set on the main control board 4100 side. A display effect pattern (extended effect pattern) in which a display effect as to whether or not a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device can appear after being extended to the period after the stop of the variable display related to the lighting pattern of ) Can be selected, and a second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected is prepared.

Here, an outline of an extension effect pattern that can be selected when in the first effect mode and a challenge bonus effect pattern that can be selected in the second effect mode will be described. FIG. 97 (a) is a diagram for explaining an extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 97 (b) is a diagram for explaining an extension effect pattern at the time of a small hit, FIG. 97 (c). Is a diagram for explaining a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 97 (d) is a diagram for explaining a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit.

In the first effect mode, if the result is that the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 provides an opportunity to obtain a prize ball (bonus game), the effect is extended to the period after the special symbol has stopped changing. A display effect pattern (extension effect pattern) at the time of extension with contents can be selected.

For example, as shown in FIG. 97A, when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extension effect pattern) is selected based on the fact that the jackpot is won, the peripheral control MPU4150a first changes the special symbol. The display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started so as to coincide with the start (based on the fact that the variation pattern reception flag is set). However, after this, even if the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command (at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol) and the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (entering the opening period) are set, the display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 Regarding the production, this will be continued without ending.

That is, as described above, in the main control MPU4100a according to this embodiment, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period from the stop of the special symbol to the start of the jackpot game based on the winning of the jackpot. The time from that time until the time (8 seconds in this case) predetermined by the interval effect timer is up (the first closing control period having a predetermined length) and the interval effect timer The time from when the predetermined time (8 seconds in this case) is up until the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n (see FIG. 51) (second closing control period having an indefinite length). I am trying to control it as.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, when the display effect pattern (extension effect pattern) at the time of extension is selected based on the fact that the jackpot is won, as shown in FIG. 97 (a). In addition, for the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the time from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up (the first closing control period with a certain length) In the form of extension, the display effect related to the big hit lottery is performed. It should be noted that such a display effect can be realized, for example, as an effect in which a specific character is challenging a battle with an enemy character.

Then, when the first closing control period having a certain length elapses and the second closing control period having an indefinite length is controlled, the effect content appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Is switched to a winning explicit effect in which winning information about whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a winning (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device is clearly shown. Here, the winning effect is to be performed as a jackpot effect that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. For example, a specific character is an enemy character. It can be realized as a production in which the appearance of winning the battle is projected. Further, considering that one display effect pattern is composed of a display effect related to the big hit lottery and a winning explicit effect in which the effect result appears, the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit according to this embodiment is It can be said that this is an effect pattern in which the effect content is extended to within the second closed control period having an indefinite length after the first closing control period ends after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. ..

After that, on the condition that the second closing control period having an indefinite length is still continued, the game ball is launched relatively strongly as an effect within the second closing control period. , Control so that the opening effect before the big hit game appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 by performing a right-handed game in which the game ball flows down to the game area 5a on the right side of the center accessory 2300 to prompt the start of the big hit game. To do. As a result, when the right-handed game is performed by the player, the game ball driven into the game area 5a on the right side of the center accessory 2300 passes through the effective gate 6010n, and the jackpot start command is set. It becomes. As a result, when the second closing control period ends, the big hit game in which the big winning opening 2003 is opened is started (see FIG. 85). At this time, the round display 648 lights up to indicate the number of rounds.

Further, when the second closing control period having an indefinite length ends and the big hit game in which the big winning opening 2003 is opened is started (the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set), for example, the liquid crystal Even if the content of the effect (explicit winning effect or opening effect) appearing on the display device 1400 is in the middle stage, the jackpot game indicating that the first round game has started is in progress. It is executed by forcibly switching to the production. However, on the other hand, unless the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n after the end of the first closing control period having a certain length, the second closing control period having an indefinite length ends. Since there is no such thing (the flag corresponding to the jackpot start command is not set), it is not forcibly switched to the production during the jackpot game indicating that the first round game has started.

According to such an extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit, the effective gate 6010n is at least if the operation handle portion is not operated after the first closing control period having a certain length elapses from the time when the special symbol is stopped. Since the game ball does not pass through the ball, the progress of the production will continue to be stagnant in the production before the start of the big hit game (the production during the second closing control period). That is, in this case, the player does not operate the operation handle portion until he / she surely understands the meaning of the pre-start effect (the effect during the second closing control period) of the jackpot game. It will be possible to keep the production progress stagnant in the previous production. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n by the operation of the operation handle portion, the pre-start effect of the big hit game ends and the next effect (during the big hit game) proceeds. A self-paced production that matches each player's pace has come to be realized, in other words, a sense of speed required for the progress of the production can be realized as a production that suits a wide range of customers regardless of age or gender. Become.

Furthermore, in such an extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit, the main control MPU4100a is indefinite as long as the effect is not progressed from the effect before the start of the big hit game (the stagnation control of the effect by the peripheral control MPU4150a). By controlling so that the second closed control period having the length of is not terminated, the game progresses and the big hit game (bonus game in which the prize ball can be obtained) is executed. I try to avoid it. Therefore, from the player's point of view, simply adjusting the speed at which the production progresses to match his own pace makes it appear that the game progresses to match this adjusted production speed. This makes it possible to enjoy the self-paced effect of the liquid crystal display device 1400 without worrying about the progress speed of the game.

In this way, the extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit is a second closing control period that appears in the form of extending the closing control period after the first closing control period having a certain length ends to some extent. It is a production pattern that is premised on continuing for the time of, and within the second closing control period, a part of the production content in the same production pattern (winning explicit production) and the opening production before the big hit game ( By performing a right-handed game, a production that encourages the start of a big hit game) can be performed. Then, it is possible to end the second closing control period at an appropriate timing according to the understanding speed of each player for these effects, and to start the big hit game at an appropriate timing. A timer may be provided on the main control board so that the second closing control period is not extended more than necessary. When the specified time elapses after the end of the first closing control period, the main control board can forcibly set the jackpot start command. The main control board may decide whether or not to set the timer by lottery.

However, on the other hand, such a second closing control period is, for example, a period that is terminated based on at least the operation of the operation handle portion (a period having an indefinite length). If the game is played so that the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n by operating the operation handle immediately after the first closing control period having a certain length is completed, the winning explicit effect is cut in the middle of the effect. Alternatively, it may be possible to quickly proceed to the next production (production during the big hit game) without causing the production itself to appear (skipping the production). Further, as described above, when the production is advanced in this way, the game control itself is also advanced early, and the big hit game is started at an earlier stage. Therefore, while realizing the self-paced production of the liquid crystal display device 1400, for veteran players and the like, it is possible to enjoy efficient and stress-free quick game and production performance by advancing the game faster by skipping the production. I am trying to do it.

In particular, the time (game time) required for the opening production in which the game explanation for urging the right-handed hit is performed after the winning explicit production (big hit production) is performed is useless for the player in the second and subsequent games. Often it's only time. However, according to the extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit, if the time required for such an opening effect (game time) is prepared, but it functions only as wasted time for the player, this is appropriately used. It is cut to so that the production and the game can proceed faster. As a result, it becomes possible to provide each player with a production and a game suitable for each player.

By the way, the production (game) is also performed by cutting the production time (time for the explicit production) for showing the winning information as to whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. If you proceed faster, the final effect result (for example, whether the character wins the battle or not) in the extended effect pattern at the time of big hit will not be fully shown, and even the opening effect Will suddenly appear during the big hit game (round production, etc.). That is, in this case, the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit is ended in the middle stage before the effect result is sufficiently displayed, and even the opening effect can be omitted so that the big hit game can be started early. Become.

By the way, in the production within the second closing control period having an indefinite length, first, a winning effect that clearly indicates that the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device is performed. After that, an opening effect is performed to encourage the start of the big hit game by performing a right-handed game. However, after performing the opening effect for a predetermined time (or while performing the opening effect), a feature-length movie dedicated to a big hit may be played. According to the second closed control period having an indefinite length, even when such a redundant effect is realized, there is no adverse effect such as a decrease in the entertainment interest due to the extension of the effect, and the effect is produced. You will be able to widen the range of.

Further, in this second closing control period, operation acceptance for a predetermined operation means (operation button unit, etc.) is allowed, and the degree of expectation for the result of the game lottery is shown based on the operation of the button. It is also possible to perform an operation system effect (for example, an effect that suggests the degree of expectation regarding the number of rounds of the big hit game, the game state after the big hit game, and the like). That is, in this case, the player can realize an operation system effect that can be operated at his / her own pace without worrying about the expiration date (the period during which operation acceptance is allowed) that can be operated. Will be.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment is lit on the round display 648 at the time of winning the big hit and at the end of the first closing control period having a certain length from the stop of the special symbol. Is controlled so that is not performed. Then, by releasing the control on condition that the game ball has passed through the effective gate 6010n after the end of the first closing control period, the round display is turned on. As a result, in the second closing control period, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can perform the winning effect clearly while the round display is turned off. Further, no matter how much the production stagnation occurs in the second closing control period, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the number of rounds in the jackpot game.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), even when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extension effect pattern at the time of small hit) is selected based on the fact that the small hit is won, the special symbol is also displayed. Is extended with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol by the time (first closing control period with a certain length) until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up after the is stopped. So, I am trying to perform a display effect related to the big hit lottery. It should be noted that such a display effect can be realized, for example, as an effect in which a specific character is challenging a battle with an enemy character.

However, as described above, in the main control MPU4100a according to this embodiment, the closing control from the stop of the special symbol based on the winning of the small hit to the start of the small open hit game (small hit game). Regarding the period (opening period), it consists only of the time (first closing control period with a certain length) from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up. It is controlled to. Therefore, in such an extension effect pattern at the time of a small hit, a first closing control period (here, 8 seconds) having a certain length elapses, and a small open hit game (small hit game) is performed. At the time of starting, the effect content appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is clearly indicated as the winning information as to whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. I try to switch to. Here, the winning effect is clearly shown as a loss effect that clearly indicates that the result of the big hit lottery is a loss that was lost to a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. For example, a specific character It can be realized as a production in which the appearance of losing the battle with the enemy character is projected. Further, considering that one display effect pattern comprises a display effect related to a big hit lottery and a winning explicit effect in which the effect result appears, the extended effect pattern at the time of a small hit according to this embodiment is used. Is an effect pattern in which the effect content is extended to the period during which the small open hit game (small hit game) is performed after the first closing control period ends after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. I can say.

According to such an extended effect pattern at the time of a small hit, it is possible to shift to a display effect related to the next fluctuation (holding digestion of a special symbol) relatively quickly after it is shown that the loss is lost in the big hit. become. Furthermore, by extending the production content to the period during which the small opening hit game (small hit game) is being performed, the liquid crystal display is provided during the execution period of the small opening hit game (small hit game). As much attention is paid to the display device 1400, the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 becomes less noticeable. That is, in this case, since the production content proceeds in the same manner as in the so-called high-expected loss effect (loss effect in which the opening / closing member 2006 does not operate), the loss effect pattern for the extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit It comes to be positioned as (pair production), and it becomes difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device.

Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 2006 is similar to or the same as that of the opening / closing member 2006 when the small opening hit game (small hit game) corresponding to the winning of such a small hit is performed. There is no big hit game in which the opening / closing member 2006 is operated according to the operation mode of the above, and a latent effect state (a latent effect state using a so-called small hit) based on this is not prepared. That is, the extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit (see FIG. 97 (a)) and the extended effect pattern at the time of a small hit (see FIG. 97 (b)) in the first effect mode are only equipped with a small hit. It was made based on a technical idea (a technical idea opposite to the conventional one) that makes it difficult to grasp that it is a pachinko machine 1 that is being used, and based on such a technical idea, a special design is used. Considering that a series of behaviors at the time of a small hit such as fluctuation and stop, the first closing control period, and the opening of the big winning opening appear at the time of a big hit, the production contents in each production pattern are extended respectively. ..

In the extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit and the extension effect pattern at the time of a small hit according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the interval effect is produced after the special symbol is stopped. Whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device only after the time until the timer (8 seconds in this case) is up (the first closing control period) has elapsed. Information is shown (winning explicit production). However, with regard to these extended effect patterns, if the display effect related to the big hit lottery is performed in the form of extending to within the first closing control period, the display effect is within the first closing control period of the same display effect. In the effect portion that appears, the winning information as to whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device may be shown. Even in such a case, it is possible to shift to the display effect related to the next fluctuation (holding digestion of the special symbol) relatively quickly after it is shown that the loss is at least a big hit. In this case, in the jackpot explicit production, a special production for the jackpot to congratulate the character on winning the battle while it is already known that the jackpot has been won, or a right-handed strike is encouraged. Along with the appearance of a production to explain the game, in the directing of winning and losing at the time of a small hit, the character is defeated in the battle and regrets that it is already known that it is a loss that was lost to the big hit. A special production at the time of a small hit will appear.

In contrast to the extended effect pattern when in the first effect mode, in the second effect mode, an opportunity (bonus game) for obtaining a prize ball by the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is provided. If this is the case, the liquid crystal display device 1400 may select a challenge bonus effect pattern indicating that the prize ball has been won. This challenge bonus effect pattern is a display effect pattern in which not only a big hit but also a small hit is treated as one type (type of hit) as a hit for which a prize ball can be obtained by opening the big winning opening 2003.

For example, as shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected based on the winning of the jackpot in the second effect mode, the peripheral control MPU4150a starts the fluctuation of the special symbol. The display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started so as to match (based on the fact that the variation pattern reception flag is set). Then, the display effect started in this way is ended (based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set) so as to coincide with the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol.

However, this display effect does not show the lottery result related to the winning of the big hit, but wins the winning (big hit or small hit) where the opportunity to win the prize ball is given by opening the big winning opening 2003. It is shown whether or not it has been done (winning effect on the challenge bonus). More specifically, it is shown that when a big hit or a small hit is won, an opportunity to win a prize ball is given by opening the big winning opening 2003 within the fluctuation period of the special symbol. A specific display image will appear. In this case, although the player cannot grasp how many prize balls the player can obtain by opening the large prize opening 2003, the prize balls are obtained by opening the large winning opening 2003. What is possible will be graspable.

In this way, after a specific display image appears in the winning effect of the challenge bonus, the peripheral control MPU4150a is set to the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (at the time of big hit), and the big winning opening 2003 We will perform a pre-start production to start a challenge bonus production about how many prize balls the player can obtain by opening the. As will be described later, in the challenge bonus effect, the time (first closed control period having a certain length) from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up has elapsed. After that, the game starts on the condition that the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n.

Here, in the pre-start effect for starting the challenge bonus effect, the operation amount (right) of the operation handle portion is used by using the first closing control period until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up. Aiming at the effective gate 6010n by the hitting game) and the operation timing will be explained.

In the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, as such a pre-start effect, a countdown effect in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion is indicated by a countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 may be performed. This countdown effect is, for example, a countdown display of about 3 to 5 seconds is performed while explaining that the effective gate 6010n is aimed at by a right-handed game, and when this countdown display changes to "0". When the operation handle portion is operated with an appropriate operation amount, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n immediately after the first closing control period ends.

Therefore, according to such a countdown effect, when the operation handle is operated according to the instruction of the effect, the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up and the jackpot start command is set relatively quickly. The second closing control period ends, and by extension, the challenge bonus production and the jackpot game (special bonus game) regarding how many prize balls the player can obtain are started early. Will be. At this time, the round display lights up to indicate the number of rounds.

That is, according to such an effect progress in the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, the time (indefinite length) from the time-up of the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) until the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n. Even if the second closed control period) is compared with the case of the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit (see FIG. 97 (d)) in which the time does not exist, this is ignored in terms of effect. You will be able to make it as short as possible. That is, the above-mentioned countdown effect is intended for this purpose, and is described later by ending the second closing control period having an indefinite length at an early stage and cutting it. As in the case of the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit (see FIG. 97 (d)), only the first closing control period having a certain length appears as the interval period before the big hit game (before the challenge bonus effect). We are trying to encourage the progress of the game (directing progress) in the form. As a result, not only big hits but also small hits will be treated as one type (type of hits) as a hit that makes it possible to win prize balls by opening the big winning opening 2003, and in the challenge bonus production, long opening In addition to the winning game and the medium opening winning game, it becomes possible to perform an effect display as to which game mode appears, including the small opening winning game.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment is lit on the round display 648 at the time of winning the big hit and at the end of the first closing control period having a certain length from the stop of the special symbol. Is controlled so that is not performed. Then, by releasing the control on condition that the game ball has passed through the effective gate 6010n after the end of the first closing control period, the round indicator 648 is turned on. As a result, prior to the challenge bonus effect being performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, the player is given a big hit by lighting the round display 648 and the number of rounds in the big hit game (special bonus game) is given to the player. It will be avoided that it is easily grasped.

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU4150a according to this embodiment, after the countdown display is changed to "0", the time from the launch of the game ball to the passage through the effective gate 6010n is the following preceding effect (not shown). The time from the time-up of the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) to the passage of the game ball through the effective gate 6010n (the second closing with an indefinite length) is achieved. The existence of the control period) can be further concealed in a dramatic manner.

Although not shown, in the countdown effect according to this embodiment, the timing at which the countdown display changes to "0" is slightly earlier than the time-up of the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) (No. 3). It is set within the closing control period of 1. According to such a countdown effect, at least a part of the time from when the game ball is launched by the operation of the operation handle portion until the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n is the first closing control period and the second. Of the closed control period of, the game can be played so that it can be included as the time on the side of the first closed control period, and by extension, the second closed control period having an indefinite length is increased by that amount ( It becomes possible to shorten by the amount included as the time on the first closing control period side). In this case, the preceding effect is started in advance of the second closing control period, and as an effect that may straddle the first closing control period and the second closing control period. It will be positioned.

Here, as a series of production contents that lead from such a countdown effect to the challenge bonus effect through the preceding effect, for example, in the countdown effect, in addition to the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400, "the countdown display is" Attack the enemy character by starting the right-handed game at the timing when it becomes "0"! Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the effective gate 2500 (the flag corresponding to the jackpot start command is set), a challenge bonus effect that shows the result of the attack that was launched is started, etc. Can be realized by.

In addition, as a challenge bonus effect, for example, as a result of the attack that was launched, when the attack on the enemy character was avoided, it was shown that it was a game per small opening, and the attack on the enemy character was hit but could not be defeated. Sometimes it can be realized by showing that it is a game per medium opening, and when an enemy character collapses due to an attack, it is a game per long opening. Alternatively, when the attack hits the enemy character but cannot be defeated, it indicates that it is either a medium open hit game or a long open hit game, and in the subsequent round production, the medium open hit game and the long open hit game. It may be specified whether it is a winning game. According to such a challenge bonus effect, as long as the attack hits the enemy character, not only the amount of prize balls that can be obtained but also the possibility of small hits is eliminated, which is advantageous to the player. It will be possible to dramatically increase the degree of expectation of transition to a game state.

However, in such a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, it is assumed that the operation handle portion may not be operated for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect is changed to "0". That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time, but in this second closing control period, the countdown display is set to "0" on the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is more desirable to prevent new effects from appearing, such as displaying as it is, in order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation.

However, in the situation where the challenge bonus production pattern has appeared, such a situation where the production progress is stagnant is limited to the case where the big hit is won, and the challenge bonus production pattern at the time of the small hit described later ( In the case of FIG. 97 (d)), it cannot occur. That is, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained as much as the possibility that the game is performed per small opening is excluded while the production is stagnant (no production state) in which no production is newly performed. Not only that, but also the degree of expectation of transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player will be dramatically increased.

The countdown effect is realized by the countdown display, but it does not necessarily have to be counted as long as it is performed so that the specific timing at which the operation handle should be operated can be grasped. Good.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97 (d), even when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected based on the fact that the small hit is won in the second effect mode, the peripheral control MPU4150a is special. The display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started so as to coincide with the start of fluctuation of the symbol (based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set). Then, the display effect started in this way is ended (based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set) so as to coincide with the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol.

Similarly, in the challenge bonus production pattern at the time of a small hit, the prize ball due to the opening of the large winning opening 2003 in such a production (winning production related to the challenge bonus) performed during the fluctuation period of the special symbol. A specific display image appears showing that the opportunity to acquire is granted. As a result, the player cannot grasp how many prize balls the player can obtain by opening the large prize opening 2003, but the prize balls can be obtained by opening the large winning opening 2003. It will be possible to grasp what is said to be.

In addition, after a specific display image appears in the winning effect of the challenge bonus in this way, the peripheral control MPU4150a is based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (at the time of small hit) is set. A pre-start effect is performed to start a challenge bonus effect on how many prize balls a player can obtain by opening the large prize opening 2003.

However, as described above, at the time of winning the small hit, the special symbol is stopped during the closing control period (opening period) from the stop of the special symbol to the start of the small open hit game (small hit game). It consists only of the time until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up (the first closed control period with a certain length), and when the timer is timed up, the effective gate 6010n A game per small opening (small bonus game) is started regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed through the game (see FIG. 76).

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU4150a according to this embodiment, in the challenge bonus effect pattern of small hits, the operation of the operation handle portion (passage of the game ball to the effective gate 6010n) is originally intended to advance the game or effect. Even though it is not necessary, as a pre-start effect to start the challenge bonus effect, as in the case of the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the big hit described above, until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up. The first closing control period may be used to perform a countdown effect in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400.

According to the challenge bonus production pattern at the time of a small hit, when the operation handle part is operated according to the instruction of the same production, it leads to the challenge bonus production from the countdown production to the challenge bonus production at the time of the big hit. The challenge bonus production will be started by the same series of production contents as above. As a result, not only big hits but also small hits will be treated as one type (type of hits) as a hit that makes it possible to win prize balls by opening the big winning opening 2003, and in the challenge bonus production, long opening Not only the winning game and the medium opening winning game, but also the small opening winning game can be included, and it becomes possible to perform an effect display as to which game mode appears.

In the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of small hit, even though the small open hit game (small hit game) is started immediately after the end of the first closing control period, the countdown display is displayed in the countdown effect. Even after changing to "0", it is assumed that the operation handle may not be operated for a long time. In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment falsely starts the preceding effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the countdown display changes to "0", and is predetermined after the preceding effect is falsely started. When the temporary rolling time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the challenge bonus effect is also controlled to be falsely started.

In the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit, regardless of whether or not an operation system effect that requires operation on the operation handle is performed, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the challenge bonus effect is produced from the countdown effect to the preceding effect. A series of production contents that lead to will appear falsely (false production). Therefore, the player confirms whether or not the operation handle is operated and whether or not the game ball has passed through the effective gate 6010n, so that the player precedes the surrounding rubberneckers who are trying to confirm the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is possible to grasp that the game is performed per small opening, which makes it possible to immediately show an intellectual act such as interrupting the game.

As described above, the extended effect pattern in the first effect mode is the existence of the small hit itself by continuing the second closing control period having an indefinite length for a certain amount of time, as described above. It is a production pattern aimed at concealing, and after extending the production content to within the first closing control period with a certain length that also exists in the production pattern at the time of small hit, at the time of small hit Within the second closing control period, which cannot exist in the effect pattern, the opening effect before the jackpot game (the effect of urging the start of the jackpot game by performing the right-handed game) is performed. On the other hand, the challenge bonus effect pattern in the second effect mode aims to treat the small hit as one of the hits by preventing the second closed control period having an indefinite length from appearing as much as possible. It has a certain length that exists in the opening effect before the big hit game (the effect that encourages the start of the big hit game by performing the right-handed game) and the effect pattern at the time of the small hit. It is designed so that it can be completed within the first closing control period.

Such an effect on the premise that there is a second closed control period having an indefinite length by the extension effect pattern in the first effect mode and the challenge bonus effect pattern in the second effect mode. According to the structure (the effect structure in which the timing for prompting the right-handed game within the second closed control period is different), even if the display effect pattern is based on one effect command (the variation time of the special symbol is the same), It is possible to greatly differ the length of the production time required from the start of the change of the special symbol (decorative symbol) to the start of the big hit game between the first production mode and the second production mode. As a result, it becomes possible to realize a wide variety of productions with greatly different production contents without changing the logic on the main control MPU4100a side one by one.

By the way, according to the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of big hit (see FIG. 97 (c)) and the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of small hit (see FIG. 97 (d)), the display effect at the time of hit (specific). At the time when the display image) appears, at least a specific number of prize balls (for example, a small number of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment)) are provided with an opportunity to obtain prize balls so that they can be obtained. With the player knowing that it will be done, it will be performed as a challenge bonus production with a round lottery element such as how many prize balls can be added as a bonus. ..

Furthermore, when the number of prize balls is increased, there is a possibility that the game state (the game state in which the probability variation function and the time saving function are activated) that is advantageous to the player is changed. Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, a higher probability is obtained by adding the winning probability (3/400) of the winning without the operation of the conditional device to the winning probability (1/400) of the winning with the operation of the conditional device. With (1/100), not only can the prize ball be paid out to the player (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates), but also the game state can be shifted to the player's advantage. Will also be able to raise awareness. As a result, due to the winning probability of the big hit (special hit) set low, it is possible to avoid that only the monotonous loss effect is repeatedly displayed, and the deterioration of the game interest is suppressed. ..

Further, according to such a challenge bonus effect, even if a big hit is lost, the display effect (specific display image) at the time of hit appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when a specific condition is satisfied. In spite of the fact that the prize ball can be paid out to the player and the player is made aware of the change to the game state that is advantageous to the player, the big prize opening 2003 is a big hit. A specific image that does not appear when the player is elected (an image that appears when a false effect such as a preceding effect or a challenge bonus effect is performed even though there is no operation on the operation handle) can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. I am trying to do it. That is, in this case, until the big winning opening 2003 is opened according to the winning of the big hit, it can also function as a waiting effect period for whether or not a specific image (false effect) appears. In particular, when a specific image (false effect) appears, not only is there no change to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, but also the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player is the same specific image (false effect). This indicates that the jackpot has been won, coupled with the size of such a gap in the profits that the player can obtain, as the number of prize balls will be significantly smaller than when It becomes possible to further enhance the game entertainment when the effect (stagnation effect from the first closing control period) appears.

Then, according to the configuration in which these two effect modes are adopted, in the first effect mode in which the extension effect pattern can be selected, the player is asked to perform the small open hit game (small hit game). In the second production mode in which the challenge bonus production pattern can be selected, the production can be performed without being aware that the prize ball can be paid out (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates). When executing the open hit game (small hit game), it is possible to make the player aware that the prize ball can be paid out (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates). .. As a result, in the second production mode in which the challenge bonus production pattern can be selected, the probability is higher than in the first production mode in which the extension production pattern can be selected (the jackpot winning probability is "1/400", which is small. With a higher probability of winning "3/400" plus a higher probability of "1/100")), an effect that makes the player aware that the prize ball can be paid out will appear, and such an effect mode Probability of execution of a bonus game (opening of the large winning opening 2003 by the opening / closing member 2006) in which a prize ball can be paid out to the player without causing a change in the game state accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. Will be able to realize a deeper production as if it changes each time. It should be noted that such an effect can be realized in the second effect mode after making it difficult for the player to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small hit in the first effect mode. This is because the display effect is such that not only the big hit but also the small hit is treated as one of the hits that can be won by opening the big winning opening 2003.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU4150a) according to this embodiment, there are a first effect mode in which such an extension effect pattern can be selected and a second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected. It is provided with a mode compulsory control means for forcibly determining one of the effect modes and creating a mode compulsory period in which a change from the forcibly determined effect mode by the operation of the player is not allowed.

For example, the first predetermined period after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall (for example, the period until a predetermined month and day such as one month elapses) is forcibly determined in the first production mode. , The second predetermined period after the lapse of the first predetermined period (for example, the period until the predetermined month and day such as the next one month) is forcibly determined in the second production mode. When the control related to the creation of the above-mentioned mode compulsory period is performed, the big hit is performed for the first month by hiding the fact that the small hit is installed as described above. It operates as a pachinko machine 1 in which prize balls can be paid out to players based on the winning probability. On the other hand, for the next month, the small hit will be treated as one type of hit that makes it possible to win the prize ball by opening the big prize opening 2003, so that the winning probability of the big hit will be higher. It came to operate as a pachinko machine 1 in which prize balls can be paid out to players with a high probability, and although it is a pachinko machine 1 equipped with only one game specification, the first first predetermined Coupled with the fact that it was difficult to notice the existence of small hits during the period, it seems as if another pachinko machine with different game specifications, not to mention the content of the production on the liquid crystal display device 1400, was newly put into operation. You will be able to give a good impression to the player. After the second predetermined period has elapsed, the effect mode can be set according to the player's operation on the operation means during the demo effect.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 94, in the process of step S1233, the peripheral control MPU4150a first sets the first effect mode and the second effect mode based on the time information such as the calendar information and the time information of the built-in RTC4140aa. It is determined whether or not the mode is in the compulsory period in which the mode is forcibly determined to be one of the effect modes. As a result, when it is determined that the first production mode is forcibly determined (for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the first predetermined period after being delivered to the hall), or when the second production is performed. When it is determined that the mode is forcibly determined (for example, when it is in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period has elapsed), it is considered that the change of the effect mode by the operation of the player is not allowed. (NO in step S1233), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is temporarily terminated. That is, in this case, it waits for the variation pattern reception flag to be set (YES in step S1221) while the demo effect is being executed (YES in step S1232).

On the other hand, based on the time information such as the calendar information and the time information of the built-in RTC4140aa, it is determined that the mode is not in the above-mentioned mode compulsory period for which the first effect mode and the second effect mode are forcibly determined. When this is done (for example, when the second predetermined period has already passed), it is assumed that the effect mode can be changed by the player's operation (YES in step S1233), and then step S1234. Is processed.

In the process of step S1234, it is determined whether or not there is an operation by the player to change the effect mode. Here, the operation by the player is, for example, an operation on the operation button unit or the sub button, and when the main button or the sub button is operated while the demonstration effect is being performed, the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is conceivable to perform display control to make the effect mode selection screen appear. In this case, when such a selection screen appears, a specific effect mode is selected by operating the sub button 372, and the selected specific effect mode is determined by operating the main button. It is determined that there was an operation by the player to change the effect (YES in step S1234), and the setting process related to the effect mode is performed to change to the determined effect mode (step S1235).

It should be noted that the means to be operated by the player does not have to be the main button or the sub button of the operation button unit, and the player can perform a predetermined operation including a proximity operation using the touch panel. Just do it. Further, as the processing when there is an operation by the player, in addition to the control (appearance of the selection screen, the display at the time of selection, the display at the time of determination, etc.) that causes a change in the display on the liquid crystal display device 1400, for example, transparency. The player is informed that the production mode has been switched by changing the production mode of the predetermined decorative member, such as changing the emission color from the back surface of the game panel 1100 having sex (changing from blue to red, etc.). It may be shown to.

On the other hand, in the process of step S1221, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 92) is in the ON state (set), the main control board 4100 side. Assuming that the predetermined start condition (NO in step S301) is satisfied, the following steps S1222 to 1227 for starting the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are performed.

That is, the peripheral control MPU4150a first operates (reset) the fluctuation pattern reception flag to the OFF state (step S1222). Then, on this basis, it is determined whether or not the game state flag indicates that the game state is normally in the external disadvantageous game state (step S1223). The game state flag is operated so as to indicate the type of game state controlled after the big hit game, for example, at the end of the big hit game (for example, the big hit display process (step S1230)).

Then, when the game state flag indicates that the game state is normally in the external disadvantageous game state (YES in step S1223), then, as the process of step S1224, the setting state of the effect mode in the process of step S1235 or the built-in RTC4140aa Based on the time information such as the calendar information and the time information of the above, it is determined whether or not the first effect mode is set. As a result, when the first effect mode is forcibly determined, or when the first effect mode is set during the period when the player is allowed to change the effect mode. , It is determined that the first effect mode is set (YES in step S1224), and then the process of step S1225a is performed.

In the process of step S1225a, the processing is stored in the variation display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU4150a) while referring to the effect pattern table when the first effect mode is set. The effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are determined based on the information related to the variation pattern and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a).

Next, the advance notice selection process for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect based on the advance notice determination random number is executed (step S1226a). That is, not only the effect pattern on the liquid crystal display device 1400 but also the execution frequency of the advance notice effect and the effect content thereof change depending on whether the first effect mode is in the second effect mode or the second effect mode. In the selection process, in the advance notice effect table when the first effect mode is set, the effect mode (preliminary effect pattern) related to the advance notice effect is determined based on an appropriate advance notice determination random number.

Then, a display command (notice command) associated with each of the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the advance notice effect pattern in the first effect mode determined in this way is set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to "1". (Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the advance notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 91, so that the liquid crystal display device 1400 controls the liquid crystal and the sound. Through the control by the unit 4160 side, the display effect of the content (extended effect pattern, etc.) indicated by the display command appears, and the advance notice effect of the content indicated by the advance notice command appears.

On the other hand, in the process of step S1224, the second effect mode is set during the period in which the second effect mode is forcibly determined, or in the period in which the effect mode can be changed by the operation of the player. When it is in the state, it is determined that it is not in the set state of the first effect mode (NO in step S1224), and then the process of step S1225b is performed. In the process of step S1225b, the processing is stored in the variation display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU4150a) while referring to the effect pattern table when the second effect mode is set. The effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are determined based on the information related to the variation pattern and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a). Next, in the advance notice effect table when the second effect mode is set, the effect mode (notice effect) related to the advance notice effect based on an appropriate advance notice determination random number, including the determination of whether or not to execute the advance notice effect. The advance notice selection process in which the pattern) is determined is executed (step S1226b).

Then, a display command (notice command) associated with each of the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the advance notice effect pattern in the second effect mode determined in this way is set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to "1. (Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the advance notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 91, so that the liquid crystal display device 1400 controls the liquid crystal and the sound. Through the control by the unit 4160 side, the display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and the advance notice effect of the content indicated by the advance notice command appears.

On the other hand, in the process of step S1223, when it is determined that the game state flag does not normally indicate that the game state is in the external disadvantageous game state (NO in step S1223), the details are omitted, but the current game state is used. An effect pattern and a stop symbol are determined based on the corresponding effect table (step S1229), and an appropriate advance notice is included in the advance notice effect table according to the current gaming state, including a judgment as to whether or not to execute the advance notice effect. The advance notice selection process in which the effect mode (notice effect pattern) related to the advance notice effect is determined based on the determination random number is executed (step S1230).

Then, a display command (notice command) associated with each of the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the advance notice effect pattern according to the current game state determined in this way is set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to "1". (Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the advance notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 91, so that the liquid crystal display device 1400 controls the liquid crystal and the sound. Through the control by the unit 4160 side, the display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and the advance notice effect of the content indicated by the advance notice command appears.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination process (step S1225a) in the first effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 95, in the process of step S1225a, first, the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 92) is read, and the variation pattern command is used. The associated effect pattern is determined (step S1301). Here, in the effect pattern determination table in the first effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command (see FIGS. 101 and 102), 1 Only one effect pattern may be associated (see FIGS. 98 and 99). When a plurality of production patterns are associated with each other, one of the production patterns is determined based on the result of the production lottery using a predetermined random number for production, or one of the productions is based on the type of jackpot. The pattern will be decided.

After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, the stop symbol (combination of symbols at the time of stop) that appears when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as will be described later, the decorative symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 should be adjusted to the change stop of the special symbol, including the case where the extension effect pattern in which the display effect is not terminated when the special symbol is stopped is adopted. It is supposed to stop (based on the stop command being set).

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU4150a according to this embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, an "extended effect pattern" and an "extended effect pattern, although it is not an extension effect pattern, can be prepared as a paired effect of the extension effect pattern". It is determined whether any of the effect patterns of the "loss effect pattern" is determined by the process of step S1301 (step S1302). As a result, when any of these effect patterns is determined, when a predetermined stop symbol at the time of extension (specific reach loss symbol or the like) is determined (step S1303), the step S1225a (FIG. 94) is determined. Refer to) to end the process. That is, in this case, during the opening period, the content of the display effect centering on the story such as the character is extended (developed) under the state where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the stopped symbol at the time of extension. It will continue to appear, after which the result of whether or not the jackpot was won will be clarified.

On the other hand, a normal production pattern (Fig.) That is different from both the "extension effect pattern" and the "loss effect pattern that is not an extension effect pattern but can be prepared as a pair effect of the extension effect pattern". When 98 (c), see FIG. 101) is determined, the stop symbol according to the result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the winning information command is determined through the processes of steps S1304 to S1310.

That is, first, it is determined whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the process of step S1106 (FIG. 92) (step S1304). As a result, when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, the process of the step S1225a (see FIG. 94) is terminated when the stop symbol dedicated to the big hit is determined (step S1305).

Further, when the result of the big hit lottery is not a big hit (NO in step S1304), it is determined whether or not the result is a small hit (step S1306), and when the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit. , The stop symbol dedicated to the small hit is determined (step S1307). However, in the first effect mode, all the effect commands are associated with the extension effect pattern so that the existence of the small hit is concealed. , It is determined that the result of the big hit lottery is not a small hit, and then, as the process of step S1308, it is determined whether or not it is a display effect (highly expected loss effect) in which reach is formed.

As a result, in the case of the display effect in which the reach is formed, the process of the step S1225a (see FIG. 94) is terminated when the stop symbol of the reach loss is determined (step S1309), whereas the reach is formed. If it is not the display effect to be performed, the process of step S1225a (see FIG. 94) is terminated when the irregular stop symbol from which reach is not formed is determined (step S1310).

FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination process (step S1225b) in the second effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 96, in the process of step S1225b, first, the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 92) is read, and the variation pattern command is used. The associated effect pattern is determined (step S1321). Here, also in the effect pattern determination table in the second effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command, or only one effect pattern is associated with it. You may be. When a plurality of production patterns are associated with each other, one of the production patterns is determined based on the result of the production lottery using a predetermined random number for production, or one of the productions is based on the type of jackpot. The pattern will be decided.

After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, the stop symbol (combination of symbols at the time of stop) that appears when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as described above, in the second effect mode, the decorative symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol when the lottery result that enables the prize ball to be obtained is obtained ( The stop symbol (specific display image) at the time of hit is stopped (based on the fixed stop command being set).

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU4150a according to this embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, a big hit is made based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the process of step S1106 (see FIG. 90). It is determined whether or not the result of the lottery is a hit (big hit or small hit) in which the prize ball can be obtained (step S1322, step S1324). As a result, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit or small hit) in which the prize ball can be obtained (YES in step S1322 or YES in step S1324), the opening of the big winning opening 2003 is confirmed. When the bonus challenge stop symbol that can be grasped is determined (step S1323), the process of the step S1225b (see FIG. 94) is terminated. As the bonus challenge stop symbol, for example, a special symbol that is not a component of the jackpot symbol combination is made to appear during the fluctuation, and then the special symbol is included in the symbol combination at the time of stop. can do.

In this case, in the opening period after the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, for example, at least a specific number of prize balls (for example, a small number of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment)) can be obtained. A round lottery element such as how many prize balls can be added as a bonus while the player knows that the opportunity to get prize balls will be provided. A certain challenge bonus production will be performed.

On the other hand, if the result of the big hit lottery is not a hit (big hit or small hit) for which a prize ball can be obtained (NO in both processes of step S1322 and step S1324), then as the process of step S1325. , A judgment is made as to whether or not the display effect forms a reach.

As a result, in the case of the display effect in which the reach is formed, the process of the step S1225b (see FIG. 94) is terminated when the stop symbol of the reach loss is determined (step S1326), whereas the reach is formed. If it is not the display effect to be performed, the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 94) is terminated when the irregular stop symbol from which reach is not formed is determined (step S1327).

Hereinafter, an example of a display effect appearing when such various processes (steps S121 to S1240) by the peripheral control MPU4150a according to this embodiment will be described will be described. FIG. 98 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any one of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 89 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

As shown in FIG. 98 (a), the fluctuation time shown in FIG. 89 is based on the fact that the jackpot was won on the main control MPU4100a side when the first effect mode is set. Assuming that the fluctuation related to the special symbol having Ta1 is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect a at the time of a big hit associated with the effect command "01H" (for example, a specific mission a). The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern with the content of whether or not the character A can succeed (whether or not the character A can defeat the enemy) is started. Then, the extended effect pattern (effect command "01H") having the content of the display effect a started in this way is even in a situation where the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped with the passage of the variation time Ta1 has arrived. , The display effect a is continued without ending (without making the specific mission a successful or unsuccessful).

In addition, when the extension effect pattern is dynamically displayed when the effect command "01H" is used, the decorative pattern is also started to change. However, as described above, the variation of the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension.

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU4150a according to this embodiment, when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped within the time of the fluctuation time Ta1 in the lost stop mode at the time of extension. Then, under the condition that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect a on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the passage of the fluctuation time Ta1. As for, the continuation expectation effect as to whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not the character A who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up) is performed.

That is, in this case, since the display effect a (no development, loss) described later associated with the command “03H” shown in FIG. 89 is prepared, the display effect a even after the timing t1 has passed. When is continued, this functions as "post-development display effect a (effect with a chance to succeed a specific mission a)". Therefore, when this "post-development display effect a" appears, the special symbol is displayed from the player's side even though it is in the first closing control period after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. It will be possible to grasp it as being still fluctuating. Further, the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1400 can also be grasped as being maintained in the temporarily stopped state even though it is in the state after the fixed stop, and by extension, at the time of the above-mentioned extension. It will be possible to make it appear that there is still a chance to show that the jackpot has been won in a way that the loss stop mode is overturned.

However, at this time, the extended effect pattern (effect command "01H") having the content of the display effect a is performed in the large display area (center or the entire display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the above, the variable display of the decorative pattern shall be performed only in a small display area (a portion of the liquid crystal display device 1400 that is difficult to be noticed, such as an edge portion of the display area) for such a display effect a. However, the player is made to grasp the result of the big hit lottery depending on whether or not the specific mission a in the display effect a can be succeeded without paying attention to the movement of the decorative pattern (the result is displayed by the character). More desirable to do.

That is, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (big hit) associated with the effect command "01H", in the first closing control period after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the actual closing control period is performed. However, despite the fact that the decorative design has been fixedly stopped, we succeeded in producing continuous expectations at the time of temporary stop (for example, character A who has fallen under the attack of the enemy has stood up). Under the condition that it is held, "display effect a after development" will appear. In this "display effect a after development", using the time until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU4100a side, for example, the appearance of the character A confronting the enemy again is projected. A production will be made as to whether or not mission a can be successful.

However, as will be described later, such "post-development display effect a (effect as to whether or not a specific mission a can be succeeded)" in the first closed control period on the main control MPU4100a side is shown in FIG. It is also performed in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the command "02H". And as described above, in order to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small hit when in the first effect mode, the display effect a (small hit) is a big hit defeat. It is more desirable to shift to the next fluctuation (holding digestion of special symbols) relatively soon after is shown.

Therefore, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (big hit) associated with the effect command "01H", a specific effect is specified until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period arrives. The appearance of success in mission a (character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, and the effect of whether or not a specific mission a can be successful (character A attacks the enemy and this succeeds). Only the production (whether or not) appears. As a result, the jackpot explicit effect a can appear in the form of showing the success of the specific mission a after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period, and is associated with the effect command "01H". The displayed display effect pattern functions as a "hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content a".

However, as described above, in the extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit, after the first closing control period having a certain length ends, the closing control period is extended to have an indefinite length. The closing control period of 2 is further appearing. Then, within the second closing control period, a part of the effect content in the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit (big hit explicit effect a) and the opening effect before the big hit game (the big hit game is started by performing the right-handed game). It is possible to perform a production that encourages what should be done). Then, when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n as a result of operating the operation handle portion at an appropriate timing according to the understanding speed of each player for these effects (timing tx), the second closing control period is set. After the end, the big hit game and the production during the big hit game will be started. The details of the production during the jackpot game will be described later.

Further, this is also as described above with reference to FIG. 97A, but the second closing control period from the timing t2 to the timing tx is terminated based on the operation of the operation handle portion. Since it is (a period having an indefinite length), for example, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n by operating the operation handle portion immediately after the first closing control period having a certain length ends. When the game is played so that the jackpot explicit production a and the opening production are cut at that point, or the production itself is almost not made to appear (effect skipping), the next production (production during the jackpot game) is forcibly advanced. The Rukoto.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), based on the fact that the small hit was won on the main control MPU4100a side when the first effect mode is set, FIG. 89 Assuming that the fluctuation related to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta2 (here, it is described as being set to the same time as the fluctuation time Ta1) shown in the above is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 , Display effect a at the time of a small hit associated with the effect command "02H" (for example, whether a specific mission a can be successful (whether character A can defeat the enemy), etc.) The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern with the content is started. Then, when the extension effect pattern (effect command "02H") having the content of the display effect a thus started is also the extension effect pattern (see FIG. 98 (a)) associated with the effect command "01H". Similarly, even in a situation where the timing t1 at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped due to the passage of the fluctuation time Ta2 has arrived, the display effect a is not terminated (without making the specific mission a successful or unsuccessful). ) Continue this.

Further, even when the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command "02H" is dynamically displayed, the decorative pattern is started to change. Further, regarding the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the extension effect pattern (FIG. 98) associated with the effect command "01H" is also determined to stop with the loss stop mode at the time of extension at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. This is the same as in (see (a)). In addition, as for the loss stop mode at the time of this extension, although the lottery result of the big hit is different between the big hit and the small hit, a single display mode is adopted, and the display mode is distinguished. Not done.

Furthermore, under the condition that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the passage of the fluctuation time Ta2. Regarding a, it is also about the point that the continuous expectation production (for example, whether or not the character A who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up) is performed as to whether or not this is continued. This is the same as for the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 98 (a)) associated with the effect command “01H”.

That is, even in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command "02H", in the first closing control period after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, In fact, even though the decorative design has been fixedly stopped, we succeeded in producing continuous expectations at the time of temporary stop (for example, character A who has fallen under the attack of the enemy has stood up). With a feeling, "display production a after development" will appear. Then, in this "display effect a after development", for example, a state in which the character A confronts the enemy again is projected by using the time until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU4100a side. A production is performed as to whether or not a specific mission a can be successful.

Furthermore, similarly, until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period arrives, the appearance of success in the specific mission a (character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, and it is specific. An effect on whether or not mission a can be successful (an effect such as whether or not character A attacks an enemy and this is successful) appears. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 97 (b), the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command "02H" has a certain length. After the end of the first closing control period, the second closing control period having an indefinite length does not appear further in the form of extending the closing control period. Therefore, it is specified from the end timing t2 of the first closing control period to the end timing t3 of the control related to the opening of the large winning opening 2003 in the small opening hit game (small hit game) when the effect command "02H" is issued. The loss explicit production a will appear in the form of showing the failure of the mission a of. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "02H" functions as a "loss effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content a".

In this loss explicit effect a, for example, the attack by the character A is evaded and the enemy escapes, and then the appearance of the character A regretting is projected, which is performed as a big hit defeat effect.

According to the extended effect pattern associated with the effect commands "01H" and "02H", the opening end timing t3 (or the second closing control period) of the special winning opening 2003 is started from the start timing t0 of the special symbol. Since the time until the end of the big hit explicit effect a) will function as one effect for winning the big hit, it will be possible to direct the player's attention to such an effect. It becomes possible to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the opening of the big winning opening 2003 and the small hit when the loss explicit effect a is being performed.

In order to obtain such effects, it is necessary to prevent the player from obtaining any information even if the player confirms that the large winning opening 2003 is open (an event that can be a reason for confirming the opening). It is important to keep the configuration excluding. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the big hit game in which the big winning opening 2003 is opened in the same or similar opening mode as in the small opening hit game (small hit game) can be executed, the opening is confirmed by confirming the opening. After that, it becomes possible to recognize that the gaming state may be changed on condition that the condition device is operated. In addition, since the player can obtain information that may be an opportunity to quit the game, such as winning a big hit with few balls that do not match the low winning probability of the big hit, pay attention to the opening of the big winning opening 2003. It may be one of the factors that make you turn.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 98 (c), when the first production mode is set, the main control MPU4100a side does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). ) Is obtained, and the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. 89 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t1) is generated. If it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, is it possible to succeed in the display effect a (for example, a specific mission a) at the time of loss associated with the effect command "03H" (character A)? The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern with the contents of) (whether or not can defeat the enemy) is started. However, the display effect pattern (effect command "03H") having the content of the display effect a started in this way is displayed when the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped with the passage of the variation time Ta3 arrives. End this without extending the production a (in the form of failing a specific mission a).

More specifically, even when the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (no development) at the time of loss associated with the effect command "03H" is dynamically displayed, the change of the decorative pattern is started. Further, even in the case of the change of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension in order to make a definite stop with the loss stop mode at the time of extension at the timing t1 at which the change of the special symbol is stopped. ing. Regarding the mode of stopping the loss at the time of this extension, a single display mode appears at the time of a big hit, at the time of a small hit, and at the time of the loss.

Further, under the condition that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect a on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Ta3. Regarding, it is also directed that the continuation expectation production (for example, whether or not the character A who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up) is performed as to whether or not this is continued. This is the same as for the extension effect pattern (see FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b)) associated with the commands “01H” and “02H”.

However, in the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (no development) at the time of loss associated with the effect command "03H", the continuous expected effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, from the enemy). Character A, who has been attacked and collapsed, did not stand up), so that the player can know that he has failed a specific mission. By preparing such an effect pattern, the effect pattern that continues after the timing t1 shown in FIGS. 98 (a), (b), and (d) can function as an effect pattern with development. become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 98 (d), when the first production mode is set, a loss (pure) in which neither the big hit nor the small hit is won on the main control MPU4100a side. Based on the fact that the loss) was obtained, the variation related to the special symbol having the variation time Ta4 shown in FIG. 89 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3). Is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, is it possible to succeed in the display effect a (for example, a specific mission a) at the time of loss associated with the effect command "04H" (character)? The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern with the content of (whether or not A can defeat the enemy) is started. However, when the display effect pattern (effect command "03H") having the content of the display effect a started in this way is the effect commands "01H" to "03H" even though it is a non-extended display effect pattern. Even if the timing t1 arrives due to the passage of the fluctuation time Ta1 to Ta3 of the special symbol, the display effect a is not terminated (the specific mission a is continued without success or failure). .. Furthermore, when the display effect pattern (effect command "04H") is dynamically displayed, the variation of the decorative symbol is started, but the variation of the decorative symbol is also continued without being terminated at the above timing t1. It has become.

That is, in the case of loss (pure loss), unlike the case of a big hit or a small hit, not only the time required for opening control of the big winning opening 2003 but also this is maintained in the closed state prior to the opening of the big winning opening 2003. Since the first closed control period is not prepared and the next fluctuation is immediately performed, it is difficult to extend the time required for the display effect a with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

In this regard, regarding the display effect pattern (display effect a) associated with the effect command "04H", in the main control MPU4100a, from the fluctuation start timing t0 at the time of a small hit to the opening end timing t3 of the large winning opening 2003. It is prepared to be adopted when a variation time Ta4 having a length corresponding to the time as a reference is selected. Therefore, in this display effect pattern (display effect a), the display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is the same as in the case of the display effect pattern (display effect a) associated with the effect commands "01H" to "03H". Although the effect with the contents of the above appears, the special symbol is not stopped at the timing t1, and the display effect has a longer time in the first place.

That is, in this case, with respect to any of the fluctuations of the special symbol and the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol among those symbols is not fixedly stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension at the above timing t1. , As in the case of the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands "01H" to "03H", when the timing t1 is extended, which is only an intermediate stage for the fluctuation time Ta4. Temporarily stop in the loss stop mode. Then, under the condition that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension, whether or not the display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is continued until the timing t1 arrives. (For example, whether or not the character A who has fallen under the attack of the enemy can stand up) will be performed. In addition, the loss stop mode at the time of this extension is a single display even though the lottery result and the fluctuation time of the big hit are different between the big hit, the small hit, and the loss (pure loss). Aspects are adopted, and there is no distinction between the display modes.

And, in this way, with the decorative design temporarily stopped, we succeeded in producing continuous expectations (for example, character A, who has fallen under the attack of the enemy, stood up). Then, "display effect a after development" will appear. However, after this, the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is not returned to the fluctuating state again, and the display effect a is similarly subjected to the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands "01H" to "03H". In the small display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (a part that is difficult to pay attention to, such as the edge of the display area), the stopped state (fixed stop when "01H" to "03H", provisional when "04H" (Stop) will be maintained until timing t2.

In this "display effect a after development", there is an effect as to whether or not a specific mission a can be succeeded, for example, a state in which character A confronts an enemy again is projected within the time of fluctuation time Ta4. Will be done. However, as in the case of the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands "01H" to "03H", it seems that the specific mission a was successful (character A is an enemy) until the timing t2 arrives. (Defeat) is not shown, and only the effect about whether or not a specific mission a can be successful (character A attacks the enemy and whether or not this is successful) appears. ing.

Then, after the timing t2, it seems that the specific mission a has failed until the end timing t3 of the control for opening the large winning opening 2003 in the small opening hit game (small hit game) when the production command "02H" is issued. The loss explicit effect a will appear in the form shown. In this loss explicit production a, as in the case of the production command "02H", for example, the attack by the character A is evaded and the enemy escapes, and after that, the appearance that the character A regrets is projected. It is performed as a defeated production. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "04H" functions as a "loss effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content a".

As described above, in the first effect mode, based on the result of the big hit lottery being a loss, a specific loss effect pattern (effect command “) in which a specific effect content (display effect a) appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the display control related to "04H") is performed, when a specific fluctuation time (fluctuation time Ta4) is determined on the main control MPU4100a side, within the determined specific fluctuation time (fluctuation time Ta4). The display control for a specific loss effect pattern is performed so that a specific effect content (display effect a) appears. Nevertheless, for the above-mentioned specific loss effect pattern (effect command "04H") in which a specific effect content (display effect a) appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the result of the big hit lottery. When the display control related to the hit effect pattern (effect command "01H") is performed, the fluctuation time (variation time Ta1) shorter than the specific fluctuation time (variation time Ta4) is determined on the main control MPU4100a side. At that time, not only the determined short fluctuation time (variation time Ta1) but also a longer time including at least a predetermined interval period (first closing control period, second closing control period) is set as the effect time. Then, the display control related to the specific hit effect pattern is performed so that the specific effect content (display effect a) appears within this effect time.

According to such an effect method, even in a predetermined interval period after the special symbol is stopped, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can perform a winning effect as to whether or not a hit has been won and an opening effect. Become. In addition, these effects can be appropriately cut to allow the effects and the game to proceed, so that the effect progress (game progress) at a good tempo can be realized. In addition, when the display effect pattern of such a specific effect content (display effect a) appears, a noteworthy effect element is added to whether or not the special symbol is stopped in the middle of the process. When the suspension is confirmed, it will be possible to grasp that an opportunity to win a prize ball will be given by opening the large winning opening 2003, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

In addition, by preparing the display effect pattern for the effect command "04H" for the extended effect pattern for the effect commands "01H" and "02H", the "display effect a after development" can be obtained. It is now possible to avoid having to set the big hit expectation when it appears within the range constrained by the appearance ratio of the big hit and the small hit, and the small hit is installed. Even under such a production system that makes it difficult to recognize the fact, it becomes possible to perform a production design with a higher degree of freedom as shown in FIG. 89.

Further, in the display effect pattern when the effect command is "04H", the special symbol is changed even after the timing t1, so that even if the player confirms the change state of the special symbol, there is no problem. Absent. Then, by preparing such a non-extended effect pattern in a form of being mixed with the above-mentioned extended effect pattern, even when the stopped state of the special symbol in the extended effect pattern is confirmed, the player can be informed. On the other hand, it will be possible to raise awareness that may be misunderstood.

Further, in the display effect pattern when the effect command is "04H", the large prize opening 2003 is not opened when the loss explicit effect a is performed. Therefore, when the player confirms the large prize opening 2003. There is no problem even if there is. Then, by preparing such a non-open loss explicit effect a in a form of being mixed with the loss explicit effect a at the time of the above effect command "02H", the large winning opening 2003 in the loss explicit effect a is opened. Even if is confirmed, it will be possible to encourage the player to be aware that it may be misunderstood.

In the peripheral control MPU4150a according to this embodiment, in the display effect pattern when the effect commands are "01H", "02H", and "04H", a specific mission a is used until the timing t2 arrives. Whether or not it succeeded (whether or not character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, but whether or not it succeeded in a specific mission a prior to the arrival of timing t2 (character A) Whether or not to defeat the enemy) may be indicated. That is, in this case, after the same result display appears, the big hit explicit effect or the loss explicit effect is performed, but even with such an effect method, in the small hit display effect a, the small hit time Most of the first closing control period of the above is used for the display effect a, and after that, a big hit defeat effect appears, such as displaying a state in which character A regrets, so that the big hit defeat effect is performed. It is possible to shift to the next fluctuation (holding digestion of a special symbol) relatively quickly after being broken.

By the way, as described above, such a display effect appears when any of the effect commands "01H" to "04H" shown in FIG. 89 is received from the main control MPU4100a side in the first effect mode. Is. Then, the player wins the big hit with the winning probability of the big hit without being aware of the existence of the small hit which is not particularly required to realize such playability (directiveness) in the first production mode. You will enjoy the game about whether or not it will be played.

However, even when any of the effect commands "01H" to "04H" shown in FIG. 89 is received from the main control MPU4100a side, when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU4100a The production commands "01H" to "04H" from the side, as well as the content of the production itself, and even though there is no change in the normal external disadvantageous game state, the big prize opening 2003 by winning a small hit By changing the display of the production content on the premise of opening the production mode and actively adopting it, the chance frequency of winning the prize ball by opening the large winning opening 2003 is compared with when in the first production mode. We are trying to realize the playability (directability) as if the number was greatly increased.

That is, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), it is shown in FIG. 89 based on the fact that the jackpot was won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the second effect mode is set. Assuming that the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the content of the display effect a'at the time of a big hit associated with the effect command "01H". The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern and the variation of the decorative pattern are started respectively.

However, the content of the display effect a'in the second effect mode is different from that of the display effect a in the first effect mode. For example, is it possible to succeed in a specific mission a'(this implementation)? In the form of, a display effect pattern (challenge) with contents such as whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with a bonus challenge stop symbol that makes it possible to grasp that the opening of the grand prize opening 2003 is confirmed). It is prepared as a bonus production pattern). Therefore, the variable display of the decorative pattern is also performed over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (at least in a place that is easily noticed, such as the central portion of the display area). In this way, in the second effect mode, attention is paid to the movement of the decorative symbol, and the big hit depends on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. The result of the lottery is made to be grasped by the player.

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU4150a according to this embodiment, the display form of the decorative symbol is also different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode. For example, the decorative symbol in the first effect mode is a relatively small symbol image mainly composed of numbers, while the decorative symbol in the second effect mode is displayed as a relatively large symbol image mainly composed of characters. In the second effect mode, the decorative pattern is set as a display form that is more easily noticed.

Then, in the non-extended display effect pattern when the effect command "01H" is used, for example, such a decorative symbol is stopped in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears in the fluctuation time Ta1 until the timing t1 arrives. A display effect a'with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to display appears, and at the timing t1 when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, it is possible to win a prize ball by opening the large winning opening 2003. The decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line so that the player can grasp that it will be done. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "01H" functions as a "hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content a'".

Further, when the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped in the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the liquid crystal display device 1400 uses the first closing control period, and the player opens the grand prize opening 2003. As a pre-start effect of the challenge bonus effect on how many prize balls can be obtained, a countdown effect a'indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed. I am trying to do it.

Here, as described above, the countdown effect a'is that, for example, a countdown display of about 3 to 5 seconds is performed while explaining that the effective gate 6010n is aimed at by a right-handed game, and this countdown is performed. If the operation handle unit is operated with an appropriate operation amount when the display changes to "0", the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n immediately after the first closing control period ends.

Therefore, according to such a countdown effect a', when the operation handle portion is operated as instructed by the effect, the end timing t2 of the first closing control period is set as shown in FIG. 98 (a). As soon as the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n immediately after the arrival, the end timing tx of the second closing control period arrives earlier than in the case of the first effect mode. As a result, the challenge bonus effect on how many prize balls the player can obtain is started relatively early after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period arrives. In the production, it is shown which opening mode (long opening hit game, medium opening hit game, small opening hit game) the large winning opening 2003 is opened. That is, in this case, the player launches a game ball against the big winning opening 2003 not only in the big hit game but also in the small open hit game (small hit game), and thus when the player is in the first production mode. In comparison with the above, the playability (directability) as if the frequency of chances of winning a prize ball by opening the large prize opening 2003 is greatly increased will be realized. The details of the production during the jackpot game will be described later.

By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 97 (c), in such a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, the operation is performed for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect a'is changed to "0". It is also assumed that the handle part may not be operated. That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time, but in this second closing control period, the countdown display is set to "0" on the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is more desirable to prevent new effects from appearing, such as displaying as it is, in order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation.

However, in the situation where the challenge bonus production pattern has appeared, such a situation where the production progress is stagnant is limited to the case where the big hit is won, and the challenge bonus production pattern at the time of the small hit described later ( In the case of FIGS. 97 (d) and 98 (b)), this cannot occur. That is, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained as much as the possibility that the game is performed per small opening is excluded while the production is stagnant (no production state) in which no production is newly performed. Not only that, but also the degree of expectation of transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player will be dramatically increased.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), based on the fact that the small hit was won on the main control MPU4100a side when the second effect mode is set, FIG. 89 Assuming that the fluctuation related to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta2 (here, it is described as being set to the same time as the time of timing t0 to t1) shown in the above (timing t0) is started, the liquid crystal display device. In 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a'at the time of a small hit associated with the effect command "02H" and the variation of the decorative symbol are started, respectively.

Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command "02H") having the content of the display effect a'started in this way also has, for example, such a decorative pattern in the variable time Ta2 until the timing t1 arrives. , Bonus challenge A display effect a'with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to display a stop display with a stop display mode appears, and at the timing t1 when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, it is large. The decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line so that the player can grasp that the prize ball can be acquired by opening the winning opening 2003. It becomes. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "02H" functions as a "hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content a'".

However, as described above, when the small hit is won, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from the stop of the special symbol to the start of the small open hit game (small hit game). It consists only of the time until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up (the first closed control period with a certain length), and when the timer is timed up, the effective gate 6010n The small open hit game (small hit game) is started regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed through the game (see FIG. 86).

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU4150a according to this embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern when the effect command is "02H", the decorative pattern is the same as in the case of the display effect pattern when the effect command is "01H". When the player is confirmed and stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, how many prize balls can be obtained by the player by opening the large winning opening 2003 using the first closing control period? As a pre-start effect of the challenge bonus effect as to whether or not it is a thing, the countdown effect a'in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed.

That is, in the display effect pattern when in the second effect mode, both the big hit and the small hit are treated in the same way as the hit to open the big winning opening 2003, and the variation of the decorative pattern is started. There is no distinction in the production content from timing t0 to the challenge bonus effect, and when the operation handle is operated according to the instructions of the effect, the challenge bonus is passed from the countdown effect a'to the preceding effect (not shown). The challenge bonus production will be started by the same series of production contents as in the case of the challenge bonus production pattern (production command "01H") at the time of a big hit, which leads to the production. Therefore, not only the big hit but also the small hit will be treated as one type (type of hit) as the hit that can win the prize ball by opening the big prize opening 2003, and in the challenge bonus production, the long open hit In addition to the game and the game per medium opening, the game including the game per small opening can be displayed to indicate which game mode appears. As a result, as compared with the case of the first production mode, the playability (production) as if the frequency of chances of winning a prize ball by opening the large winning opening 2003 is greatly increased is realized. .. Of the long-opening game, the medium-opening game, and the small-opening game, the small-opening game ends in a relatively short time, so the small hits A to E and the small hits are small. Whether or not the hit is won may be made available to the player by displaying a specific image that does not appear when the big hit is won in the production within the first closing control period.

In this way, the display effect pattern when the effect command is "02H" is a display effect pattern based on one effect command, but-A small hit is a no-chance loss where the opportunity to win a prize ball is not given ( An extended production pattern in the first production mode that is handled (similar to the production pattern at the time of pure loss (production command "04H"), and a small hit as a high chance hit that gives an opportunity to win a prize ball ( It is selectively executed as one of the non-extended display effect patterns (challenge bonus effect patterns) in the second effect mode that are handled (similar to the effect pattern at the time of big hit (effect command "01H")). .. That is, in this case, the effect information related to the winning is appropriately reversed on the peripheral control MPU4150a side, so that a wide variety of effects with greatly different production contents can be produced without changing the logic on the main control MPU4100a side one by one. It will be possible to realize it.

Furthermore, further, the game per small opening (small hit game) is not only that only a small amount of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege. Since the game is not shifted to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than before the small open hit game (small hit game) is performed, the game interest is reduced even though the opening / closing member 2006 operates. It can be said that care must be taken in handling the game settings in that it may occur. Therefore, conventionally, when mounting a small hit, a large hit game is performed with the same behavior as a small open hit game (small hit game), and after that, a specific function that functions to shift to an advantageous gaming state. First, prepare the winning type, and in the situation where the small opening hit game (small hit game) is performed, make the player aware of the possibility that the winning type is a big hit game according to the winning of the specific winning type. Therefore, it was a major premise to maintain the interest of the game when the small open hit game (small hit game) is performed. However, even with such a conventional gaming machine, if a specific winning type is won, the jackpot is finally won under the jackpot winning probability set extremely low in the normal gaming state. Nevertheless, it is inevitable that the game interest will decline due to the fact that the prize balls commensurate with this low probability cannot be obtained (the difference between the jackpot probability and the real probability of the jackpot will result in a decline in the game interest). It was.

In this respect, with the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the small hit is mounted, the big hit game is performed with the same behavior as the small open hit game (small hit game), and after that, an advantageous gaming state is performed. In the point that a specific winning species that functions to shift to is not prepared, the technical idea is originally different from the conventional gaming machine in order to suppress the decline in the game interest when the small opening hit game (small hit game) is performed. It is very different.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when mounting a small hit, a large hit winning type (big hit) can be executed so that a plurality of types of big hit games having different prize ball amounts that can be obtained by the player can be executed. A, big hits B to E) will be prepared. Then, when opening the big prize opening 2003, first, the lottery result in which the opening of the big winning opening 2003 is confirmed in the big hit lottery (big hit A, which is expected to get a large amount of balls, is expected to get a medium amount of balls. A display effect is displayed as to whether or not a large hit B to E, a small hit expected to get a small amount of balls is obtained (a challenge bonus effect pattern appears regardless of the type of hit). I have to). As a result, when it is shown that the lottery result has been obtained, it is possible for the player to know that at least a small amount of balls can be obtained. After that, a challenge bonus production will be performed on how many balls can be added (from small amount of balls to medium or large amount of balls). I am doing it.

Furthermore, when the number of prize balls is increased, there is a possibility that the game state (the game state in which the probability variation function and the time saving function are activated) that is advantageous to the player is changed. In this regard, in this embodiment, depending on how many balls are piled up (big hit A, which is expected to obtain a large amount of balls, or big hits B to E, which are expected to obtain a medium amount of balls). The degree of expectation for the operation of the probability fluctuation function (probability of transition to the gaming state in which the probability fluctuation function operates) is made different. That is, in this case, a challenge is made as to which of a plurality of types of operation modes is prepared so that the probability of the change to the gaming state in which the probability fluctuation function operates is different after the opening of the large winning opening 2003 is completed. It will function as a bonus effect. Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, a higher probability is obtained by adding the winning probability “3/400” without the operation of the conditional device to the winning probability “1/400” with the operation of the conditional device. With "1/100", not only can the prize ball be paid out to the player (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates), but also the game state can be shifted to the player's advantage. Will also be able to raise awareness.

In this embodiment, the expectation for the operation of the probability fluctuation function (probability change expectation at the time of jackpot A) when the players are piled up until a large amount of balls can be obtained is 100%, which is at least medium. The expected value for the operation of the probability fluctuation function (probability change expectation at the time of big hits A to E) when it is piled up until it is possible to obtain a large amount of balls is 82%, and it is possible to obtain a medium amount of balls. The expected value for the operation of the probability fluctuation function (probability change expectation when the jackpots B to E) is 61.7% when it is piled up until it is said, and the expected value of the number of balls that can be obtained is high. The higher the situation, the higher the expectation of probability change.

Moreover, according to such a challenge bonus production, it is positioned as the default production state that a small amount of balls can be obtained, so that a large amount of balls can be obtained according to the winning of the big hit. Unlike conventional game machines, where whether or not the game is a basic game (basic production), even when a small open hit game (small hit game) is performed in which a small amount of balls can be obtained. Since the big prize opening 2003 is only opened in a form that matches the default production state, the decline in the game interest will be suppressed. Furthermore, when in the second production mode, the probability of appearance of the winning production (probability of entering the challenge bonus) is as much as the default production state is that a small amount of balls can be obtained. ) Is set to a higher probability (a higher probability that the winning probability of a small hit is added to the winning probability of a big hit), and this makes it impossible to obtain a prize ball commensurate with the low probability. It is also avoided that the interest is reduced.

Then, in order to have the challenge bonus effect pattern that realizes such a game / effect in the second effect mode, the lottery for small hits is not only performed in the first effect mode as well. At the time of winning the small hit, the fluctuation time Ta2 to Td2 having a length corresponding to the fluctuation time Ta1 to Td1 of the special symbol at the time of winning the big hit can be selected. However, in the first effect mode, the small hit is not originally required, and the display effect as to whether or not the big hit is won is basically performed based on the jackpot probability. Therefore, in the first effect mode, it is convenient to realize a display effect in which it is difficult for the player to notice that the pachinko machine is equipped with a small hit, but the liquid crystal display device 1400 has a variation of a special symbol. If the production method that the result of the big hit lottery appears at the time of stop is simply adopted, after the special symbol is stopped, the opening period when the small open hit game (small hit game) is executed and the opening period of the big winning opening 2003 after that. The presence of the game becomes conspicuous, which may reduce the interest in gaming.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, in the first effect mode, the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set at the timing t1 (at the end of the change of the special symbol). However, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not terminated and is continued. Further, when entering the first closing control period, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set at the timing t1, but the peripheral control MPU4150a indicates that the large winning opening 2003 is opened. The set of the same command is ignored without switching to the interval effect, and the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is continued. Then, when the first closing control period ends and the second closing control period starts at the timing t2, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed, and the result of the big hit lottery is a hit accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. It is executed by switching to the winning effect, which shows the winning information about whether or not it is a (big hit), and then to the opening effect.

That is, in this case, the above-mentioned small hit effect is positioned as one effect that appears when the big hit is lost, and the first closing when the small open hit game (small hit game) is executed after the special symbol is stopped. By performing it over the control period and the opening period of the big winning opening 2003 after that, the display effect on the next change (holding digestion of special symbols) relatively soon after it is shown that the big hit was lost. Will be able to migrate to. As a result, the production proceeds in the same manner as in the so-called high-expected loss effect, so that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device. This becomes difficult to notice, and as a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to the opening / closing member 2006 operating in response to the winning of a small hit.

In the pachinko machine 1 in which such a first effect mode and a second effect mode are prepared, in particular, the peripheral control MPU4150a according to this embodiment has the first effect mode as described above. It is provided with a mode compulsory control means that creates a mode compulsory period in which a player is forcibly determined to be one of the effect modes of ing. Then, on this basis, the first predetermined period (for example, one month) after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall is forcibly determined in the first production mode, and the first predetermined period elapses. The control for creating the mode compulsory period is controlled so that the second predetermined period (for example, the next one month) after that is forcibly determined as the second effect mode.

According to such a mode compulsory period, the hall side hides the small hit from the player during the first predetermined period by the appearance of the extension effect pattern as described above. By performing a hit display in the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the jackpot winning probability "1/400", the prize ball is given to the player under the jackpot winning probability "1/400". It will be possible to start the operation of the first game-specification pachinko machine that can be paid out (first new store opening). Further, in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period has elapsed, not only the big hit but also the small hit is one type of hit that enables the winning of the prize ball by opening the big winning opening 2003. By making the above-mentioned challenge bonus production pattern to be handled appear, the existence of small hits is hard to be noticed in the first predetermined period, and the winning probability of big hits is higher than "1/400". Based on the probability "1/100", the hit display is performed in the display effect of the liquid crystal display device 1400.

That is, in this case, the prize ball can be paid out to the player under the higher probability "1/100" which is the sum of the jackpot winning probability "1/400" and the small hit winning probability "3/400". It will be possible to start the operation of a new pachinko machine with a second game specification (second new store opening). As a result, although the pachinko machine 1 is originally equipped with only one game specification, another pachinko machine that differs not only in the production content of the liquid crystal display device 1400 but also in the game specification related to the acquisition of balls is newly operated. It will be possible to give the player such an impression.

Furthermore, according to such a mode compulsory period, unless it is determined that a predetermined date (first predetermined period) has not passed and it is on a specific date and time (second predetermined period). Not only is the change control from the first production mode not allowed, but some of the multiple production modes (second production mode) have not yet appeared and are hidden. Will be done. That is, in this case, as the days have passed since the pachinko machine 1 was delivered to the hall, the production function that had been hidden until then was gradually exposed, and finally, it was exposed. Since the resulting production function can be selectively used by the operation of the player, it becomes possible to maintain the game interest for a long period of time.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 98 (c), when the second production mode is set, a loss (pure loss) in which neither the big hit nor the small hit is won on the main control MPU4100a side. ) Is obtained, and the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. 89 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t1) is generated. Assuming that it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a'at the time of loss associated with the effect command "03H" , Start the variation of the decorative pattern, respectively.

Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command "03H") having the content of the display effect a'started in this way also has, for example, such a decorative pattern in the variable time Ta3 until the timing t1 arrives. , A display effect a'with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to display the stop in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears appears. However, at the timing t1 when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on the predetermined symbol line without the effort of the appropriate character. Naru (challenge bonus production pattern). As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "03H" functions as a "loss effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content a'".

As described above, the display effect pattern when the effect command "03H" is used is defined as the "non-extended display effect pattern" regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, the display effect pattern is between the effect pattern (effect command "01H") having the content of the display effect a at the time of a big hit in which the "extended effect pattern" is adopted. Since there is a gap in the production time in, it cannot function as a production pattern at the time of loss with respect to the production pattern having the content of the display production a at the time of a big hit, and the content of the display production a develops. As described above, it functions only as an intermediate production pattern that ends in the intermediate stage.

On the other hand, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a'at the time of the big hit when the effect command is "01H" is the "non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern). ) ”, So there is no discrepancy in the production time with the same production pattern (production command“ 01H ”), and the production pattern (production command“ 01H ”) has the content of the display production a’ at the time of a big hit. It functions as an effect pattern (a effect pattern in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line) when the command is lost to "01H"). Further, as described above, when in the second effect mode, the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a'at the time of the small hit when the effect command "02H" is also produced at the time of hit. Since it appears as a pattern (effect pattern in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line), the effect pattern (bonus challenge stop symbol is predetermined) even for this effect pattern (effect command "02H") at the time of loss. It will function as an effect pattern that does not appear on the symbol line).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 98 (d), when the second production mode is set, a loss (pure) in which neither the big hit nor the small hit is won on the main control MPU4100a side. Based on the fact that the loss) was obtained, the variation related to the special symbol having the variation time Ta4 shown in FIG. 89 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3). Is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c'at the time of loss associated with the effect command "04H". Is started.

That is, the display effect pattern when the effect command "04H" has the content of the display effect a at the time of a big hit when the display effect pattern when the effect command "03H" is in the first effect mode. In view of the fact that it cannot function as an effect pattern at the time of loss with respect to the effect pattern (effect command "01H"), in order to compensate for this (effect pattern at the time of loss when in the first effect mode). It is prepared. Therefore, the display effect pattern when the effect command "04H" is used is the "non-extended effect pattern" when the second effect mode is set, contrary to the display effect pattern when the effect command is "03H". There will be a discrepancy in the production time with the production pattern (effect command "01H") that has the content of the display effect a'at the time of the big hit, and the effect that has the content of the display effect a'at the time of the big hit. It cannot function as an effect pattern when the pattern is lost.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the fluctuation time Tc1 when the fluctuation number “9” and the fluctuation time Tc2 when the fluctuation number “10” are shown in FIG. 89 are set to the fluctuation number “4”. It is prepared as a fluctuation time having the same length as the fluctuation time Ta4 at the time of. That is, in this case, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern (see FIG. 99 (a)) described later having the content of the display effect c'at the time of the big hit at the effect command "09H" is "non". Since it appears as an "extended display effect pattern", there is no discrepancy in the effect time with the same effect pattern (effect command "09H"). Therefore, regarding the display effect pattern when the effect command "04H" is used, when in the second effect mode, the display effect c'at the time of loss associated with the effect command "04H" is not included. By starting as a dynamic display of the extended display effect pattern, the effect pattern (bonus) at the time of loss with respect to the effect pattern (effect command "09H") having the content of the display effect c'at the time of a big hit. The challenge stop symbol is made to function as an effect pattern) that does not appear on the predetermined symbol line.

In the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command "04H") having the content of the display effect c'started in this way, for example, in the variable time Ta4 until the timing t3 arrives, such a decorative pattern is used. , A display effect c'with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to display the stop in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears appears. However, at the timing t3 when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on the predetermined symbol line without the effort of the appropriate character. Become.

As described above, the display effect pattern when the effect command "04H" appears when a specific loss fluctuation time Ta4 is selected, but the effect command (variation time) from the main control MPU4100a is different. It can function as each loss display effect pattern for the jackpot display effect patterns of the two types of effect contents a and c', and functions as a loss display effect pattern for any of the jackpot display effect patterns. Whether to do so is selectively set based on which of the first effect mode and the second effect mode is set. As a result, regarding the two jackpot production commands "01H" and "09H", the production command "01H" at the time of the jackpot is obtained when the first production mode is in the first effect mode and when the second effect mode is in the second effect mode. , The appearance probability of the loss display effect pattern prepared for the jackpot display effect pattern of "09H" can be changed.

More specifically, regarding the jackpot production pattern of the production command "01H", in the first production mode, although the production command "04H" at the time of loss is adopted as the loss production pattern, the second In the effect mode of, the effect command "04H" at the time of loss is not adopted as the effect pattern of the loss. Therefore, regarding the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command "01H", the appearance probability of the effect command "04H" for the loss effect pattern is higher in the second effect mode than in the first effect mode. Regarding the jackpot production pattern of the production command "09H", in the first production mode, although the production command "04H" at the time of loss is not adopted as the loss production pattern, the second effect pattern is used. In the production mode, the production command "04H" at the time of loss is adopted as the loss production pattern. Therefore, regarding the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command "09H", the appearance probability of the effect command "04H" for the loss effect pattern is higher in the first effect mode than in the second effect mode. As a result, a wide variety of display effect patterns with different expectations can be made to appear according to the effect mode without changing the logic on the main control MPU4100a side one by one (see FIG. 100).

The reason why such a special effect can be realized is that the effect command adjusts the length of each effect by using the stop timing t3 of the special symbol as the effect time for one loss fluctuation time Ta4. Although the jackpot production pattern of "09H" and the fluctuation time Ta1 shorter than the loss fluctuation time Ta4, at least the first closing control period after the symbol is stopped are added as the production time and used to produce each other. This is because the jackpot effect pattern (first effect mode) of the effect command "01H" whose length is adjusted is prepared. That is, by preparing the jackpot effect pattern in which the effect time is adjusted in this way, the jackpot effect patterns of the effect commands "01H" and "09H" having different variation times Ta1 and Tc1 are associated with one loss fluctuation time Ta4. When this loss variation time Ta4 is selected, it becomes possible for the peripheral control MPU4150a side to determine which effect contents a and c'appear. Furthermore, even as such a first closing control period, which is added as an effect time, when a hit (big hit or small hit) to open the big winning opening 2003 is won, a certain length is given regardless of the type. It is also important that the time is set as a long time (for example, 8 seconds) in order to realize such a special effect by including the effect pattern at the time of a small hit.

FIG. 99 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any one of the effect commands "09H" to "11H" shown in FIG. 89 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

As shown in FIG. 99A, the fluctuation time shown in FIG. 89 is based on the fact that the jackpot was won on the main control MPU4100a side when the first effect mode is set. Assuming that the fluctuation related to the special symbol having Tc1 is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect c at the time of a big hit (for example, a specific mission c) associated with the effect command "09H". The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern with the content of whether or not the character C can succeed (whether or not the character C can defeat the enemy) is started. Then, the extended effect pattern (effect command "09H") having the content of the display effect c started in this way is even in a situation where the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped with the passage of the variation time Tc1 has arrived. , The display effect c is continued without being terminated (without making the specific mission c successful or unsuccessful).

That is, as described above, the fluctuation time Tc1 at the fluctuation number "9" shown in FIG. 89 is not prepared as a fluctuation time having the same length as the fluctuation time Ta4 at the fluctuation number "4". However, when the first production mode is set, such an "extended production pattern" is adopted, so that the production time is different from that of the production pattern (production command "04H"). Is to occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when in the first effect mode, there is an effect relationship (big hit effect pattern, loss effect) with the display effect pattern when the variation number is "4". Pattern) is not provided.

Further, when the extension effect pattern is dynamically displayed when the effect command "09H" is issued, the decorative pattern is also started to change. However, the change of the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension.

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU4150a according to this embodiment, when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped within the time of the fluctuation time Tc1 in the lost stop mode at the time of extension. Then, under the condition that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect c on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Tc1. As for, the continuation expectation effect as to whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not the character C who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up) is performed.

That is, in this case, since the display effect c (no development, loss) described later associated with the command “11H” shown in FIG. 89 is prepared, the display effect c even when the timing t3 has passed. When is continued, this functions as "post-development display effect c (effect that leaves a chance to succeed a specific mission c)". Therefore, when this "post-development display effect c" appears, the special symbol is displayed from the player's side even though it is in the first closing control period after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. It will be possible to grasp it as being still fluctuating. Further, the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1400 can also be grasped as being maintained in the temporarily stopped state even though it is in the state after the fixed stop, and by extension, at the time of the above-mentioned extension. It will be possible to make it appear that there is still a chance to show that the jackpot has been won in a way that the loss stop mode is overturned.

However, at this time, the extended effect pattern (effect command "09H") having the content of the display effect c is performed in the large display area (center or the entire display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the above, the variable display of the decorative pattern shall be performed only in a small display area (a portion of the liquid crystal display device 1400 that is difficult to be noticed, such as an edge portion of the display area) for such a display effect c. However, it is more desirable to let the player grasp the result of the big hit lottery depending on whether or not the specific mission c in the display effect c can be succeeded without paying attention to the movement of the decorative symbol.

That is, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command "09H", in the first closing control period after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the actual closing control period is performed. However, despite the fact that the decorative design has been fixedly stopped, we succeeded in producing continuous expectations at the time of temporary stop (for example, character C, who has fallen under the attack of the enemy, has risen). Under the condition that it is held, "display production c after development" will appear. In this "display effect c after development", using the time until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU4100a side, for example, the appearance of the character C confronting the enemy again is projected. A production will be made as to whether or not mission c can be successful.

However, as will be described later, such "post-development display effect c (effect on whether or not a specific mission c can be succeeded)" in the first closed control period on the main control MPU4100a side is shown in FIG. It is also performed in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the command "10H". And as described above, in order to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small hit when in the first effect mode, the display effect c (small hit) is a big hit loss. It is more desirable to shift to the next fluctuation (holding digestion of special symbols) relatively soon after is shown.

Therefore, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command "09H", a specific effect is specified until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives. The appearance of success in mission c (character C defeats the enemy) is not shown, and the effect of whether or not a specific mission c can be successful (character C attacks the enemy and this succeeds). (Direction such as whether or not) appears. As a result, the jackpot explicit effect c can appear in the form of showing the success of the specific mission c after the end timing t4 of the opening effect, and the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "09H". Comes to function as a "hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content c".

However, as described above, in the extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit, after the first closing control period having a certain length ends, the closing control period is extended to have an indefinite length. The closing control period of 2 is further appearing. Then, within the second closing control period, a part of the effect content in the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit (big hit explicit effect c) and the opening effect before the big hit game (the big hit game is started by performing the right-handed game). It is possible to perform a production that encourages what should be done). Then, as a result of the operation handle portion being operated at an appropriate timing according to the understanding speed of each player for these effects, when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n (timing ty), the second closing control period is set. After the end, the big hit game and the production during the big hit game will be started. The details of the production during the jackpot game will be described later.

Further, this is also as described above with reference to FIG. 97A, but the second closing control period from the timing t4 to the timing ty is terminated based on the operation of the operation handle portion. Since it is (a period having an indefinite length), for example, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n by operating the operation handle portion immediately after the first closing control period having a certain length ends. When the game is played, the jackpot explicit production c and the opening production are cut at that point, or the production itself is almost not made to appear (effect skipping), and the next production (production during the jackpot game) is forcibly advanced. The Rukoto.

On the other hand, the fluctuation time Tc2 (here, the fluctuation time) shown in FIG. 89 is based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU4100a side when the first effect mode is set. Assuming that the fluctuation related to the special symbol having (explained as being set at the same time as Tc1) is started (timing t0), it is associated with the effect command "10H" in the liquid crystal display device 1400. The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern with the content of the display effect c at the time of a small hit (for example, whether a specific mission c can be successful (whether the character C can defeat the enemy), etc.) To be started. Then, when the extension effect pattern (effect command "10H") having the content of the display effect c thus started is also the extension effect pattern (see FIG. 99 (a)) associated with the effect command "09H". Similarly, even in a situation where the timing t3 at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped due to the passage of the fluctuation time Tc2 has arrived, the display effect c is not terminated (without making the specific mission c successful or unsuccessful). ) Continue this.

Further, even when the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command "10H" is dynamically displayed, the decorative pattern is started to change. Further, regarding the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the extension effect pattern (FIG. 99) associated with the effect command "09H" is also determined to stop with the loss stop mode at the time of extension at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. This is the same as in (see (a)). In addition, although the lottery result of the big hit is different between the big hit and the small hit, the single display mode is adopted and the display mode is distinguished. As mentioned above, it has not been removed.

Furthermore, under the condition that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the passage of the fluctuation time Tc2. Regarding c, the point that the continuation expectation production (for example, whether or not the character C who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up) is performed as to whether or not this is continued. This is the same as for the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 99A) associated with the effect command “09H”.

That is, even in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command "10H", in the first closing control period after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, In fact, despite the fact that the decorative design has been fixedly stopped, we succeeded in producing continuous expectations at the time of temporary stop (for example, character C who has fallen under the attack of the enemy has risen). With a feeling, "display production c after development" will appear. Then, in this "display effect c after development", for example, the appearance of the character C confronting the enemy again is projected by using the time until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU4100a side. A production is performed as to whether or not a specific mission c can be successful.

Furthermore, similarly, until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives, the appearance of success in the specific mission c (character C defeats the enemy) is not shown, and it is specific. An effect on whether or not mission c can be successful (an effect such as whether or not character C attacks an enemy and this is successful) appears. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 97 (b), the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command "10H" has a certain length. After the end of the first closing control period, the second closing control period having an indefinite length does not appear further in the form of extending the closing control period. Therefore, it is specified from the end timing t4 of the first closing control period to the end timing t5 of the control related to the opening of the large winning opening 2003 in the small opening hit game (small hit game) when the production command "10H" is issued. The loss explicit production c will appear in the form of showing the failure of the mission c of. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "10H" functions as a "loss effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content c".

In this loss explicit production c, for example, the attack by the character C is evaded and the enemy escapes, and after that, the appearance that the character C regrets is projected, as a big hit defeat production different from the loss explicit production a. Will be done.

According to the extension effect pattern associated with such effect commands "09H" and "10H", the opening end timing t5 (or the second closing control period) of the special winning opening 2003 is started from the start timing t0 of the special symbol. Since the time until the jackpot explicit effect c ends) will function as one effect for winning the jackpot, it will be possible to direct the player's attention to such an effect. It becomes possible to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the opening of the big winning opening 2003 and the small hit when the loss explicit effect c is being performed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99 (c), when the first production mode is set, a loss (pure loss) in which neither the big hit nor the small hit is won on the main control MPU4100a side. ) Was obtained, and the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc3 shown in FIG. 89 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3) is generated. If it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, is it possible to succeed in the display effect c (for example, a specific mission c) at the time of loss associated with the effect command "11H" (character C)? The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern with the contents of) (whether or not can defeat the enemy) is started. However, the display effect pattern (effect command "11H") having the content of the display effect c started in this way is displayed when the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped with the passage of the variation time Tc3 arrives. End this without extending the production c (in the form of failing a specific mission c).

More specifically, the variation of the decorative pattern is also started when the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (no development) at the time of loss associated with the effect command "11H" is dynamically displayed. Further, also in the case of the change of the decorative symbol, when the change of the special symbol is stopped at the timing t3, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension in order to make a definite stop in the loss stop mode at the time of extension. ing.

Further, under the condition that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect c on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the passage of the fluctuation time Tc3. Regarding, it is also directed that the continuation expectation production (for example, whether or not the character C who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up) is performed as to whether or not this is continued. This is the same as for the extension effect pattern (see FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b)) associated with the commands “09H” and “10H”.

However, in the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (no development) at the time of loss associated with the effect command "11H", the continuous expected effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, from the enemy). Character C, who has fallen under attack, did not stand up), so that the player can know that he has failed a specific mission. By preparing such an effect pattern, the effect pattern that is continued after the timing t3 shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b) can be made to function as an effect pattern with development.

In the peripheral control MPU4150a according to this embodiment, has the specific mission c succeeded until the timing t4 arrives even in the display effect pattern when the effect commands are "09H" and "10H"? Whether or not (whether or not character C defeats the enemy) is not shown, but whether or not a specific mission c is successful (whether or not character C defeats the enemy) prior to the arrival of timing t4. Whether or not) may be indicated. That is, in this case, after the same result display appears, the big hit explicit effect or the loss explicit effect is performed, but even with such an effect method, in the small hit display effect c, the small hit time Most of the first closing control period of It is possible to shift to the next fluctuation (holding digestion of a special symbol) relatively quickly after being broken.

By the way, as described above, such a display effect appears when any of the effect commands "09H" to "11H" shown in FIG. 89 is received from the main control MPU4100a side in the first effect mode. Is. Then, the player wins the big hit with the winning probability of the big hit without being aware of the existence of the small hit which is not particularly required to realize such playability (directiveness) in the first production mode. You will enjoy the game about whether or not it will be played.

However, even when any of the effect commands "09H" to "11H" shown in FIG. 89 is received from the main control MPU4100a side, when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU4100a The production commands "09H" to "11H" from the side, as well as the content of the production itself, and even though there is no change in the normal external disadvantageous game state, the big prize opening 2003 by winning a small hit By changing the display of the production content on the premise of opening the production mode and actively adopting it, the chance frequency of winning the prize ball by opening the large winning opening 2003 is compared with when in the first production mode. We are trying to realize the playability (directability) as if the number was greatly increased.

That is, as shown in FIG. 99A, it is shown in FIG. 89 based on the fact that the jackpot was won on the main control MPU4100a side when the second effect mode is set. Assuming that the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the content of the display effect c'at the time of a big hit associated with the effect command "09H". The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern and the variation of the decorative pattern are started respectively.

However, the content of the display effect c'in the second effect mode is different from that of the display effect c in the first effect mode. For example, can a specific mission c'succeed (this implementation). In the form of, a display effect pattern (challenge) with contents such as whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with a bonus challenge stop symbol that makes it possible to grasp that the opening of the grand prize opening 2003 is confirmed). It is prepared as a bonus production pattern). Therefore, the variable display of the decorative pattern is also performed over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (at least in a place that is easily noticed, such as the central portion of the display area). In this way, in the second effect mode, attention is paid to the movement of the decorative symbol, and the big hit depends on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. The result of the lottery is made to be grasped by the player.

Then, in the non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern) when the effect command is "09H", for example, in the fluctuation time Tc1 until the timing t3 arrives, for example, such a decorative symbol is displayed by the bonus challenge stop symbol. At the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the display effect c'with the content that the appropriate character struggles to stop and display with the appearing stop display mode appears, and at the timing t3, the big prize opening 2003 is opened. The decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line so that the player can grasp that the opportunity to acquire the prize ball is given. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "09H" functions as a "hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content c'".

Further, when the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped in the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears in this way, the liquid crystal display device 1400 uses the first closing control period and is acquired by the player by opening the grand prize opening 2003. As a pre-start effect of the challenge bonus effect c'about how many prize balls are possible, the countdown effect c'in which the operation timing of the operation handle is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is used. I try to do it.

Here, as described above, the countdown effect c'is for example, a countdown display of about 3 to 5 seconds is performed while explaining that the effective gate 6010n is aimed at by a right-handed game, and this countdown is performed. If the operation handle portion is operated with an appropriate amount of operation when the display changes to "0", the game ball will pass through the effective gate 6010n immediately after the first closing control period ends. However, as will be described later, this countdown effect c'has a different degree of expectation from the above-mentioned countdown effect a', so that the effect contents are different from each other (for example, the background color is different). I have to.

Therefore, according to such a countdown effect c', when the operation handle is operated according to the instruction of the effect, the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives as shown in FIG. 99A. Immediately after that, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n, so that the end timing ty of the second closing control period comes earlier than in the case of the first effect mode. As a result, the challenge bonus effect on how many prize balls the player can obtain is started relatively early after the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives. In the production, it is shown which opening mode (long opening hit game, medium opening hit game, small opening hit game) the large winning opening 2003 is opened. That is, in this case, the player launches a game ball against the big winning opening 2003 not only in the big hit game but also in the small open hit game (small hit game), and thus when the player is in the first production mode. In comparison with the above, the playability (directability) as if the frequency of chances of winning a prize ball by opening the large prize opening 2003 is greatly increased will be realized. The details of the production during the jackpot game will be described later.

By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 97 (c), in such a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, the operation is performed for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect c'is changed to "0". It is also assumed that the handle part may not be operated. That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time, but in this second closing control period, the countdown display is set to "0" on the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is more desirable to prevent new effects from appearing, such as displaying as it is, in order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation.

However, in the situation where the challenge bonus production pattern has appeared, such a situation where the production progress is stagnant is limited to the case where the big hit is won, and the challenge bonus production pattern at the time of the small hit described later ( In the case of FIGS. 97 (d) and 99 (b)), this cannot occur. That is, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained as much as the possibility that the game is performed per small opening is excluded while the production is stagnant (no production state) in which no production is newly performed. Not only that, but also the degree of expectation of transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player will be dramatically increased.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), based on the fact that the small hit was won on the main control MPU4100a side when the second effect mode is set, FIG. 89 Assuming that the fluctuation related to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc2 (here, it is described as being set to the same time as the time of timing t0 to t3) shown in (Timing t0) is started, the liquid crystal display device. In 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c'at the time of a small hit associated with the effect command "10H" and the variation of the decorative symbol are started, respectively.

Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command "10H") having the content of the display effect c'started in this way also has, for example, such a decorative pattern in the fluctuation time Tc2 until the timing t3 arrives. , Bonus challenge A display effect c'with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to display a stop display with a stop display mode appears, and at the timing t3 when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, a bonus is given. The decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "10H" functions as a "hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content c'".

However, as described above, when the small hit is won, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from the stop of the special symbol to the start of the small open hit game (small hit game). It consists only of the time until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up (the first closed control period with a certain length), and when the timer is timed up, the effective gate 6010n The small open hit game (small hit game) is started regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed through the game (see FIG. 86).

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU4150a according to this embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern when the effect command is "10H", the decorative pattern is the same as in the case of the display effect pattern when the effect command is "09H". When the player is confirmed and stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, how many prize balls can be obtained by the player by opening the large winning opening 2003 using the first closing control period? As a pre-start effect of the challenge bonus effect as to whether or not it is a thing, the countdown effect c'in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed.

That is, in the display effect pattern when in the second effect mode, both the big hit and the small hit are treated in the same way as the hit to open the big winning opening 2003, and the variation of the decorative pattern is started. There is no distinction in the production content from timing t0 to the challenge bonus effect, and when the operation handle is operated according to the instructions of the effect, the challenge bonus is passed from the countdown effect c'to the preceding effect (not shown). The challenge bonus production will be started by the same series of production contents as in the case of the challenge bonus production pattern (production command "09H") at the time of a big hit, which leads to the production. Therefore, not only the big hit but also the small hit will be treated as one type (type of hit) as the hit that can win the prize ball by opening the big prize opening 2003, and in the challenge bonus production, the long open hit In addition to the game and the game per medium opening, the game including the game per small opening can be displayed to indicate which game mode appears. As a result, as compared with the case of the first production mode, the playability (production) as if the frequency of chances of winning a prize ball by opening the large winning opening 2003 is greatly increased is realized. .. Of the long-opening game, the medium-opening game, and the small-opening game, the small-opening game ends in a relatively short time, so the small hits A to E and the small hits are small. Whether or not the hit is won may be made available to the player by displaying a specific image that does not appear when the big hit is won in the production within the first closing control period.

In this way, the display effect pattern when the effect command is "10H" is treated as a no-chance loss in which a small hit is not given an opportunity to win a prize ball, even though it is a display effect pattern based on one effect command. The extended production pattern in the first production mode and the small hit are treated as high chance hits (similar to the production pattern (production command "09H") in the big hit). It is selectively executed as one of the non-extended display effect patterns in the effect mode of 2. That is, in this case, the effect information related to the winning is appropriately reversed on the peripheral control MPU4150a side, so that a wide variety of effects with greatly different production contents can be produced without changing the logic on the main control MPU4100a side one by one. It will be possible to realize it.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99 (c), when the second production mode is set, the main control MPU4100a side does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). ) Was obtained, and the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc3 shown in FIG. 89 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3) is generated. Assuming that it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c'at the time of loss associated with the effect command "11H" , Start the variation of the decorative pattern, respectively.

Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command "11H") having the content of the display effect c'started in this way also has, for example, such a decorative pattern in the variable time Tc3 until the timing t3 arrives. , A display effect c'with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to display the stop in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears appears. However, at the timing t3 when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on the predetermined symbol line without the effort of the appropriate character. Naru (challenge bonus production pattern). As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "11H" functions as a "loss effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content c'".

As described above, the display effect pattern when the effect command "11H" is used is defined as the "non-extended display effect pattern" regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, the display effect pattern is between the effect pattern (effect command "09H") having the content of the display effect c at the time of a big hit in which the "extended effect pattern" is adopted. Since there is a gap in the production time in, it cannot function as a production pattern at the time of loss with respect to the production pattern having the content of the display production c at the time of a big hit, and the content of the display production c develops. As described above, it functions only as an intermediate production pattern that ends in the intermediate stage.

On the other hand, in the second effect mode, a display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c'at the time of a big hit when the effect command "09H" appears as a "non-extended display effect pattern". , With respect to the production pattern (production command "09H") having the content of the display production c'at the time of a big hit without causing a difference in the production time with the same production pattern (production command "09H"). It will function as an effect pattern at the time of loss (an effect pattern in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on the predetermined symbol line). Further, as described above, when in the second effect mode, the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect c'at the time of the small hit when the effect command "10H" is also produced at the time of hit. Since it appears as a pattern (effect pattern in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line), the effect pattern (bonus challenge stop symbol is predetermined) even for this effect pattern (effect command "10H") at the time of loss. It will function as an effect pattern that does not appear on the symbol line).

As described above, the display effect pattern when the effect command "09H" is used corresponds to the display effect pattern when the effect command "01H" is shown in FIG. 98 (a), and when the effect command is "10H". The display effect pattern corresponds to the display effect pattern when the effect command "02H" is shown in FIG. 98 (b), and the display effect pattern when the effect command "11H" is used is shown in FIG. 98 (c). It corresponds to the display production pattern at the time of the production command "03H", and although the production contents are different from each other among the corresponding production patterns, the production series addressed to itself (production content a series, production content). For the c series), it functions as an effect pattern having almost the same role as each other.

However, in the production content c series (production commands "09H" to "11H"), a display production pattern corresponding to the production command "04H" in the production content a series (production commands "01H" to "04H") is prepared. Not. That is, even in the effect content c series, if a display effect pattern corresponding to the effect command "04H" is prepared, in the first effect pattern, the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "09H" is obtained. Although this can be effectively functioned as a loss display effect pattern, the second effect pattern cannot function as a loss display effect pattern with respect to the display effect pattern when the effect command is "09H". Therefore, even though it has been given a relatively long time, it will exist as a display production pattern dedicated to loss where the jackpot symbol combination does not appear, and I was concerned that this might reduce the game interest. It is a thing.

Therefore, when in the first effect mode, for the hit effect pattern when the effect command is "09H", the effect pattern at the time of loss (pure loss) in which a specific condition is not satisfied is adopted as the loss effect pattern. Only the effect pattern when a specific condition is satisfied (display effect pattern when the effect command is "10H") functions as the only existence that replaces the effect pattern at the time of the loss (pure loss). Will come to do. That is, in this case, in the production content c series (production commands "09H" to "11H"), unlike the production content a series (production commands "01H" to "04H"), "display production c after development" appears. The expectation of a big hit at that time must be set within the range constrained by the appearance ratio of the big hit and the small hit. However, the production content c of the production content c series (production commands "09H" to "11H") has a longer time than the production content a of the production content a series (production commands "01H" to "04H"). As for the jackpot expectation, it is executed as a production with a higher expectation than the production content a. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a big hit when the "display effect c after development" appears is set as an appropriate value to be described later, which is required even within the range constrained by the appearance ratio of the big hit and the small hit. It is relatively easy to set.

Further, regarding the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "04H" in the effect content a series (effect commands "01H" to "04H"), when in the second effect mode, the effect content a By making it function as a loss production pattern for the production content c series hit production pattern (production command "09H", "10H") instead of the series hit production pattern (production command "01H", "02H"). As described above, the jackpot symbol combination is prevented from existing as a display effect pattern dedicated to loss without appearing. Therefore, in the effect content c series (effect commands "09H" to "11H"), when in the second effect mode, the hit effect patterns (effect commands "09H" and "10H") are prepared. The loss effect pattern appears with a higher probability than the ratio of the loss effect pattern (effect command "11H") by the addition of the selection probability of the display effect pattern of the effect command "04H".

Although details are omitted, each display effect pattern associated with the effect commands "05H", "06H", "07H", and "08H" of the effect content b series shown in FIG. 89 is the effect content. Display having the same mode as each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (d)) associated with each of the effect commands "01H", "02H", "03H", and "04H" of the a series. It is set as a production pattern. Furthermore, each display effect pattern associated with the effect command "12H", "13H", and "14H" of the effect content d series shown in FIG. 89 is the effect command "09H" of the effect content c series. It is set as a display effect pattern having the same mode as each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 99A to 99C) associated with "10H" and "11H", respectively. That is, each display effect pattern associated with the effect commands "05H", "06H", "07H", and "08H" of the effect content b series shown in FIG. 89, and the effect content d shown in FIG. The production relationship with each display production pattern associated with the production commands "12H", "13H", and "14H" of the series is the production content a series production commands "01H", "02H", Each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (d)) associated with "03H" and "04H", and the effect commands "09H", "10H", and "11H" of the effect content c series. It is set so as to have the above-mentioned effect relationship with each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 99 (a) to 99 (c)) associated with each of the above.

FIG. 100 (a) is a table showing the degree of expectation of a big hit when in the first production mode for each production content series, and FIG. 100 (b) is a challenge when in the second production mode. It is a table showing the degree of expectation of bonus rush, etc. for each production content series. As for the numerical value indicating the probability, since the second decimal place is rounded off and shown as the numerical value up to the first decimal place, the total probability value of each element may not be 100%.

According to the setting mode related to such a display effect pattern, the jackpot expectation degree, which is the expectation degree at which the hit effect appears in the first effect mode, is as shown in FIG. 100 (a) of the effect content a. The jackpot expectation when the display effect pattern appears is "0.5%", and the jackpot expectation when the display effect pattern of the effect content b appears is "1.5%", and the effect content c The jackpot expectation when the display effect pattern appears is "13.7%", and the jackpot expectation when the display effect pattern of the effect content d appears is "33.1%". Since the jackpot expectation is "100%" when the display effect pattern of the effect content e appears, this is omitted in the table. In the display effect pattern of the effect content e, a definite effect that the jackpot has been won appears regardless of the effect mode.

Further, regarding the jackpot expectation (expectation that the hit effect appears) when each display effect pattern that can appear in the first effect mode is in the stage of development, when the developed effect content a appears. The jackpot expectation is "1.3%", the jackpot expectation when the post-development production content b appears is "3.7%", and the jackpot when the post-development production content c appears. The degree of expectation is "25%", and the degree of expectation of a big hit when the post-development production content d appears is "72.7%".

On the other hand, regarding the challenge bonus rush expectation degree, which is the expectation degree at which a hit effect appears in the second effect mode, when the display effect pattern of the effect content a'appears, as shown in FIG. 100 (b). The challenge bonus rush expectation is "7.9%", and the challenge bonus rush expectation when the display production pattern of the production content b'appears is "11.8%", and the production content c'is displayed. The challenge bonus rush expectation when the effect pattern appears is "15.4%", and the challenge bonus rush expectation when the display effect pattern of the effect content d'appears is "10%".

That is, as described above, only the display effect patterns of the effect contents a and b among the effect contents a to d are the jackpot effect patterns (effect command "01H", effect command "05H") set as the extension effect pattern. ”), A non-extended display effect pattern (effect command“ 04H ”, effect command“ 08H ”) that can function as a loss effect pattern only when in the first effect mode is prepared. Then, on this, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command "04H", effect command "08H") prepared in this way is applied, and in the second effect mode, the hit effect pattern of the effect content c'(effect command "08H") is applied. 09H ”, the production command“ 10H ”) and the hit production pattern (production command“ 12H ”, production command“ 13H ”) of the production content d'are diverted as each loss production pattern.

According to the display effect patterns associated with such effect commands "04H" and "08H", when in the first effect mode, it is expected that a hit effect will appear including the developed effect contents a and b. Although the degree (expected jackpot) is low, the appearance probability of each display effect pattern of the effect contents a and b is increased (for each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d), and thereby the jackpot It becomes possible to prevent the display effect pattern, which cannot be expected, from being repeatedly performed. Furthermore, with respect to the display effect patterns of the effect contents c and d, although the appearance probability is low including the developed effect contents c and d, a hit effect appears in each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d. The degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of a big hit) has been increased (for each display effect pattern of the effect contents a and b), and as a result, the game interest when a specific display effect pattern (effect contents c and d) appears. Will be able to improve.

On the contrary, the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands "04H" and "08H" is used as the display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d series when in the second effect mode. By doing so, the appearance probability of the production contents c and d series can be increased by that amount (operation for appearance probability). As a result, the difference in the appearance probability between the effect contents a to d and the expectation that the hit effect appears can be reduced as compared with the case in the first effect mode, and the logic on the main control MPU4100a side can be reduced. It will be possible to realize a wide variety of productions with greatly different production contents without changing them one by one.

Moreover, regarding the disparity between the production contents regarding the degree of expectation (challenge bonus rush expectation) at which the hit effect appears when in the second effect mode, the display effect associated with the effect commands "04H" and "08H". In addition to the pattern being used as a display production pattern for the production content c and d series, not only big hits but also small hits are one type of hits that can be won by opening the big prize opening 2003. It is also reduced by being treated as (an operation to reduce the difference in the degree of expectation that a hit effect appears).

According to the effect mode when in the second effect mode, the display effect patterns of the effect contents a'to d'are relatively easy to appear regardless of the type of the effect contents a'to d'. Become. In addition, the probability of entering the challenge bonus effect (probability of executing the winning effect), in which the opportunity to win the prize ball is confirmed, will be equalized compared to when in the first effect mode (here, the content of the effect). (Within ± 10% between the types of a'to d'), and the above-mentioned disparity in appearance probability has been filled, so even if any of the production contents a'to d'appears, the game It becomes easier for a person to expect to be given an opportunity to win a prize ball.

In this regard, when in the second production mode, when the challenge bonus production is entered (executed), the "large winning opening 2003 is opened in any mode (long opening game, medium opening game, small opening game). Since it has a characteristic such as "is it done?", It is better to make it relatively easy to appear as a display effect pattern of the effect contents a'to d', rather than when it appears biased to either one. It is more desirable to suppress the decline in the game interest.

That is, as shown in FIG. 99B, in the display effect patterns of the effect contents a'to d'related to this embodiment, the effect content a'is the most regarding the appearance probability of the game per long and medium opening. It is getting smaller, and it is getting bigger in the order of the production contents b', c', and d'. Further, regarding the appearance probability of the game per small opening, the effect content a'is the largest, and the effect content b', c', and d'are gradually decreased in this order. Therefore, when the display effect pattern of the effect content a'appears, there is a high possibility that the large prize opening 2003 will be opened by the small opening game, but at least a small amount of prize balls (in this embodiment) as a privilege. , 40 to 50 pieces), and it is expected that the big prize opening 2003 will be opened by the long opening game and the medium opening game. You will be able to enjoy it as a production. In addition, when the display effect pattern of the effect content d'appears, the probability that the large prize opening 2003 will be opened by the long opening game or the medium opening game, and the large prize opening 2003 will be opened by the small opening game. Since it is higher than the probability of winning, it is not confirmed that at least a small amount of prize balls can be obtained as a privilege, but rather, the big prize opening 2003 is given by the game per long opening or the game per medium opening. It will function as a production of shades such as whether or not it is released. Then, the display effect patterns of the effect contents b'and c'function as an effect of a color tone between the display effect pattern of the effect content a'and the display effect pattern of the effect content d', respectively. , The display effect pattern of the effect content b'has a darker shade of the effect of the display effect pattern of the effect content a', and the display effect pattern of the effect content c'has the effect color of the display effect pattern of the effect content d'. Is getting darker. Therefore, since all of the display effect patterns of the effect contents a'to d'are relatively easy to appear, the player can enjoy the effect of various colors.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is expected that the hit effect will appear for the above-mentioned operation of reducing the difference in the degree of expectation that the hit effect appears between the effect contents as compared with the case of the first effect mode. The magnitude relationship of the degree is reversed according to the production mode. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 99A and 99B, when in the first production mode, the expectations of the production contents b and c are "1.5%" and "13, respectively". It is "0.7%", which is smaller than the expected degree "33.1%" of the effect content d, whereas when in the second effect mode, the expectation of the effect contents b'and c'is They are "11.8%" and "15.4%", respectively, which are larger than the expected degree "10%" of the production content d'. Even with such a setting mode, it is possible to realize a wide variety of productions in which the production contents are significantly different without changing the logic on the main control MPU4100a side one by one.

However, when the production pattern of the production content d'appears, the degree of expectation (probability) that the winning production (challenge bonus production) is executed is certainly higher than when the production patterns of the production contents b'and c'appear. Although it is low, as long as you enter the challenge bonus production, there is a higher probability that the large winning opening 2003 will be opened by the long, medium opening hit game than in the production pattern of the production contents b'and c'. , It is easy to get a lot of balls. Therefore, the production patterns of the production contents b'and c'and the production patterns of the production content d'are different in preference depending on the player, and such various shades are provided according to the display production pattern. By doing so, the decline in the game interest will be suppressed.

Next, an example of an effect appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the control for opening the big winning opening 2003 is performed based on the result of the big hit lottery in the normal external disadvantageous game state will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 89, 98 (a) and 99 (a), according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first production mode, the types of big hits (big hit A to big hit E). ), And the type of production is not shown and the control for opening the big prize opening 2003 (here, the control for the big hit game) is started. It will be. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first production mode, the type of jackpot and the period thereof can be determined by using the period when the control for opening the big winning opening 2003 is performed. It will be an effect that can show the game state after the end.

That is, as described above, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal external disadvantageous game state is either jackpot A or B, both the time saving function and the probability fluctuation function are activated after the jackpot game is completed. It will be controlled to the probabilistic external advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when either of the big hits A and B is won, the liquid crystal display device 1400 first clearly indicates that the big hit has been won as the big hit explicit effects a to d, and then the long-time opening / closing pattern and the medium time. Information on the amount of balls to be played (big bonus, regular bonus, etc.) regarding which of the opening and closing patterns the big winning opening 2003 is open will be shown (the big hit game production). It should be noted that, as the effect during the big hit game related to the amount of balls to be ejected, the big hit is won in the big hit explicit effects a to d even if it is not performed after the big hit explicit effects a to d are performed. May be displayed (simultaneously displayed) together with the information (type of big hit) related to the amount of balls to be ejected.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal external disadvantageous game state is any of the jackpots C to E, the time saving function does not operate after the jackpot game ends, and the external disadvantageous game state (probability fluctuation function also operates). It is controlled to the normal external disadvantageous game state, or the probabilistic external disadvantageous game state in which the probability fluctuation function is activated. Then, as the effect state after the jackpot game is completed, it is controlled to a predetermined latent effect state in which whether or not the probability fluctuation function is operating is concealed. Therefore, when any of the jackpots C to E is won, the liquid crystal display device 1400 first clearly indicates that the jackpot has been won as the jackpot explicit effects a to d, and then either of the jackpots A and B. By performing an effect different from the effect during the big hit game when is elected, an effect indicating that one of the big hits C to E among the big hits A to E has been won will be performed ( Directed during the jackpot game). In addition, since the opening mode of the medium opening hit game is adopted at the time of winning the big hits C to E, it is only shown that the big hits C to E are won, and the information on the amount of balls to be ejected is also available. It will be shown. Further, regarding the production showing that one of the jackpots C to E has been won, even if the production is not performed after the jackpot explicit productions a to d are performed, the jackpot explicit productions a to d have a jackpot. It may be displayed (simultaneously displayed) at the same time when it is clearly indicated that the winner has been won.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 89, 98 (a) and 99 (a), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the second production mode, the opportunity to open the large winning opening 2003 The content of the production does not differ depending on the type of hit (big hit A to big hit E, small hit), and the type is not shown and the control for opening the big winning opening 2003 (big hit 2003) is kept secret. Here, the big hit game or the control related to the small hit game) is started. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the second production mode, the type of hit (big hit, small hit) is used by utilizing the period when the control for opening the big winning opening 2003 is performed. The above-mentioned challenge bonus effect that can show the type of hit, big hit) and the game state after the end of the period will be performed.

That is, in the opening production (challenge bonus production) in the second production mode, first, in what mode (long opening per game, medium opening per game, small opening per game) the large winning opening 2003 is opened. Information on the amount of balls to be played (big bonus, regular bonus, small bonus, etc.) will be shown. As a result, when it is shown that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the long open hit game (big bonus), it is naturally shown that it is controlled to the probabilistic external advantageous game state based on the winning of the big hit A. Will be. In addition, when it is shown that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the small opening game (small bonus), it is naturally shown that the small hit is won and the game state is not changed. It becomes.

However, when it is shown that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the game per middle opening (regular bonus), a battle effect by a predetermined character is further performed as the opening effect. As a result, when the character wins in the battle production, it is shown that the character is controlled to the probabilistic external advantageous game state based on the winning of the jackpot B. On the other hand, when the character is defeated in the same battle production, it will be shown that one of the jackpots C to E has been won, and after the opening production (big hit game) is completed, the time is shortened. It is controlled to an external disadvantageous game state in which the function does not operate (a normal external disadvantageous game state in which the probability variation function does not operate, or a probabilistic external disadvantageous game state in which the probability variation function operates). Then, as the effect state after the jackpot game is completed, it is controlled to a predetermined latent effect state in which whether or not the probability fluctuation function is operating is concealed.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined latent effect state is limited to a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) until the special symbol fluctuates. For example, when a specific enemy character is not encountered until the end of the same period, it indicates that the player is in a probabilistic external disadvantageous game state, and when a specific enemy character is encountered during the same period, a predetermined battle effect is performed. I am doing it. Then, when the character wins in this battle production, it indicates that the character has been won a big hit, and when the character is defeated, it indicates that it is normally in an external disadvantageous game state, and waits for the end of the same period. The latent effect state is terminated without any trouble.

In this way, according to the latent effect method in which the current gaming state is shown by the end of the period until the special symbol changes a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) at the latest, the player will eventually It becomes easier to purely enjoy whether or not the game is in the game state, and it becomes possible to suppress a decline in the game interest due to the game state being kept secret for a long period of time even though the time saving function does not operate.

By the way, in the above-described example with reference to FIG. 98 (a), the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 89 in the first effect mode has an “extended effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a. Is associated, but as shown in FIG. 101, in addition to the "extended effect pattern", a "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a is also associated. It may be.

That is, in this case, when the effect command "01H" shown in FIG. 89 is received in the first effect mode, the peripheral control MPU4150a has an "extended effect pattern" having the contents of the display effect a and the display effect a. One of the "non-extended display effect patterns" having the content of the above is selected, and the dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern is started by the liquid crystal display device 1400.

Here, as a method for selecting an "extended effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a and a "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a, for example, (a) a random number Based on the result of a predetermined effect lottery based on the method, a method of selecting either an "extended effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a or a "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a. Or (b) "extended effect pattern" with the content of display effect a and "non-extended display effect pattern" with the content of display effect a based on the type of jackpot won in the jackpot lottery. In addition to the method of selecting one of (a) and (b), a method of combining (a) and (b) can be adopted.

When the method (a) is adopted, how many of the random numbers that can be acquired are associated with the "extended effect pattern" and the "non-extended display effect pattern", respectively. An "extended effect" having the content of the display effect a when the effect command "01H" shown in FIG. 89 is received in the first effect mode according to the ratio of the random number values associated in advance such as Each appearance probability of the "pattern" and the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a is determined. Regarding the setting of such appearance probability, it is the last of the display effect pattern that the jackpot expectation is higher when the "extended display effect pattern" appears than the "non-extension display effect pattern". It is more desirable to entertain the production.

In addition, when the method (b) is adopted, when a specific winning type (for example, jackpot A) is won, a dynamic "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a The display will be started by the liquid crystal display device 1400. According to such an effect method, at the timing t1, at least the winning result for a specific winning species (for example, jackpot A) is shown.

For example, when a jackpot symbol (a jackpot explicit effect that clearly indicates that it is a jackpot) appears at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol by the "non-extended display effect pattern", the player has the highest advantage of "big hit A". In the first closing control period, the liquid crystal display device 1400 will perform an opening effect such as "Congratulations!" To congratulate the player. Then, for example, at the timing t2 when the first closing control period ends and the second closing control period starts, it is effective to switch to the effect display indicating that the jackpot game should be started by the right-handed game. The timing tx at which the game ball passes through the gate 6010n is likely to arrive relatively earlier than in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of extension, and in the subsequent jackpot game, the jackpot effect dedicated to the "big hit A" will be performed. Become. However, when the hit effect (the big hit explicit effect that clearly indicates that it is a big hit) does not appear at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol by the "non-extended display effect pattern", the most advantageous "big hit A" for the player. On the contrary, it will be possible to grasp that "" has not been won. In this case, it is possible to grasp that any one of "Big hit B" to "Big hit E" has been won when the big hit explicit effect appears after the above-mentioned continuous expected effect by the "extended effect pattern". It will be.

In addition, when adopting the method combining (a) and (b), a production lottery table is prepared for each type of jackpot, and based on the acquired random number value while referring to this production lottery table. Therefore, either an "extended effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a or a "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a is selected. That is, by preparing the effect lottery table for each type of jackpot, it becomes possible to make the selection rate of the "extended effect pattern" and the "non-extended display effect pattern" in each table different. As a result, for example, the degree of expectation of the type of jackpot that has been won differs depending on whether the "extended effect pattern" or the "non-extended display effect pattern" clearly indicates that the jackpot has been won. In addition to being able to do this, the "non-extended production pattern" has a lower expectation of a jackpot, but when it is clearly stated that it is a jackpot, the expectation of a "big hit A" with the highest advantage is high. , "Extended production pattern" has a higher expectation of big hit, but when it is clearly stated that it is a big hit, the expectation of "big hit A", which has the highest advantage, is low. Is also possible.

Regarding the method for selecting the "extended effect pattern" and the "non-extended display effect pattern", in addition to the display effect pattern of the above-mentioned effect command "01H", the effect command "05H" shown in FIG. 89, Similarly, each display effect pattern of "09H" and "12H" can be adopted. However, when it is adopted as the display effect pattern of the effect commands "01H" and "05H", the display effect pattern of the effect commands "03H" and "07H" is lost with respect to the display effect pattern as the hit effect pattern. It will be possible to function as a pattern.

Further, in the above-described example with reference to FIG. 99 (a), the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 89 in the first effect mode has an “extended effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a. Is associated, but as shown in FIG. 102, in addition to the "extended effect pattern", an "extended effect pattern" having the content of the display effect c may also be associated. Good.

That is, in the "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c" associated with the effect command "02H" in this way, the display effect is performed by extending the stop timing t1 of the special symbol. The content of the effect is only the display effect pattern of the effect command "11H" when in the first effect mode (see FIG. 99 (c)), and the display effect after development that the jackpot expectation becomes higher. It will be a production content that does not appear. Therefore, in the first effect mode, when the effect command "02H" shown in FIG. 89 is received, a part of it is allocated to the effect content in which such a developed display effect does not appear. , It becomes possible to set a higher probability of winning a small hit while keeping the appearance probability of the display effect after development in the first effect mode low. In this case, when in the second production mode, the probability of entering the challenge bonus production (the degree of expectation that the winning production will appear) will be increased by the amount that the winning probability of the small hit is set higher. This makes it possible to give a higher probability of winning a prize ball by opening the large winning opening 2003.

In this case, when the effect command "02H" shown in FIG. 89 is received in the first effect mode, the peripheral control MPU4150a is set to "an extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a" and "display effect". One of the "extended effect pattern having the content of c" is selected, and the dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern is started by the liquid crystal display device 1400. Further, as a method for selecting the "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a" and the "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c", for example, the result of a predetermined effect lottery based on a random number. Based on the above, it is possible to adopt a method of selecting either "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a" or "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c". When this method is adopted, how many of the random number values that can be acquired are "extended effect pattern having the content of display effect a" and "extended effect pattern having the content of display effect c". The content of the "display effect a" when the effect command "02H" shown in FIG. 89 is received in the first effect mode according to the ratio of the random number values associated with each other in advance. Each appearance probability of the "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c" and the "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c" is determined.

Further, regarding the method for selecting the "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a" and the "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c", the display effect pattern of the above-mentioned effect command "02H" is described. In addition, the display effect pattern of the effect command "06H" shown in FIG. 89 can also be adopted in the same manner. When adopted as the display effect pattern of this effect command "06H", the "extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect b" and the "extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect d" are selected. It becomes.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it was decided to prepare the fluctuation pattern (variation number “15”, effect command “15H”) shown in FIG. 89 for determining the jackpot. You may omit it. That is, in this case, when the big winning opening 2003 is opened in the second effect mode, the challenge bonus effect pattern can always appear.

By the way, in the form in which the processing pattern of the game at the time of a big hit is triggered by the game ball passing through the effective gate 6010n at the start of the accessory continuous operation device (in the case of the above-mentioned challenge bonus), the small hit is in the first place. If is elected, there is a problem that the player can easily understand that it is not a big hit. That is, in the case of a big hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, the right-handed game ball is supplied to the game ball taxiway unit 6010, the game ball is guided to the effective gate 6010n, and by passing through this, the accessory is continuous. The activator is activated and the attacker is released. In this way, in the case of a big hit with the operation of the condition device, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is left to the timing of the player, whereas in the case of a small hit without the operation of the condition device, the game ball. Regardless of whether or not passes through the effective gate 6010n, that is, even if the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, after the lapse of the first closing control period having a certain length, the grand prize opening 2003 It will be released. Therefore, even if the liquid crystal display device 1400 (upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244) teaches right-handed hitting, a player who does not right-handed regardless of whether the player intentionally or not, or a player who does right-handed hitting later. The player who is trying to do this can easily determine whether the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the right-handed game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 before passing through the effective gate 6010n, and the game ball passes through the effect gate 6010n in advance of the effect (notice). Directing) is now executed. Therefore, regardless of whether the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit, the player expects the preceding production and immediately hits right based on the instruction of the liquid crystal display device, and even if the game state is a small hit. Within the first closing control period, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n. As a result, even if the lottery result is a small hit, the big winning opening 2003 will be opened (opened for a short period of time) after the right-handed game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n, so that the lottery result will be given to the player. It becomes difficult to determine whether the hit is a big hit or a small hit. It should be noted that the short-term opening of the big winning opening 2003 after the timing when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n is a so-called latent probability change in which the lottery result is a big hit, for example, the latent state is set without clearly indicating the probability fluctuation state. However, since it can occur, the player can expect that the lottery result will be a big hit even if the big prize opening 2003 is opened for a short period of time.

In the game machine of the present embodiment, the game ball taxiway unit 6010 is provided on the right side of the game area 5a so that all the right-handed game balls are supplied to the game ball taxiway unit 6010. Since the entrance end of the game ball taxiway unit 6010 opens at the upper right of the game area 5a, the game ball that has been hit right and reached the right side of the game area 5a will immediately enter the game ball taxiway unit 6010. .. After that, the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 directly below the opening of the taxiway unit 6010, and then always passes through the effective gate 6010n. Therefore, although the game ball has not passed through the effective gate 6010n at the stage when the game ball has passed through the effect gate 6011, the game machine may perform a pioneering effect for the game ball passing through the effective gate. Become.

As described above, the falling speed of the game ball is relaxed by the bent portion 6010c and the straight portion 6010d of the game ball taxiway unit (which may also be called a warp unit) 6010, so that the game ball spends a predetermined time to play the game. It passes through the ball taxiway unit 6010 and reaches the effective gate 6010n at the bottom of the game ball taxiway unit. In this way, the game machine earns this because it can gain time as compared with the case where the game ball freely falls from the time when the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 to the time when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n. Improve the quality of the production by taking a sufficiently long processing time for various production processing such as advance production, suggestion production, and advance notice selection, which are generated when the game ball passes through the production gate 6011 using time. can do.

Next, an effective embodiment in the case of performing the game processing performed when the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit by using the effect gate 6011 and the effective gate 6010n will be described. When the main control board 4100 draws a lot by entering the first starting port 2001 and determines that a big hit or a small hit is established, the peripheral control board 4140 receives a command from the main control board 4100 and suggests a lottery result. A predetermined effect pattern is determined from the effect patterns of, and a special effect is started. As a special effect, the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays, for example, a duel scene in which an enemy character (boss zombie) appears and a player-side character (warrior fighting a zombie) fights. Next, the peripheral control board 4140 displays a still image of the scene as if the boss zombie attacks the player on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and additionally displays the instruction of "right-handed". When the player receives this instruction and strikes right, the right-handed game ball passes through the effect gate 6011, and when the peripheral control board 4140 receives the detection signal from the gate sensor, the speaker invites the player's interest. The sound effect is sounded before the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n for operating the accessory continuous operation device. At this point, the player expects or has the illusion that the lottery result is a big hit even if it is actually a small hit. When the game ball that has passed through the effect gate 6011 passes through the effective gate 6010n and the peripheral control board 4140 receives the detection signal from the gate switch of the effective gate 6010n, if the lottery result is a big hit, the warrior wins the zombie. (Big hit result production) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 to suggest a big hit to the player. Then, since the accessory continuous operation device is activated by the game ball passing through the effective gate 6010n, the peripheral control board 4140 is used for a big hit in accordance with the opening of a plurality of rounds of the big winning opening 2003. Perform the production. On the other hand, when the lottery result is a small hit, since the accessory continuous operation device is not activated, the main control board 4100 does not trigger the passage of the game ball at the effective gate 6010n, and the main control board 4100 has a short period of time of the large winning opening 2003. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 executes an effect that the warrior loses to the zombie (small hit result effect) on the liquid crystal display device 1400, suggesting that the player is not a big hit. According to the teaching of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the player hits the game ball to the right without delay, and the opening of the large winning opening for a short period in the case of a small hit is actually after the game ball has passed the effective gate 6010n. Will be done.

Even if the above-mentioned advance effect in which the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n is performed without providing the effect gate 6011, the launch timing of the game ball by the player is indefinite, and the advance effect is performed prior to the result effect. Is difficult to generate in the first place. If only the result production that distinguishes between a big hit and a small hit other than a big hit is performed with the passage of the effective gate of the game ball as an opportunity, the production must be in a monotonous and uninteresting form in the first place. , Even if there is a right-handed instruction, the player does not attach importance to this and cannot have a sufficient incentive to launch the game ball toward the effective gate 6010n. In addition, it may be easy for the player to know whether it is a big hit or a small hit. Therefore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is provided with the effect gate 6011 as described above. Although the detection information of the gate switch of the effect gate 6011 has been described as being input to the peripheral control board 4140, the detection information of the gate switch of the effect gate 6011 may be input to the main control board 4100. .. At this time, the peripheral control board 4140 can recognize that the game ball has passed through the effect gate by a command from the main control board 4100.

Since the preceding effect due to the passing of the game ball through the effect gate 6011 is related to the result effect due to the passing of the game ball through the effective gate 6010n, the peripheral control board 4140 is in the form of the preceding effect according to the lottery result. May be changed. For example, the preceding effect when the lottery result is a big hit is a high frequency sound pattern, and the preceding effect when the lottery result is a small hit is a low frequency sound pattern special to this pattern. Further, as a preceding effect, the degree of expectation / reliability of the big hit in the lottery result may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the form of a percentage. Further, a part of the result effect may be displayed as a preceding effect to make the result effect a special form. For example, the result of winning or losing a battle with a zombie may be displayed as a preceding effect, and the expectation of a big hit may be displayed as a result effect. Specifically, even if it is a small hit, an effect of overcoming a zombie is performed by a preceding effect, and a low probability is displayed as a result effect.

Since the effect of the game ball passing through the effect gate 6011 precedes the passage of the game ball at the effective gate 6010n, the game ball passing through the effect gate 6011 is surely effective within the controlled time. It must be able to pass through gate 6010n. Therefore, this was realized by directly connecting the effect gate 6011 and the effective gate 6010n using the game ball taxiway unit 6010. If the effect gate is simply provided on the upper right side of the game area 5a, even if the game ball can pass through the effect gate, it is not always possible to pass through the effective gate 6010n. Further, it is conceivable to remove the effect gate from the taxiway unit 6010 and provide a sensor at the end of the rail 6033, for example, but in this configuration, even if the game ball that has passed through the sensor is strongly launched by the handle device. It does not mean that the right side area of the game area 5a is reached without exception. Furthermore, the effect gate cannot be provided on the left side of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, the game ball that was hit right before the jackpot game started and entered the taxiway unit 6010 (game ball waste means) is isolated from the outside in the taxiway unit. It is a waste ball that is consumed and wasted without being able to enter the first starting port 2001 and the general winning port 2004, in other words, forcing the player to abandon the opportunity to receive the lottery, but on the other hand. In order to ensure that the game ball passes through the production gate 6011 in the game ball taxiway unit, the game machine gives the player the opportunity to perform additional production in exchange for the price of the wasted ball, or is in a big hit state. It is possible to change the prior suggestion effect (effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400) regarding whether or not to shift to the (advantageous gaming state). Since the additional effect can be preceded by the result effect in a form related to the lottery result effect, the player is more likely to combine the advance effect and the result effect than when the lottery result effect is simply performed. You can enjoy the benefits of being offered to quality. In this way, the game ball launched by the launching means in a predetermined area that is not accepted by the predetermined starting port is detected by the effect gate 6011 and / or the effective gate 6010n by the main board (hereinafter, the specific detecting means). If a game ball is detected by a specific detection means while a predetermined effect is being performed among the effects performed by the peripheral control board (effect execution means), the player loses the chance to be drawn. It is possible to increase the value of a production by expressing a specific production that can be beneficial to the person (value improvement means). After the right-handed instruction is given when the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit in a normal game state where the big winning opening is not open (big hit game state) and not in a time saving state. So, in the case of a small hit, it is clear that the game ball that first passed through the production gate within the specified time is a useless ball that has no chance of entering the ball, although it was launched with the instruction of right-handed hitting. , The peripheral control board detects this wasted ball, and depending on the game state, for example, according to the cumulative number of wasted balls between big hits (the larger the cumulative number, the higher the price of the wasted ball). The liquid crystal display device 1400 may display the preferential effect image or the compensation effect moving image as a special effect (for example, a premium character). In addition, when a plurality of game balls pass through the production gate as a waste ball (in the case of a big hit, even if the game ball passes through the effective gate, the game ball passes through the production gate before the big winning opening is opened. The peripheral control board 4140 may change the effect according to the number of passed spheres. Furthermore, the degree of change in the effect may be changed according to the value of the game ball, that is, according to 4 pachinko, 1 pachinko, or the like. For example, in the case of 1 pachinko as compared with the case of 4 pachinko, the degree of change in the effect is reduced to 1/4. In the case of 4 pachinko, if one game ball causes a predetermined change in the effect, in the case of 1 pachinko, the same change occurs only when 4 balls are supplied as waste balls. Every time a one-pachi game ball passes through the production gate as a waste ball, the production screen is focused, the density of the production screen is increased, and the like.

In the above description, even if the lottery result is a small hit, the lottery result is produced (the zombie loses) when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n as in the case of the big hit. In the case of a small hit, the condition device is not activated and there is no point in enabling the accessory continuous operation device. Therefore, the effect of the lottery result is not triggered by the passage of the game ball at the effective gate 6010n. The lottery result display effect may be performed at the timing when the player passes through the effect gate 6011 and then passes through the effective gate 6010n. As described above, the time from when the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 to when it reaches the effective gate 6010n is set within a specific range by the above-mentioned game ball falling speed relaxation means of the game ball taxiway unit 6010. Therefore, the gaming machine can make the player look like a big hit even if the lottery result is a small hit, and it is difficult to determine whether the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit.

In addition, when the lottery result is a small hit, the result effect performed when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n is that the warrior is defeated by the enemy character, but the warrior is the same as when the lottery result is a big hit. You may try to defeat the enemy character. Further, the effect gate 6011 and / or the effective gate 6010n in the taxiway unit 6010 may be made difficult for the player to see, and for example, the resin case member of the taxiway unit 6010 may be opaque. Alternatively, the area of the effect gate 6011 and / or the effective gate 6010n may be covered with a decorative plate. By making the effect gate 6010n difficult for the player to see while the effect gate 6011 is visible to the player, the game machine gives the player an effect caused by the game ball passing through the effect gate 6011. Suddenly, it can be developed into a lottery result production to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, by making the effect gate 6011 difficult for the player to see, the player feels as if a related effect suddenly occurs before the result effect generated by the game ball passing through the effective gate 6010n. Can be given to. If the lottery result is a small hit, the timing of the right-handed hit by the player is delayed, or if the large winning opening has been opened for a short period of time, the game ball passes through the production gate on the peripheral control board 4140. Even so, I try not to generate the preceding effect. Further, the peripheral control board 4140 may behave not only as the sound effect described above but also as a movable accessory as a preceding effect by passing the game ball through the effect gate 6011. Further, as the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 and subsequently passes through the effective gate 6010n, the peripheral control board 4140 steps up related effects such as sound effect, liquid crystal effect, and movable accessory effect. It can also be executed. For example, when the lottery result is a big hit, the amount of movement of the movable accessory is reduced when the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011, and the amount of movement of the movable accessory is increased when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n. Or, in the former case, a predetermined movable accessory is operated, and in the latter case, another movable accessory is operated. Further, the game machine may change the mode of the effect at the effect gate 6011 and / or the effective gate 6010n according to the number of passages of the game ball to the effect gate 6011 within a predetermined time. In this way, since the game ball always passes through the effect gate 6011 before passing through the effective gate 6010n, the game result is missed (small hit) even though the lottery result effect is left to the timing of the player. Even in the case of), the player can realize a game machine that can be expected to be a big hit until the end.

Next, an example of the screen replacement effect using the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub-projector display device 6201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105. 103 to 105 are explanatory views showing an example of a screen replacement effect executed as a reach effect. Here, when the result of the lottery is a big hit, a variable pattern for executing the screen replacement effect as the reach effect is selected, and a case where the screen replacement effect is executed based on the selected variation pattern is illustrated.

When it is decided to perform the screen replacement effect multiple times (for example, in the case of 3 times) as the reach effect, first, the liquid crystal display device 1400 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left and right, and then the left and right. After a lapse of a predetermined time, the decorative symbol of No. 1 is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol (example of the symbol of "7"). Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), after forming such a reach mode, an angel character X imitating the figure of an angel appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the intermediate decorative symbol is the same as the reach symbol. Of the symbols (exemplifying the symbol "7") and the symbols different from the reach symbol (exemplifying the symbol "6"), the angel character X acts to determine the same symbol as the reach symbol and try to derive a jackpot. Perform the production. Specifically, the symbol "7" is displayed on the upper left side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 as the decorative symbol on the left, and the symbol "7" is displayed on the upper right side as the decorative symbol on the right. In the other display area of the device 1400, the symbols "7" and "6" are displayed larger than the left and right decorative symbols as the decorative symbols inside, and the symbol "6" is displayed on the left side (display) by the angel character X. Trying to push it out of the area).

Further, at the start of the reach effect, the first screen 6211 of the four screens 621 to 6214 in the sub-projector display device 6201 is located at the display position, and the first screen 6211 at the display position is displayed on the first screen 6211. A devil character Y that imitates the appearance of a devil appears with a spear in his hand. Further, the sub-projector display device 6201 is provided adjacent to the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the symbol "6" is displayed on the left side (display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Against the angel character X pushing to the outside), the devil character Y displayed on the first screen 6211 starts mischief with the spear in his hand. More specifically, the spear held by the devil character Y is displayed straddling the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the first screen 6211, and the spear pokes the angel character X displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. As a result, the angel character X stops pushing out the symbol "6".

Next, as the ax-shaped accessory 6206 located above the first screen 6211 at the display position is swung down, the first screen 6211 is displayed by the amount that the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is swung down. The ax-shaped accessory 6206 is swung up and down, such that the first screen 6211 moves to return to the display position as the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is swung up above the position. The first screen 6211 starts to rattle in the vertical direction in accordance with the above. At this time, as the first screen 6211 shakes in the vertical direction, the image of the devil character Y or the like displayed on the first screen 6211 also shakes.

As described above, after the ax-shaped accessory 6206 and the first screen 6211 repeatedly move in the vertical direction a plurality of times (for example, 4 to 5 times), the ax-shaped accessory 6206 and the first screen 6211 move downward again. At that time, the second screen 6212, which is located behind the first screen 6211 among the four screens 621 to 6214, starts moving upward from the standby position toward the display position. At this time, the image of the devil character Y or the like displayed on the first screen 6211 moves downward so as to follow the movement of the first screen 6211.

Then, after the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is sandwiched between the notches formed in the second screen 6212, until the second screen 6212 in the state where the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is sandwiched is located at the display position. While continuously moving upward, it continuously moves downward until the first screen 6211 is in the standby position. At this time, the image of the devil character Y or the like moves upward according to the movement of the second screen 6212 instead of the movement of the first screen 6211 that has been followed so far.

Although the first screen replacement effect is executed by the operation of the sub-projector display device 6201 in this way, the smooth replacement from the first screen 6211 to the second screen 6212 is realized as the screen at the display position. , It can be difficult for the player to notice that the screen at the display position has been replaced. Further, the second screen 6212 has a notch formed on the display surface which the first screen 6211 does not have, and when the screen at the display position is replaced, the ax-shaped accessory 6206 swings in the vertical direction. By doing so, it is possible to make the display surface suddenly appear to have cracks (cutouts), which can have a great impact on the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), when the sub-projector display device 6201 is replaced from the first screen 6211 to the second screen 6212, the ax-shaped accessory 6206 interferes with the mischief of the devil character Y. Then, the angel character X displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 pushes the symbol "6" to the left (outside the display area) again.

Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (D), after the sub-projector display device 6201 is replaced from the first screen 6211 to the second screen 6212, the devil character Y disturbed by the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is revived. .. That is, the angel character X pushing the symbol "6" to the left (outside the display area) in the liquid crystal display device 1400 starts mischief again with the spear held by the devil character Y, and the liquid crystal is displayed with the spear. By poking the angel character X displayed on the display device 1400, the angel character X stops pushing out the symbol "6". Then, as the ax-shaped accessory 6206 sandwiched between the second screen 6212 at the display position is further swung down, the second screen 6212 is displayed by the amount that the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is swung down. The ax-shaped accessory 6206 is swung up and down, such as moving downward from the position and moving the ax-shaped accessory 6206 upward so that the second screen 6212 returns to the display position. Along with this, the second screen 6212 with the ax-shaped accessory 6206 sandwiched begins to rattle in the vertical direction. At this time, as the second screen 6212 shakes in the vertical direction, the image of the devil character Y or the like displayed on the second screen 6212 also shakes.

As described above, after the ax-shaped accessory 6206 and the second screen 6212 repeatedly move in the vertical direction a plurality of times (for example, 4 to 5 times), the ax-shaped accessory 6206 and the second screen 6212 move downward again. At that time, the third screen 6213, which is located behind the second screen 6212 among the four screens 621 to 6214, starts moving upward from the standby position toward the display position. At this time, the image of the devil character Y or the like displayed on the second screen 6212 moves downward so as to follow the movement of the second screen 6212.

Then, after the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is sandwiched between the notches formed in the third screen 6213, until the third screen 6213 with the ax-shaped accessory 6206 sandwiched is located at the display position. While continuously moving upwards, it continues to move downwards until the second screen 6212 is in the standby position. At this time, the image of the devil character Y or the like moves upward according to the movement of the third screen 6213 instead of the movement of the second screen 6212 that has been followed so far.

The second screen replacement effect is executed by the operation of the sub-projector display device 6201, but the screen at the display position is the second screen 6212, which is the same as the replacement from the first screen 6211 to the second screen 6212. By realizing a smooth replacement from the screen to the third screen 6213, it is possible for the player to hardly notice that the screen at the display position has been replaced. Further, the third screen 6213 has a notch larger than that of the second screen 6212 formed on the display surface, and when the screen at the display position is replaced, the ax-shaped accessory 6206 swings in the vertical direction. Suddenly, the cracks (cutouts) on the display surface can be made to appear to have grown, which can have a great impact on the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 104 (E), when the sub-projector display device 6201 is replaced from the second screen 6212 to the third screen 6213, the ax-shaped accessory 6206 prevents the mischief of the devil character Y from being disturbed. Then, the angel character X displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 pushes the symbol "6" to the left (outside the display area) again.

Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (F), after the second screen 6212 is replaced with the third screen 6213 in the sub-projector display device 6201, the devil character Y disturbed by the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is revived. .. That is, the angel character X pushing the symbol "6" to the left (outside the display area) in the liquid crystal display device 1400 starts mischief again with the spear held by the devil character Y, and the liquid crystal is displayed with the spear. By poking the angel character X displayed on the display device 1400, the angel character X stops pushing out the symbol "6". Then, as the ax-shaped accessory 6206 sandwiched between the third screen 6213 at the display position is further swung down, the third screen 6213 is displayed by the amount that the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is swung down. The ax-shaped accessory 6206 is swung up and down, such as moving downward from the position and moving the ax-shaped accessory 6206 upward so that the third screen 6213 returns to the display position. In line with this, the third screen 6213 with the ax-shaped accessory 6206 sandwiched begins to rattle in the vertical direction. At this time, as the third screen 6213 sways in the vertical direction, the image of the devil character Y or the like displayed on the third screen 6213 also sways.

As described above, after the ax-shaped accessory 6206 and the third screen 6213 repeatedly move in the vertical direction a plurality of times (for example, 4 to 5 times), the ax-shaped accessory 6206 and the third screen 6213 move downward again. At that time, the fourth screen 6214, which is located behind the third screen 6213 among the four screens 621 to 6214, starts moving upward from the standby position toward the display position. At this time, the image of the devil character Y or the like displayed on the third screen 6213 moves downward so as to follow the movement of the third screen 6213.

Then, after the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is sandwiched between the notches formed in the fourth screen 6214, until the fourth screen 6214 with the ax-shaped accessory 6206 sandwiched is located at the display position. While continuously moving upwards, it continuously moves downwards until the third screen 6213 is in the standby position. At this time, the image of the devil character Y or the like moves upward according to the movement of the fourth screen 6214 instead of the movement of the third screen 6213 that has been followed so far.

Although the screen replacement effect is executed for the third time by the operation of the sub-projector display device 6201, the first screen 6211 is replaced with the second screen 6212 or the second screen 6212 is replaced with the second screen 6212 as the screen at the display position. Similar to the replacement with the three screens 6213, by realizing the smooth replacement from the third screen 6213 to the fourth screen 6214, it is possible for the player to hardly notice that the screen at the display position has been replaced. Further, the fourth screen 6214 has a larger notch than the third screen 6213 and is formed as if the display surface is cracked, and when the screen at the display position is replaced, an ax-shaped accessory is formed. When the 6206 is shaken in the vertical direction, the cracks (cutouts) that have entered the display surface suddenly become large, making it appear as if the display surface has cracked, which can have a great impact on the player. it can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), when the sub-projector display device 6201 is replaced from the third screen 6213 to the fourth screen 6214, the ax-shaped accessory 6206 interferes with the mischief of the devil character Y. Then, the angel character X displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 pushes the symbol "6" to the left (outside the display area) again. Then, as shown in FIG. 105 (H), after the third screen 6213 is replaced with the fourth screen 6214, the display surface is cracked and the corners and tails of the devil character Y displayed on the display surface are broken. The devil character Y is forced into an unrecoverable state. At this time, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the angel character X succeeded in pushing the symbol "6" to the left (outside the display area), and the symbol "7" remained as the decorative symbol inside, which was the reach symbol. Since the same symbols are aligned, it is possible to recognize that the lottery result is a big hit.

Further, from the time when the fourth screen 6214 is replaced until the symbol for recognizing the lottery result (here, the symbol for recognizing that it is a big hit) is confirmed and displayed, the fourth screen 6214 to the first screen 6211 The process of replacing with is done. In such a process, the deterioration of the display function as a screen is repaired, and the display becomes good. Therefore, it is displayed at a place other than whether or not it is a big hit (even if a result of recognizing a loss appears). (Just because the function has been restored), it will be possible to realize a production that contributes to the improvement of the game entertainment.

According to the screen replacement effect, the form of the display unit itself can be used properly between the present form (first screen 6211) and the effect form (second screen 6212, third screen 6213, fourth screen 6214). Display effect is realized. Therefore, when changing the content of the display effect, it is possible to add a fundamental change from the form of the display unit itself, which makes it possible to produce a more authentic effect only by the display effect. ..

In addition, the display unit itself produces an effect element (here, only the part excluding the notch) produced due to its own structure (second screen 6212, third screen 6213, fourth screen 6214) which is an entity. Since the effect image) with the effect element) that allows the image to be displayed is projected, it is possible to integrate with the actual object, which is not completed only by the image data (intangible object). It will be possible to realize a deeper display effect. In addition to the notch, such effect elements include a display surface that is out of focus due to unevenness, and a form in which some effect shape (a round pattern of a ladybug) is applied to the outer portion of the display body. Is also feasible.

Further, according to the screen replacement effect, the form of the display unit itself is prevented from appearing in the effect image (the effect image that appears when the first screen 6211 is used) in the present display mode. It is possible to change to an unsuitable form (second screen 6212, third screen 6213, fourth screen 6214). Since the appearance of such unsuitable forms (second screen 6212, third screen 6213, fourth screen 6214) is executed in a series of effects, the effect image (first display mode) in this display mode is used. The high-quality display effect using the first screen 6211 will be continued without giving a feeling of discomfort due to hindering the appearance of the effect image) that appears when the one screen 6211 is used. Things will be avoided. That is, in recent display effects, it has become possible to realize high-quality display effects by improving video technology (image quality, etc.) and enlarging the screen size. And, if such a high-quality display effect is continued, it may result in a transitional expectation, and for players (especially those who are in poor physical condition, beginners, elderly people, etc.). There was a concern that it would have an adverse effect, but such a concern can be appropriately resolved.

Further, according to the screen replacement effect, it is expressed that the screen as a display body is physically damaged. As a result, it becomes possible to express how the effect image is displayed by the display function that is barely maintained despite physical damage or abnormality (FIG. 105 (H)). ), It will be possible to give an image as if there is a physical problem in the display function as a screen. As a result, it is possible to expect the effect of urging the player to stop the rough treatment of the game machine so that the game machine is not completely broken down and the production is not performed. When such an effect is expected, the second screen 6212, the third screen 6213, and the fourth screen 6214 are produced by causing physical damage rather than "a display body that produces an effect" (here, the effect is produced). , A display body that hinders the display effect on which the image light from the projector 6203 is projected) ”.

Further, according to the screen replacement effect, the screen is replaced with the screen in a form in which the physical damage gradually spreads until the fourth screen 6214, which has the most physical damage as the screen, appears. There is. In this way, by giving the player time to get used to the deterioration of the display function and gradually progressing the deterioration, the quality of the display is significantly reduced, which makes the player feel disgusted and vice versa. In addition, it will be suppressed that the game entertainment will decline.

In the screen replacement effect, when a specific symbol variation pattern is selected, a display effect using the second screen 6212, the third screen 6213, the fourth screen 6214, or the like is realized. However, the second screen 6212, the third screen 6213, and the fourth screen 6214 may be continuously used in the display effect over a plurality of symbol fluctuations. Examples of the multiple symbol fluctuations include a method in which the screen having the inappropriate shape that finally appeared in the screen replacement effect is not returned and is continuously used even after the next symbol variation is started. be able to. In the case of such an effect example, the display effect is continuously performed on the screens (second screen 6212, third screen 6213, fourth screen 6214) having inferior display functions, so that the display is of high quality. By continuing the production, the concerns that would inspire expectations in a transitional manner will be more reliably resolved. Moreover, even if the low-expected production content is repeated due to such multiple symbol fluctuations, which may cause the player to be frustrated, it has an adverse effect on the screen where physical damage has occurred. It can be expected that the rough treatment of the game machine will be suppressed so as not to reach the limit.

In addition, when the display effect using the second screen 6212, the third screen 6213, and the fourth screen 6214 is performed over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, any screen (second screen 6212, third screen 6213, first screen) is used. Depending on whether the four screens 6214) are used over a plurality of symbol variations, it is possible to make the degree of expectation that the game is controlled to be favorable to the player different.

Further, when the display effect using the second screen 6212, the third screen 6213, and the fourth screen 6214 is performed over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, a process of replacing these screens with the first screen 6211 is performed. As the timing, it is desirable to perform it within the execution period of the fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation pattern having a high jackpot expectation is selected, or as a warning effect indicating that the jackpot expectation is high. If the processing for repairing the deterioration of the display function as a screen is performed at such a timing, it is shown that the high jackpot expectation is obtained in addition to the improvement of the amusement hobby accompanying the improvement of the display. It will be possible to improve the play entertainment taste that accompanies this.

Further, as for the replacement process for exacerbating the physical damage of the screen and the replacement process for repairing, the process (replacement) may be performed so that the change gradually appears over a plurality of symbol fluctuations.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a notch that partially loses the display function as an unsuitable form as a display unit, thereby using the first screen 6211 (display unit without a notch). It was decided to reduce the quality of the display compared to the previous display effect. However, such unsuitable forms include deterioration of the display function (such as having a display surface that causes defocus due to unevenness) and abnormalities (such as having a display surface that has a color scheme such as reddish). Can be taken as an example. That is, it can be said that the unsuitable form is, in essence, a form that functions so as to prevent the display of the effect image in the present display mode using the present form (first screen 6211).

Regarding such a screen replacement effect, when the result of the lottery is lost, a variation pattern for executing the screen replacement effect is selected as the reach effect, or a specific variation pattern is selected for the non-reach effect. In addition, it may be performed as a notice production. In this case, it is more desirable to maintain the attention of the player by performing the screen replacement effect in an effect state such as "it is not possible to recognize how many times the screen is executed".

Further, in order to maintain the attention of the player, it is more desirable to increase the degree of expectation of the effect (the degree of expectation that the display mode at the time of hit appears) as the number of times the screen replacement effect is performed increases. Further, even if the screen replacement effect is executed less frequently, when the fourth screen 6214 having the most different form (the effect form having the largest change) as compared with the first screen 6211 appears. , It is more desirable to increase the production expectation (expectation that the display mode at the time of hit appears).

Further, regarding the screen replacement effect, it is not always necessary to succeed in replacing the two screens. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 103 (C), after the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is sandwiched between the notches formed in the second screen 6212, the second screen 6212 is set to the standby position instead of the display position. At the same time, the first screen 6211 may be returned to the display position instead of the standby position, and an effect pattern may appear in which the ax-shaped accessory 6206 is returned above the display position. That is, in this case, even if the screen replacement effect is started, a situation may occur in which the replacement fails, so that the player can enjoy the effect with a sense of tension. In addition, when the replacement fails, it is desirable that the mischief of the devil character Y cannot be stopped and the possibility that the display result at the time of loss appears is high.

Further, in the above embodiment, such a screen replacement effect is performed in the sub-display provided in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1400. However, after replacing the liquid crystal display device 1400 itself with a display device that displays an effect image by projection on a screen, each display as described above, including the screen replacement effect, is used in the replaced display device. You may try to realize the production.

Further, in the above embodiment, a plurality of screens having different forms are provided, and the screens are replaced among the screens. However, a plurality of display units having different forms may be formed on one screen, and only one of the display units may be positioned in a region visible to the player. For example, a notch is formed only on the upper part of the screen, and this notch is normally positioned at a position that cannot be seen from the player side. Then, when a specific production timing arrives, the screen itself is moved (sliding) downward, and the notch at the top of the screen is positioned in an area (specific projection range) visible to the player. If this is done, the screen itself has a special form (due to a notch) with only a simple configuration that does not change the content of the image light projected from the projector 6203 or replace the screen itself. It will be possible to realize a display effect with an added effect).

Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but even if it is a gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine are fused, the present invention The invention can be applied. Considering the application of the present invention to a pachislot machine, the "game ball" in each of the above configurations may be used as the "game medium".

A pachinko machine is a gaming machine in which an input medium such as a game ball, which is a medium that a player inputs into a game machine, and a game medium, which is a medium used for a substantial game performed by a player, are the same. Yes, it is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball that has been introduced. Specifically, "a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a large number of obstacle nails, center accessories, display means, etc. are incorporated, a starting prize opening, a big prize, etc. A game area provided with an appropriate entry port for a game ball such as a mouth, a passage port, and an arrival port, a rail for guiding the game ball from the launcher to the game area, and a game ball guided to the game area. It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entry of the game balls into the entrances and the mode of entering the game balls into a plurality of entrances. "

There are various types of pachinko machines, and a "ball-entry state detecting means (that is, a game state) for detecting a ball-entry state at the ball-entry port" represented by a machine generally called "digipachi". (Detection means), a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a ball is detected by the ball entry state detection means, and a special symbol display means for changing and stopping the change according to the lottery result of the lottery means. "In addition, while the special symbol is fluctuating, the decorative symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of decorative symbols is variablely displayed, and the effect image display means for displaying a character or the like at a predetermined timing is further provided." , Generally referred to as a "multifunction device", "a lottery means for drawing a lottery by distributing game balls in a character and a lottery means for drawing a lottery by winning a prize at a starting port" , "One game is played by a predetermined number of game balls such as 16, for example," represented by what is generally called "Arepachi", depending on the mode of entering the game balls into a plurality of entrances in one game. For example, "a player who pays out a predetermined number of game balls" and the like.

On the other hand, in a pachislot machine, a medal, which is a game medium, is inserted, and after the medal is inserted, a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed according to the operation of a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever), and then. It is a slot machine with a stop operation function, which performs a substantial game such as stopping the fluctuation of the symbol sequence in response to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the fluctuation of the symbol sequence may be stopped according to the elapse of the predetermined time. Then, when the combination of symbols at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the symbol sequence satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large number of medals. , A special advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is generated.

Further, in a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused, a plurality of (for example, 5) game balls are used as one unit of input medium, and after the input medium is charged, a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) is used. ), The symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols is varied and displayed, and then the fluctuation of the symbol sequence is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the fluctuation of the symbol sequence may be stopped according to the elapse of the predetermined time. Then, when the combination of symbols at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the symbol sequence satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large number of medals. , A special advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is generated.

In addition, at first glance, it seems that there is no game medium in a game machine such as a pachislot machine or a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused, in which a substantial game is not performed depending on the medium to be input. However, even with such a gaming machine, it can be assumed that the entire game content includes a game played using a gaming ball or other appropriate article. Therefore, even such a game machine can be a target of a game machine in which a game is played using a game medium.

Further, the effect display device in the above-described embodiment is preferably a liquid crystal display device, but is not necessarily limited to the liquid crystal display device. It may be an EL display device, a plasma display device, a display device such as a CRT, or the like.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 200 Plate unit 201 Upper plate (storage unit)
210 Dish unit base 212 Upper dish body (storage part)
212a Guidance passage 220 Production operation unit 220A Mounting base unit 220B Touch unit 220C Button unit 244 Upper plate side liquid crystal display device (image display device)
246 Touch panel 257 Upper plate effect button (press button)
260 dish unit cover (bulging member)
261 Lower plate opening 262 Upper plate lower coating 1400 Liquid crystal display device 6010 Game ball taxiway unit 6010n Effective gate 6011 Production gate 6201 Sub-projector display device 6203 Projector 621-6214 Screen

Claims (1)

A lottery means for drawing lots based on the establishment of predetermined starting conditions, and
A privilege granting means capable of executing control to grant a privilege to a player based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a specific result.
An effect image output control means that controls the display output of the effect image according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
An effect additional display body provided so as to be able to add a specific effect element to the effect image displayed and output by the effect image output control means is provided.
When the specific effect element is added by the effect addition display body, the specific movable body that can be visually recognized by the player is positioned in the display area where the effect image is displayed and output. A game machine to be.